l If the manual charging switch (J) is pressed, the symbol of MiEV Remote will blink. ... For detail information, refer to the instruction manual accompanying the child restraint sys-tem.
For a quicker charge, press the 8A/12A manual selection button (E) and confirm that the 12A indicator (F) is illuminated. Each time you press the.
i-MiEV / 2016 OWNER'S MANUAL
i-MiEV
2016 / OWNER'S MANUAL
Table of contents
Overview
1
Quick index
2
General information/Charging
3
Seat and restraint systems
4
Features and controls
5
Driving safety
6
Comfort controls
7
For emergencies
8
Vehicle care and maintenance
9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
10
Specifications
11
Alphabetical index
12
Instruments and controls (Driver's area)
1 Instruments and controls (Driver's area)
Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-46 Turn signal lever P.5-48 Front fog light switch P.5-49
Instrument cluster P.5-36
N00100202632
Wiper and washer switch P.5-50 Rear window wiper and washer switch P.5-51
Electric motor switch P.5-18
Electric remote-controlled outside mirror switch P.5-17
Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF switch P.5-29 Heated driver's seat switch P.4-4
Fuses P.9-18
1-1 Overview
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) airbag (for driver's seat) P.4-20, 4-26 Horn switch P.5-53
Regular charging lid opener
Steering control switches for Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped) p.5-54
P.3-18
Steering wheel audio remote control switches (if so equipped) p.7-22
Instruments and controls (Instrument panel)
Instruments and controls (Instrument panel)
1
N00100202645
Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-49 Audio (if so equipped) P.7-11 Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System (if so equipped) Refer to the separate "Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System owner's manual"
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passenger's seat) P.4-20
Side vents P.7-2
Cup holder P.5-80
Center vents P.7-2
Air conditioning P.7-4
USB input terminal (if so equipped) P.5-73
Heated front passenger's seat switch P.4-4
Quick charging lid opener P.3-27
Glove compartment P.5-79
Hood release lever P.9-3
Card holder P.5-79
Electric rear window defogger switch P.5-52 12 V power outlet P.5-76 Selector lever P.5-21
Parking brake lever P.5-16
Cup holder P.5-80
Overview 1-2
Interior
1 Interior
Dome light (rear) P.5-78
Assist grip P.5-80
Seat belts P.4-8
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) curtain airbags P.4-31
Head restraints P.4-6
Sun visors P.5-75 Vanity mirror P.5-75 Card holder P.5-75
Hands-free microphone (if so equipped) P.5-54
Dome light (front)/Reading lights P.5-76
N00100302369
Inside rearview mirror P.5-16
Tether anchors for child restraint system P.4-16
Tire repair kit P.8-5
1-3 Overview
Window lock switch P.5-15
Rear seat P.4-5
Front seat P.4-3
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) side airbag (for front seats) P.4-30
Power door lock switch P.5-9
Power window switch P.5-14
Under the hood/Electric motor unit room
Under the hood
Under the hood/Electric motor unit room
1
N00100800041
Electric motor unit room
Windshield washer fluid reservoir P.9-7
12V starter battery P.9-7
Coolant reservoir P.9-4
On board charger/DC-DC converter P.9-2
Hot water heater reservoir P.9-4
Brake fluid reservoir P.9-7
Brake electric vacuum pump P.5-24 Inverter P.3-34
Overview 1-4
Outside (Front)
1 Outside (Front)
Windshield wipers P.5-50 Hood P.9-3
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-17 Power window P.5-14
N00100602450
Quick charging lid P.3-27
Front fog lights P.5-49, 9-22, 9-24 Daytime running lights P.5-46, 9-22, 9-24
1-5 Overview
Main drive lithium-ion battery P.9-2 Front side-marker lights P.5-46, 9-22, 9-23 Front turn signal lights P.5-48, 9-22, 9-24
Headlights P.5-46, 9-22 Parking lights P.5-46, 9-22
Outside (Rear)
Outside (Rear)
1
N00100601352
Back-up light P.9-22, 9-25 Antenna P.7-27
Tail and stop lights P.5-46, 9-22, 9-25
High-mounted stop light P.9-22, 9-26
Rear turn signal lights P.5-48, 9-22, 9-25
Rear window wiper P.5-51
Liftgate P.5-11
License plate lights P.5-46, 9-22, 9-27
Rear-view camera (if so equipped) P.5-34
Rear side-marker lights P.5-46, 9-22, 9-26
Keyless entry system P.5-5 Locking and unlocking P.5-8
Regular charge port light P.3-17, 9-22
Regular charging lid P.3-18
Tire pressure monitoring system P.5-30 Size of tires and wheels P.11-6 Tire inflation pressure P.9-13 Tire rotation P.9-15 Tire chains P.9-16
Overview 1-6
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you're driving...
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you're driving...
NOTE
These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the electric motor switch is first turned to "ON".
N00200702221
2
Warning light
Do this
Ref. page
12V starter battery charging system warning light
or Brake warning light
Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn off the electric motor unit. Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer for assistance.
If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully released.
If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, stop and check the brake fluid level.
If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard braking and high speeds, and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer for assistance.
P.5-45 P.5-44
Electric motor unit warning light
Park your vehicle in a safe place and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer for assistance.
P.5-45
Quick index 2-1
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you're driving...
Warning light
Do this
Ref. page
2 If this light comes on while the electric motor unit is running, it may
become harder to turn the steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at a P.5-28
Electric power steering system (EPS) warning
certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
light
When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning
and only the ordinary braking system is functioning. Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the electric motor unit.
Test the system as described on page 5-27. If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recom-
P.5-26, 5-27
Anti-lock braking system warning light
mend that you have the system checked at a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
SRS warning light Power down warning light
Immediately have the airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system checked at a certified i-MiEV dealer.
P.4-13, 4-26
If this light comes on while driving, avoid sudden acceleration and sudden
starting. When the remaining power in the main drive lithium-ion battery is low,
recharge the main drive lithium-ion battery as soon as possible.
P.5-45
2-2 Quick index
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you're driving...
Warning light
Do this
Ref. page
2
Have the transmission checked at a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
P.5-21
Selector lever position indicator in the instrument cluster flashes slowly and
ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator
Tire pressure monitoring system warning light
Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn off the electric motor unit. Restart the electric motor unit and check to see if the indicator comes on again.
If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected at a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning and normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.
If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible. (See "Tire inflation pressures" on page 9-13.) Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes of driving.
If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continuously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to normal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the vehicle inspected at a certified i-MiEV dealer.
P.5-30 P.5-31, 5-32
Quick index 2-3
If this problem occurs...
If this problem occurs...
2 Problem
Do this
Cannot turn the key.
From "LOCK" to "ACC". Turn the key while turning the steering wheel in either direction.
From "ACC" to "LOCK". Check the position of the selector lever. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the "P" (PARK) position.
N00200901923
Ref. Page
P.5-19, 5-20
Cannot shift the selector lever from the "P" (PARK) position.
The windows are fogged up.
Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal. Check that the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the " " or " " position. 2. Turn on the blower.
P.5-21 P.7-9
The electric motor unit does not start.
The lights do not come on.
The lights are dim.
The horn does not honk.
Have the 12V starter battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
The horn sound is weak.
Cannot charge the main drive lith-
ium-ion battery.
2-4 Quick index
P.8-2, 9-7
Problem
Do this
The vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, or snow.
Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it.
If this problem occurs...
Ref. Page
P.8-13
2
WARNING
When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
Avoid spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in transmission failure. If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.
Problem
Do this
The brakes are not functioning properly after driving through water.
Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal.
A tire is punctured.
Ref. page P.6-5
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level. 2. Repair the flat tire with tire repair kit.
P.8-5
Quick index 2-5
General information/Charging
3
Familiarizing yourself with i-MiEV ................................................3-2 Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-6 Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts .....................................................3-8 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-8 Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat ................................3-8 Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold ..............................3-10 Charging ........................................................................................3-13 Precautions during Charging the
Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery ................................................3-15 Regular charging
(charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet) .........................3-16 EV charging cable ..........................................................................3-23 Regular charging
(using 240 V Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment) ....................3-26 Quick charging
(charging method with quick charger) .......................................3-27 Charging troubleshooting guide ....................................................3-31 High-Voltage components ..............................................................3-34 MiEV Remote System ...................................................................3-36
Familiarizing yourself with i-MiEV
Familiarizing yourself with i-MiEV
N01200100013
3 i-MiEV is a pure electric vehicle. Some of the
vehicle systems operate differently from and have different characteristics than ordinary vehicles equipped with an internal combustion engine. For this reason, it is very important to read carefully this entire owner's manual.
Main features
N01200200027
i-MiEV is powered only by electricity. This vehicle does not emit exhaust gases, such as carbon dioxide and nitrogen oxide.
The i-MiEV uses electricity stored in the lithium ion battery. The lithium-ion battery is called the main drive lithium-ion battery. This vehicle does not have an internal combustion engine and does not require gasoline or diesel fuel.
The main drive lithium-ion battery must be charged with electricity to drive the vehicle. As the vehicle operates, the main drive lithium-ion battery gradually discharges. If the main drive lithium-ion battery becomes completely discharged, the vehicle will not operate until it is recharged. The charging process can take up to 23 hours as described more precisely in this manual.
This vehicle uses two types of batteries. One is 12V starter battery that is the same type of the battery used in ordinary vehicles. It is called the 12V starter battery. The other battery which propels the vehicle is called the main drive lithium-ion battery.
The 12V starter battery provides power to the vehicle systems and features such as the audio system, supplemental restraint systems, headlights and windshield wiper.
The main drive lithium-ion battery provides power to the electric motor that propels the vehicle and charges the 12V starter battery.
Through a process called regenerative braking, the main drive lithium-ion battery is automatically charged, while the vehicle is decelerating or being driven downhill.
NOTE
If the 12V starter battery is discharge, the electric motor unit cannot be started. And also the main drive lithium-ion battery cannot be charged.
WARNING
Pay special attention to pedestrians. Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians may not know the vehicle is approaching and may step into the path of vehicle travel. Refer to "Acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS)" on page 5-23.
When leaving the vehicle, always turn off the electric motor switch. Refer to "Electric motor switch" on page 5-18.
When parking, to avoid unintended vehicle movement, always move the selector lever to "P" (PARK) position and apply the parking brake because the vehicle can move when the ready indicator light is ON. When the ready indicator light is ON, do not leave the selector lever in a position other than the "P" (PARK) position. For the ready indicator, refer to "Indicator and warning light package" on page 5-43.
3-2 General information/Charging
WARNING
Keep the brake pedal depressed until you are ready to drive. When the vehicle is in the "D" (DRIVE), "ECO" (ECO MODE), "B" (REGENERATIVE BRAKE MODE) or "R" (REVERSE) position, if you release the brake pedal and even if you do not depress accelerator, the vehicle will creep and may move slowly.
Regenerative braking
N01205601036
Motion energy is converted into electric energy using the motor as a power generator. While decelerating, electric energy will be created and used to charge to the main drive lithium-ion battery.
If you lift your foot off the accelerator pedal while driving, a braking force that equivalent to the engine braking of a gasoline or diesel powered vehicle engine vehicle will be generate. For increased regenerative braking, set the selector lever to "B" (REGENERATIVE BRAKE MODE) or "ECO" (ECO MODE) as follows: · "B": Strong regenerative braking (For downhill driving) · "ECO": Moderate regenerative braking (For economical driving or gentle downhill driving)
Familiarizing yourself with i-MiEV
As greater brake force is applied by depressing the brake pedal, increased
Main drive lithium-ion battery
regenerative braking occurs.
N01200300015
When regenerative braking produces strong brake force, the stop lights will illuminate, even if the brake pedal is not depressed.
3 WARNING
The main drive lithium-ion battery is a sealed high voltage battery and has no user serviceable parts.
· To avoid severe burns and/or electrical
NOTE
When the main drive lithium-ion battery level is full or nearly full, or the main drive lithium-ion battery temperature is too high or too low, the regenerative braking force may be reduced and stronger service brake effort may be required to operate the brakes. When the main drive lithium-ion battery level is no longer full or near full, or the main drive lithium-ion battery temperature has returned to a normal range, the regenerative brake force
shock that may result in serious injury or death, never attempt to detach the main drive lithium-ion battery from the vehicle or try to disassemble it. · Never attempt to dispose or recycle the main drive lithium-ion battery by yourself. Consult with a certified i-MiEV dealer, when the main drive lithium-ion battery is disposed or recycled. · Never attempt to use the main drive lithium-ion battery for any other purpose.
will resume. If a problem occurs in the electric motor unit,
or if the ABS and/or the ASC have been activated, the regenerative braking will be
CAUTION
To help prevent damage to the main drive
restricted. The service brakes will still oper-
lithium-ion battery, follow the instructions
ate.
described below. Failure to do so can result
in damage to the main drive lithium-ion bat-
tery that will not be covered by the main
drive lithium-ion battery warranty.
· Do not leave your vehicle with the energy
level gauge (Refer to "Energy level gauge"
on page 5-41) showing 0 bars.
General information/Charging 3-3
Familiarizing yourself with i-MiEV
CAUTION
· Repeatedly performing quick charging can
reduce battery capacity. Regular charging is
3
recommended unless quick charging is necessary.
Do not store your vehicle at ambient temper-
atures above 131 °F (55 °C) for over 24
hours, or below
-13 °F (-25 °C) for over 7 days. The tempera-
tures may damage the main drive lithium-ion
battery.
NOTE
It is recommended that your vehicle be stored at temperatures below 77 °F (25 °C) to help maximize the life of the main drive lithium-ion battery.
Decrease of battery capacity
N01205500012
The capacity of the lithium-ion battery used as the main drive lithium-ion battery on your i-MiEV, like other commonly used lithium ion batteries, will decrease according to time and usage. This type of decrease in battery capacity is normal, and is not indicative of any defect or failure in your main drive lithium-ion battery. As the main drive lithium-ion battery capacity decreases, the initial cruising range of the vehicle will similarly decrease.
3-4 General information/Charging
Mitsubishi Motors estimates that after 5 years, the capacity of the main drive lithium-ion battery provided with your vehicle will be approximately 80% of the original capacity. After 10 years, the capacity should be approximately 70% of the original capacity. These are only estimates, and the actual capacity of your vehicle battery over time will depend on a variety of factors including how your vehicle is used, stored and charged. Factors that can adversely affect battery capacity over time include frequent driving using aggressive acceleration/deceleration, repeated frequent use of the quick charger, and operation/storage in extreme temperature environments.
The main drive lithium-ion battery has a limited service life, and when its charging capacity falls, owners should bring their vehicle to a certified i-MiEV dealer for inspection and possible battery replacement.
For details regarding the warranty coverage for the main drive lithium-ion battery, refer to the Warranty and Maintenance Manual.
NOTE
To help maintain the capacity of the main drive lithium-ion battery, the following are recommended:
NOTE
· Fully charge the vehicle by regular charging every 2 weeks.
· Do not repeat charging when the main drive lithium-ion battery is at or near full charge.
Cruising range
N01200400016
The distance you can drive the vehicle (cruising range) depends on a number of factors including available charge, weather, temperature, usage, battery age, topography, and driving style. When the main drive lithium-ion battery is new, the estimated cruising range with a fully charged main drive lithium-ion battery is 62 miles (100 km) based on the EPA laboratory test commonly called the combined range. Your actual range can vary, either initially or as the battery ages and with use over time. As the main drive lithium-ion battery capacity decreases, the cruising range of the vehicle will similarly decrease. Refer to "Decrease of battery capacity" on page 3-4.
NOTE
Since cooling or heating consumes power from the main drive lithium-ion battery, operation of these functions will reduce the cruising range.
NOTE
Put the selector lever in the "B" (REGENERATIVE BRAKE MODE) or "Eco" (ECO MODE) position according to the road condition. Using appropriate regenerative braking can help increase the cruising range. Refer to "Regenerative braking" on page 3-3.
Range-Driving conditions
Shorten driving range
Range Reducing High acceleration, speed
Heater on
A/C on Highway Heavy payload Windy, wet Uphill, rough D-mode
Condition Driving style
Heater usage
A/C usage City/Highway
Payload Weather Road conditions Drive mode
Familiarizing yourself with i-MiEV
3
N01205900016
Lengthen driving range
Range Extending Low acceleration, speed
Heater off (or use seat heater)
A/C off City
Light payload Calm, dry
Flat/Downhill, smooth (Eco or B mode)
General information/Charging 3-5
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle
Operating sound under charg- For persons with electro-medi-
ing or Remote Climate Control cal apparatus such as implant-
N01206300020 able cardiac pacemaker or
3 While charging, even if the electric motor implantable cardiovascular
switch is in the "LOCK" position, you may hear operating sounds such as sounds from
defibrillator
the cooling fan and air conditioning compres-
N01206400021
sor when operating the main drive lithium-ion battery cooling system or Remote Climate Control. This is normal. Refer to "Remote Climate Control" on page 3-36, 3-46.
WARNING
Before charging, read the instructions described below carefully and follow them. Also read and follow the instructions for "Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)" on
page 3-16, "Regular charging (using 240 V
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment)" on
page 3-26, and "Quick charging (charging
method with quick charger)" on page
3-27. Before charging, individuals using an elec-
tro-medical apparatus such as implantable pacemakers and implantable
cardiovascular-defibrillators should check
with the manufacturer of the apparatus to
confirm the effect of the electromagnetic
waves from charging. The electromagnetic
waves may affect the operations of the electro-medical apparatus.
WARNING
When performing regular charging, keep your electro-medical apparatus, such as implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable cardiovascular defibrillator, away from the charge connector, EV charging cable, control box or regular charging station.
Do not perform quick charging and keep away from a quick charger. Electromagnetic waves produced by a quick charger may affect the operation of your electricmedical apparatus. If you have accidentally approached a quick charger, walk away from the quick charger immediately. If quick charging is necessary, ask someone for help.
While charging; · Do not stay inside the vehicle. · Do not go inside the vehicle, for example to remove or place an item in the passenger compartment. · Do not open the liftgate, for example to remove or place an item in the cargo area.
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle
N01200500017
This vehicle should not be modified with non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures
3-6 General information/Charging
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle
high quality vehicles with an emphasis on safety and durability. Modifications using non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may affect the performance, safety and/or durability of your vehicle, and may violate applicable state and/or federal regulations.
DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICATIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED UNDER WARRANTY.
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Manual for further details regarding warranty coverage.
Installation of accessories
N01200600018
CAUTION
Before any electrical or electronic accessories are installed, consult a certified i-MiEV dealer.
WARNING
If you choose to use a cellular phone while driving, you must not allow that usage to
3 distract you in the safe operation of your
vehicle. Anything, including cellular phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident. Refer to and follow all local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving.
Examples of modifications to your vehicle that can cause damage or performance problems include the following:
Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts
Failure to use required fluids (refer to "Refill capacities" on page 11-7)
Failure to use proper size tires and wheels Modification of the suspension, electric
motor, drive train, batteries (main drive lithium-ion battery and 12V starter battery), charging systems or electrical wiring systems Modification of any onboard computer/control module, including reprogramming, or replacing/adding chips to any onboard computer/control module
The installation of accessories, optional parts, etc., should only be carried out within the limits prescribed by law in the driving area and in accordance with the guidelines and warnings contained within the documents accompanying this vehicle. Only Mitsubishi Motors approved accessories should be fitted to your vehicle.
Improper installation of electrical parts could cause fire. Refer to the "Modification/alterations to the electrical systems" section within this owner's manual.
Tires and wheels which do not meet specifications must not be used. Refer to the "Specifications" section for information regarding wheel and tire sizes.
Important point!
Due to the large number of accessory and replacement parts provided by different manufacturers in the market, it is not always possible for a certified i-MiEV dealer to check whether the attachment or installation of nonMitsubishi Motors genuine parts will affect the driving safety of your Mitsubishi-vehicle.
Modification/alterations to the electrical systems
N01200700019
Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is important to consult a certified i-MiEV dealer before installation of any accessory which
General information/Charging 3-7
Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts
may involve modification of the electrical systems.
Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts
protection items, as well as interior and exterior accessories available for your specific model.
3
CAUTION
Please consult a certified i-MiEV dealer con-
N01200800010
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
California Perchlorate
cerning any such accessory fitment or modification.
designed and manufactured to meet high standards of performance, and are recommended
Materials Requirements
If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
N01200900011
improper installation methods are used (protective fuses not included, etc.), electronic devices may be adversely affected, resulting in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
able from a certified i-MiEV dealer are a wide variety of accessories to personalize your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors autho-
Certain components of this vehicle, such as airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate materials.
rized accessories to choose from to tailor your Special handling may apply. For additional
new vehicle to your own personal preference. information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
A certified i-MiEV dealer's Parts Manager waste/perchlorate.
has information on various audio systems,
Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat
N01201001045
When the vehicle is driven in a high ambient temperature, its air-conditioner performance can be insufficient. Also, using the air conditioner will reduce the vehicle's cruising range.
When the ambient temperature is approximately 104 °F (40 °C) or higher, the phenomena described below may occur. Please take the described actions.
Even if the ambient temperature is approximately 104 °F (40 °C) or lower, when performing quick charging, driving at high-speed and uphill repeatedly, the phenomena described below may occur. Please take the described actions.
3-8 General information/Charging
Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat
Approx. ambient temperature
Phenomena
Corrective action
Approx. 104 °F Startup and driving · During quick charging, repeated high-speed driving, or
· Stop the vehicle in a safe place
(40 °C) or higher
3 repeated uphill driving, the power down warning light* comes for a while, avoid quick charg-
on and the motor output is restricted to protect the main drive ing, and wait for the power
lithium-ion battery or motor (electric motor unit).
down warning light* to go off.
· Regenerative braking performance may decrease. When brak-
ing, depress the brake pedal more strongly.
· If you continue driving after the power down warning light* comes on, the vehicle may stop after you have driven a few miles/kilometres.
Charging and battery · During quick charging, charging times get longer.
Approx.113 °F (45 °C) or higher
Startup and driving
· During quick charging, repeated high-speed driving, or repeated uphill driving, the power down warning light* comes on and the motor output is restricted to protect the main drive lithium-ion battery and/or motor (electric motor unit).
· Regenerative braking performance may decrease. When braking, depress the brake pedal more strongly.
· Stop the vehicle in a safe place for a while, avoid quick charging, and wait for the power down warning light* to go off.
· If you continue driving after the power down warning light* comes on, the vehicle may stop after you have driven a few miles/kilometres.
Charging and battery · The EV charging cable (regular charging cable) cannot be used.
· During quick charging, charging times get longer.
· Park in a safe, well-ventilated and shady place.
· The main drive lithium-ion battery capacity is decreased more quickly, and the cruising range is decreased.
General information/Charging 3-9
Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold
Approx. ambient temperature
Phenomena
Approx. 140 °F Startup and driving · The power down warning light* comes on, and the vehicle
3 (60 °C) or higher
may stop.
Charging and battery · The EV charging cable (regular charging cable) cannot be used.
· Quick charging may become impossible.
Corrective action
· Park in a safe, well-ventilated and shady place, avoid quick charging, and wait for the power down warning light* to go off.
· Park in a safe, well-ventilated and shady place.
NOTE
*: Refer to "Power down warning light" on page 5-45. Illumination of the power down warning light does not indicate a malfunction.
Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold
N01201101033
When the vehicle is driven in a low ambient temperatures, its heater performance can be insufficient. Also, using the heater can reduce the vehicle's cruising range.
When the ambient temperature is approximately 5 °F (-15 °C) or lower, the phenomena described below may occur. Please take the corrective actions described below.
3-10 General information/Charging
Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold
Approx. ambient tempera-
ture
Phenomena
Corrective action
Approx.5 °F (-15 °C) or
lower
Startup and driving
· Motor output is restricted, and the power down warning light*1 may come on.
3 · Keep driving if you can drive at a safe speed.
<Reference: When the main drive lithium-ion battery tem-
If you cannot drive at a safe speed,
perature is 5 °F (-15 °C) or lower and the main drive lithium- stop the vehicle in a safe place and
ion battery's remaining power is 50 %, the driving perfor-
charge the main drive lithium-ion bat-
mance may decrease by approximately 30 %>
tery.
· Regenerative braking performance may decrease.
· When braking, depress the brake pedal more strongly.
Charging and · Charging times get longer.
battery
· Complete charging may not be possible.
· When you have finished driving, charge the main drive lithium-ion battery before battery temperature falls.
Approx.-13 °F (-25 °C) or lower
Startup and driving
· Motor output is restricted, and the power down warning light*1 may come on. <Reference: When the main drive lithium-ion battery temperature is -13 °F (-25 °C) or lower and the main drive lithium-ion battery's remaining power is 50 %, the driving performance may decrease by approximately 50 %>
· Keep driving if you can drive at the same speed as surrounding vehicles. If you cannot drive the same speed as surrounding vehicles, stop the vehicle in a safe place and charge the main drive lithium-ion battery.
· Regenerative braking performance may decrease or be elimi- · When braking, depress the brake
nated.
pedal more strongly.
Charging and · Charging may become impossible. battery
· When you have finished driving, charge the main drive lithium-ion battery before battery temperature falls.
General information/Charging 3-11
Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold
Approx. ambient tempera-
ture
Phenomena
Corrective action
3 Approx. -22 °F Startup and · The ready indicator*2 does not come on, and startup may not · In the daytime, wait for the tempera-
(-30 °C) or
driving
be possible.
ture to rise. When the temperature in
lower
· In the worst-case scenario, the vehicle may become undriv-
the vicinity of the main drive lithium-
able (with the energy level gauge and cruising range indica- ion battery has risen, start up.
tions still shown).
· Regenerative braking performance may decrease or be elimi- · When braking, depress the brake
nated.
pedal more strongly
Charging and · Charging may become impossible battery
· In the daytime, wait for the temperature to rise. When the temperature in the vicinity of the main drive lithiumion battery has risen, begin charging.
NOTE
*1: Refer to "Power down warning light" on page 5-45. Illumination of the power down warning light does not indicate a malfunction. *2: Refer to "Ready indicator" on page 5-44.
3-12 General information/Charging
Charging
Charging
N01201201047
Your vehicle comes standard with a charge port and charging cable (EV charging cable) that uses a household outlet (AC 110-120V) as a charging
3 source. You may also charge your vehicle using an i-MiEV compatible 220-240V charging device (EVSE*1 - available separately). Your vehicle
comes equipped with an additional quick charge port to be used with a CHAdeMO*2 quick charger.
Category
Charge port
Charge connector
Charging Source
Charging time Reference
Level 1
Regular charging 110-120V
(Attached EV charging cable)
passenger side of vehicle
Level 2 Regular charging
220-240V (Primary Home EVSE*1 DockAvailable sepa-
rately)
passenger side of vehicle
110-120V household outlet (15 amp dedicated circuit
required)
120V/8A: Approximately 22-25 hours 120V/12A:
Approximately 1416 hours
P.3-16
Approximately 6-7 P.3-16,
hours
3-26
Home or public charging device
General information/Charging 3-13
Charging Category
Charge port
Charge connector
Charging Source
Charging time Reference
3
Quick charging (charging method with quick char-
ger)
Approximately 30 minutes for 80 %
charge
P.3-27
driver side of vehicle
Public charging stations where available
*1: EVSE = Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment
*2: CHAdeMO is a standard for quick charging of electric vehicle originally started in Japan, and the contents have also become international standard.
Charging time will vary depending on battery condition, air temperature and condition of power source (such as specification of the quick charger). A vehicle equipped with a quick charge port is compatible with most CHAdeMO connectors on charging stations. Charging stations using the CHAdeMO standard are UL certified and safe to use in the US.
NOTE
The 12V starter battery will be automatically charged during charging and also while the ready indicator is illuminated. Refer to "Ready indicator" on page
5-44. Repeatedly performing only quick charging can reduce battery capacity. Regular charging is recommended unless quick charging is necessary. If the 12V starter battery is discharged, the main drive lithium-ion battery cannot be charged. Refer to "Jump-starting" on page 8-2.
3-14 General information/Charging
Precautions during Charging the Main Drive Lithiumion Battery
N01202601051
WARNING
Improper charging can result in a fire, property damage, and serious injury or death. Read the instructions described below carefully and follow them. Also read and follow the instructions for "Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120V outlet)" on page 3-16, Regular charging (using 240V Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment) on page 3-26 and "Quick charging (charging method with quick charger)" on page 3-27 before using the charging device. · Do not touch regular charge port, regular charge connector, plug and outlet with wet hands. · Keep away from water when connecting the regular charge port, regular charge connector, plug and outlet. · Do not perform charging outdoors in adverse weather, such as heavy rain, heavy snow or strong winds, or when adverse weather is expected.
Precautions during Charging the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery
WARNING
· Never charge or touch the vehicle when lightning or thunder is observed or expected. A lightning strike may back feed into the regular charger causing damage and possible personal injury or death. If lightning or thunder begins during regular charging, do not touch the vehicle or the EV charging cable and turn off the breaker.
· Make sure there is no water or foreign materials in the charge port, charge connector or plug, and that they are not damaged or affected by rust or corrosion. If any of these conditions are noticeable, do not charge the main drive lithium-ion battery.
· Never touch the metal contacts of the charge port, charge connector or plug.
· Never disassemble or modify the charge port or charging cable.
· If you notice unusual odor or smoke coming from the vehicle, charging cable or plug, or if the charging cable or plug becomes hot to the touch, stop charging immediately.
Keep away from the cooling fan under the hood during charging. During charging, the cooling fan may automatically be operated even if the electric motor switch is in the "LOCK" position.
WARNING
Some public regular chargers may not be compatible with your vehicle. If necessary,
3 consult an administrator or the maker of
the regular charger to determine whether the charger is compatible with your vehicle before using it. Also be sure to use the regular charger according to operating procedures indicated on the body of the regular charger.
CAUTION
Do not place the selector lever in any position other than the "P" (PARK) position while the regular charger is connected. If the selector lever is placed in a position other than the "P" position, the vehicle could accidentally move resulting in damage to the regular charge connector. If the selector lever is placed in any position other than "P" position while the regular charge connector is still connected and the electric motor switch is the "ON" position, a warning buzzer will sound.
To prevent damage to the charging equipment: · Do not close the charge port lid without closing the cap. · Do not subject the charging equipment to impact. · Do not pull or twist the charge cable. · Do not drag the charge cable.
General information/Charging 3-15
Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)
CAUTION
· Do not store charging equipment in loca-
tions where the temperature is above 185 °F
3
(85 °C) or below -40 °F (-40 °C). · Do not place the charging equipment close
to a heater or other heat source.
Make sure the inner cap is closed on the
charge port when charging is finished. If the
charge port lid is closed when the cap is
opened, water or foreign materials may enter
the charge port.
Do not charge when a vehicle body cover is
in use.
This may cause damage to the charge con-
nector.
Do not attempt to perform a jump start on the
12V starter battery at the same time that the
main drive lithium-ion battery is being
charged. Doing so may damage the vehicle
or charging cable and could cause an injury.
See "Jump-starting" in the "6. For emer-
gency" section.
Forcing the charge connector to connect may
cause damage to the charging equipment and
vehicle.
NOTE
Repeatedly performing only quick charging can reduce the battery capacity. Regular charging is recommended unless quick charging is necessary.
NOTE
To help maintain the capacity of the main drive lithium-ion battery, the following is recommended:
· If you repeatedly perform only the quick charging, fully charge the vehicle by regular charging every 2 weeks.
· Do not repeat charging when the main drive lithium-ion battery is at or near the full charge.
Both of the regular charging and quick charge cannot be performed at the same time. The quick charging is given priority.
While charging, even if the electric motor switch is in the "LOCK" position, you may hear operating sounds such as sounds from the cooling fan and air conditioning compressor when operating the main drive lithium-ion battery cooling system or Remote Climate Control. This is normal. Refer to "Remote Climate Control" on page 3-36, 3-46.
It is recommended that you perform regular charging from 2 bars or less on the energy level gauge to full at least once every three months. This allows the energy level gauge to adjust to decreased battery capacity and correctly display the remaining energy in the main drive lithium-ion battery. A certified i-MiEV dealer can also adjust the energy level gauge for you when requested.
Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)
N01203101040
Carefully read instructions regarding "Precautions during charging the main drive lithium-ion battery" on page 3-15 and described in this section and also instructions on "EV charging cable" on page 3-23 or instructions for a charging device you use, and follow them.
WARNING
Improper charging can result in a fire, property damage, and serious injury or death.
Always use a grounded outlet protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter, rated AC 120V and rated for 15A or more connected to a dedicated branch circuit. If the outlet is not grounded, the risk of electrical shock will increase in the event of an insulation failure in the EV charging cable. If the circuit is shared, and another electrical device is being used at the same time the vehicle is charging, the circuit may heat abnormally, the breaker may trip and the circuit may cause adverse interference on household electrical appliances such as televisions and audio systems.
3-16 General information/Charging
WARNING
Individuals using an electro-medical apparatus such as implantable pacemakers and implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators should check with the manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm the effect of the electromagnetic waves from charging. The electromagnetic waves may affect the operations of the electromedical apparatus.
If you use an electro-medical apparatus, such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker or an implantable cardiovascular defibrillator, observe the following precautions before charging;
· Keep your electro-medical apparatus away from the charge connector, EV charging cable, control box and regular charging station.
· While regular charging;
· Do not stay inside the vehicle. · Do not go inside the vehicle, for exam-
ple to remove or place an item in the passenger compartment. · Do not open the liftgate, for example to remove or place an item in the cargo area. To reduce the risk of electric shock, connect only to a properly grounded and waterproofed outlet. Never use an extension cable, multi-plug adapter or conversion adapter. Using them may cause overheating resulting in fire.
Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)
WARNING
Never force the connection if the charging cable or plug shows damage or is not easily connected due to foreign material entering the plug or the outlet.
Never use an outlet that is worn, damaged, or will not hold the plug firmly.
Make sure that the plug is inserted all the way into the outlet before use.
While it is normal for the plug and charging cable to become warm during charging, discontinue use immediately if the plug or charging cable becomes too hot to touch.
Never pull the cable to remove the plug. Never connect or disconnect the plug with
a wet hand.
NOTE
Your vehicle is equipped with an EV charging cable for regular charging. Refer to "EV charging cable" on page 3-23.
When connecting or disconnecting the regular charge connector, insert/pull out the connector straight. Also, do not incline or twist the connector. Doing so could cause a bad connection or malfunction.
Make sure to lock the doors to prevent theft, etc. during charging.
Regular charge port light
N01216200019
Regular charge port light (A) comes on when
3 the UNLOCK button on the remote control
transmitter is pressed, or when any door or the liftgate is opened. The regular charge port light and the dome lights (with the dome light switch in the "DOOR" position) will come on simultaneously. However, the regular charge port light will not come on when you press the dome light (front) lens or slide the dome light (rear) switch to the "ON" position. For details, refer to "Keyless entry system" on page 5-5, "Dome light (Front)/Reading lights" on page 5-76 and "Dome light (Rear)" on page 5-78. To turn on the charge port light again, press the UNLOCK button on the remote control transmitter, or open any door or the liftgate.
A
General information/Charging 3-17
Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)
NOTE
The time until the light goes off can be
adjusted. See a certified i-MiEV dealer for
3
details.
Charging from rated AC 120 V outlet
N01203201041
1. Fully apply the parking brake and place the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position.
2. Stop the electric devices such as lamps and turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position.
3. Pull the regular charging opener (B) at the bottom left of the instrument panel to open the regular charging lid (C) at the right rear side of the vehicle.
B C
4. Remove key and lock the vehicle. 5. Press the tab (D) to open the inner lid (E).
D
F
E
WARNING
Do not touch the metal terminal of the charge port (F) and the regular charge connector. Doing so could cause an electric shock and/or malfunction.
CAUTION
To help keeping foreign material out of the charge port, do not leave the inner lid open without connecting the charge connector.
NOTE
There is a hole on the charge port for water drainage. If this hole is blocked and water gets trapped in the charge port, do not charge. Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
If the charge port becomes frozen, use a hair dryer to defrost and dry the regular charge port before charging. Forcing the charging connector to connect with the regular charge port while it is frozen can damage the regular charge port and/or prevent charging.
6. Insert the charging cable plug into an outlet.
3-18 General information/Charging
WARNING
Make sure that the plug is inserted all the way into the outlet before use.
To reduce the risk of electric shock or fire due to electric leak, always use a grounded outlet protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter, rated AC 120V and rated for 15A or more, that is connected to a dedicated branch circuit. If the outlet is not grounded, the risk of electrical shock will increase in the event of an insulation failure in the EV charging cable. If the circuit is shared, and another electrical device is being used at the same time the vehicle is charging, the circuit may heat abnormally, the breaker may trip and the circuit may cause adverse interference on the household electrical appliances such as televisions and audio systems.
Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)
WARNING
Never use an extension cable, multi-plug adapter or conversion adapter. Using them may cause overheating resulting in fire.
To prevent an electrical shock or fire, do not use a multi type outlet. The grounded line may not work properly and it is not a dedicated type outlet.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, connect only to a properly grounded and waterproofed outlet.
Always use an AC 120V outlet rated for 15A or more.
7. Press the 8A/12A manual selection button (G) on the control box to charge quickly when needed. If selected, the 12A indicator (H) will illuminated.
WARNING
If the selected electrical current level exceeds the electrical current capacity of
3 the electrical circuit or outlet being used
for charging, the circuit and outlet can overheat resulting in fire. If the capacity of an outlet and its electrical circuit are unknown, do not use the outlet for charging the vehicle.
8. Open the cap (I) on the regular charge connector (J) and make sure that there is no foreign matter such as dust at the end of the regular charge connector and the regular charge port.
J
G
H
I
9. Connect the regular charge connector until a click is heard without pressing the button (K).
General information/Charging 3-19
Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)
NOTE
Do not connect or disconnect the regular
K
charge connector repeatedly in a short time
3
period. You may experience difficulty charging your vehicle.
10. Make sure that the charging indicator on the instrument cluster is illuminated.
NOTE
The charge level for main drive lithium-ion battery can be checked with the energy level gauge (L) on the instrument cluster. Refer to "Energy level gauge" on page 5-41.
CAUTION
Do not clasp the top of regular charge connector. It could cause injury to from the protrusion on the lid.
NOTE
If the electric motor switch is turned to the "START" position with the regular charge connector connected to the regular charge port, the electric motor unit cannot be started.
L
If the charging indicator is not illuminated, charging will not start. Make sure that the regular charge port, the plug and the connector are correctly connected, and perform charging from Step 5 again.
You may hear operating sounds from the main drive lithium-ion battery cooling system, such as sounds from the cooling fan and air conditioning compressor, during regular charging. This is normal.
11. Charging is complete when the charging indicator turns off. Pull out the regular charge connector while pressing the button (M).
NOTE
When the regular charge connector is con-
nected to the regular charge port, the charg-
ing indicator is blinking. When charging is
started, the charging indicator is illuminated.
M
3-20 General information/Charging
Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)
WARNING
After charging, disconnect the charge connector completely from the regular charge port. If the charge connector remains partially engaged with the latch unlocked, the electric motor switch can be turned to the "START" position and the vehicle can be moved.
NOTE
Make sure that the inner lid is completely closed before closing the regular charging lid. If the regular charging lid is forcibly closed without completely closing the inner lid, the hinge on the inner lid may be broken.
· The regular charge connector is con-
nected to the regular charge port. The energy level gauge (A) in the instrument
cluster and charging indicator (B) illuminate
3 while the main drive lithium-ion battery
warming system is operating.
The main drive lithium-ion battery warming system will automatically stop when the main
NOTE
Charging can be stopped half way. In this case, pull out the regular charge connector
13. Remove the charging cable plug from the outlet.
14. Install the cap on the regular charge connector.
drive lithium-ion battery temperature is -4°F (-20°C) or higher.
while pressing the button.
Main drive lithium-ion battery
A
12. Close the inner lid and close the regular warming system
charging lid.
N01202501047
WARNING
You cannot charge the main drive lithium-ion battery when the main drive lithium-ion bat-
After charging, be sure to close the inner tery temperature is -13 °F (-25 °C) or lower.
lid and the regular charging lid com- The air conditioning will automatically oper-
pletely.
ate and the main drive lithium-ion battery
Be careful that water or dust does not enter in the regular charge port inner lid and regular charge connector.
will be heated when all the following conditions are met.
B
Entry of water or dust could cause electric leakage, resulting in a fire or electric shock.
· The main drive lithium-ion battery temperature is between -22 °F (-30 °C) and -13 °F (-25 °C).
· The energy level gauge shows 4 bars or
more of full charge.
· The electric motor switch is in the
"LOCK" position.
General information/Charging 3-21
Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)
NOTE
When the main drive lithium-ion battery
warming system operates while the remote
3
climate control is operating, the remote climate control stops. When the main drive lith-
ium-ion battery warming system stops, the
remote climate control operates again.
3-22 General information/Charging
EV charging cable
EV charging cable
N01202801053
Your vehicle is equipped with an EV charging cable that consists of a cable (A), control box (B), plug (C), and regular charge connector (D).
3
Indicator (LED) and button
C
E
B D
F H
I
J G
A
E- 8A/12A manual selection button F- 12A indicator G- 8A indicator
H ( )- POWER indicator I ( )- FAULT indicator J ( )- CHARGING indicator
For a quicker charge, press the 8A/12A manual selection button (E) and confirm that the 12A indicator (F) is illuminated. Each time you press the button, either the 12A indicator or the 8A indicator (G) will illuminate. POWER (H), FAULT (I) and CHARGING (J) indicators located on the control box will illuminate/blink in response to the following conditions:
General information/Charging 3-23
EV charging cable : Illuminates : Blinking : Not illuminated
POWER
FAULT CHARGING
Operating condition
3
Every time the charging cable plug (C) is connected to an outlet, all indicator lights illuminate
for 1/2 second, then go out.
After initial processing is completed, when the regular charge connector is not connected to the regular charge port, or the regular charge connector is connected to the regular charge port but charging is not being performed.
While the main drive lithium-ion battery is being charged
When the ground cable is disconnected Check the grounding of the outlet being used. If the outlet is properly grounded, contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
When charging is completed.
POWER
FAULT
CHARGING
Abnormal operating condition and corrective action
When an electric leakage occurs or the EV charging cable malfunctions. Stop use immediately and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
When the EV charging cable malfunctions. Stop use immediately and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
If the control box indicator light does not illuminate after connecting the charging cable plug to the outlet, check the circuit breaker for the outlet. If the breaker has tripped, the circuit may not be suitable for use with EV charging cable. You should have a licensed electrician inspect and repair the electrical circuit. If the breaker is not tripped, stop using the EV charging cable and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
3-24 General information/Charging
WARNING
Improper use of the EV charging cable can result in a fire, property damage, and serious injury or death. Carefully read instructions regarding "Precautions during charging the main drive lithium-ion battery" on page 3-15 and on "Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)" on page 3-16 and described in this section and follow them.
Always use an outlet protected by a ground-fault circuit interrupter, rated for 15A or more, and that is connected to a dedicated branch circuit.
Never use an extension cable or conversion adapter.
When using a non-waterproof outlet, take care to avoid contact with rainwater during charging.
Never connect or disconnect the plug with a wet hand.
Make sure that the plug is inserted all the way into the socket before use. Continued charging with a plug not completely inserted or pulled halfway out of the socket may result in a risk of overheating or fire.
If the indictors show the EV charging cable malfunctions as described below, stop using the EV charging cable and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Never disassemble the EV charging cable or attempt to open the control box.
NOTE
All indicators are illuminated momentarily for confirming operation when the charging cable plug is inserted into an outlet. After that, the POWER indicator is continuously illuminated and the CHARGING indicator is continuously blinking.
The CHARGING indicator will start to blink when charging is completed. The POWER indicator is continuously illuminated while charging cable plug is inserted into an outlet.
EV charging cable
NOTE
Make sure that the rope has no damage before use.
A
3
B
Handling and storing the control box
N01202901041
CAUTION
Use the method shown below to help secure the control box and to prevent the plug from being pulled halfway out of the socket during charging.
NOTE
Use hook (A) and a rope (B) that can support the weight of the EV charging cable, 8.8 lbs (4 kg) as shown in the figure below.
FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
General information/Charging 3-25
Regular charging (using 240 V Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment)
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
3
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
WARNING
Never expose the metal terminal of the regular charge connector or the charging cable plug to water or neutral detergent. Water or detergent entering into the plugs can cause a fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
Never use benzine, petrol, organic solvents, acid, or alkaline solvents to clean the charg-
tions for the regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120V outlet) on page 3-16. Also follow instructions provided with the 240V EVSE.
WARNING
Individuals using an electro-medical apparatus such as implantable pacemakers and implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators should check with the manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm
ing cable. Doing so could cause deformation,
the effect of the electromagnetic waves
Cleaning the EV charging cable
N01203000013
1. Gently wipe outside surface of the EV charging cable with gauze or a similar soft cloth soaked with a mild soap and water solution.
2. Wipe off all detergent with a soft cloth
discolour, or malfunction. Also, these substances may be present in various cleaners, so check carefully before use.
Regular charging (using 240 V Electric Vehicle Supply
from charging. The electromagnetic waves may affect the operations of the electromedical apparatus. If you use an electro-medical apparatus, such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker or an implantable cardiovascular defibrillator, observe the following precautions before charging;
dipped in fresh water and thoroughly wrung out. 3. Wipe all moisture off and dry in a shaded, well-ventilated area.
Equipment)
N01216101028
You can charge your vehicle through the regular charge port using 240V Electric Vehicle
· Keep your electro-medical apparatus away from the charge connector, EV charging cable, control box and regular charging station.
· While regular charging;
WARNING
Before cleaning, be sure to remove the charging cable plug from the socket and the regular charging plug from the vehicle. Do not connect or disconnect the plug with a wet hand. Doing so can cause an electric shock.
Supply Equipment (EVSE) compatible with i-MiEV. Carefully read instructions on "Precautions during charging the main drive lithium-ion battery" on page 3-15, described in this section. For connecting/disconnecting the charging
· Do not stay inside the vehicle. · Do not go inside the vehicle, for exam-
ple to remove or place an item in the passenger compartment. · Do not open the liftgate, for example to remove or place an item in the cargo area.
connector to/from the vehicle, follow instruc-
3-26 General information/Charging
Quick charging (charging method with quick charger)
CAUTION
Be sure to use a 240V EVSE compatible with i-MiEV. Use of a non-compatible 240V EVSE may not charge the main drive lithium-ion battery correctly or may damage the main drive lithium-ion battery.
NOTE
The 240V EVSE compatible with i-MiEV is available separately. Contact a certified iMiEV dealer.
Quick charging (charging method with quick charger)
N01203301039
Your vehicle is equipped with a quick charge port. The quick charge port is compatible with most CHAdeMO* connectors on charging stations. *: CHAdeMO is a standard for quick charging of electric vehicle originally started in Japan, and the contents have become an international standard. Charging stations using this standard are UL certified and safe to use in the US. Improper charging can result in a fire, property damage, and serious injury or death. Carefully read and follow instructions on "Precautions during charging the main drive
lithium-ion battery" on page 3-15, instructions described in this section and also instructions for the quick charger you use.
WARNING
Be sure to use a quick charger compatible with i-MiEV. Use of a non-compatible quick charger may cause a fire or malfunction. For the quick charger compatible with iMiEV, consult an certified i-MiEV dealer.
For operation of a quick charger, follow instructions for each quick charger.
If you use an electro-medical apparatus, such as implantable cardiac pacemaker or an implantable cardiovascular defibrillator, follow the precautions described below. Quick charging may affect the operation of electric medical devices. · Do not perform quick charging and keep away from a quick charger. Electromagnetic waves produced by a quick charger may affect the operation of your electricmedical apparatus. · If you have accidentally approached a quick charger, walk away from the quick charger immediately. · If quick charging is necessary, ask someone for help. · While quick charging;
WARNING
· Do not stay inside the vehicle. · Do not go inside the vehicle, for exam-
3 ple to remove or place an item in the
passenger compartment. · Do not open the liftgate, for example to
remove or place an item in the cargo area. Never connect or disconnect the charger with a wet hand. Never pull the cable to disconnect the charger. During charging, the cooling fans under the hood may automatically be operated even if the electric motor switch is in the "LOCK" position. Keep your hands away from the cooling fan during charging. As the quick charge connector is heavier in comparison to the regular charge connector, allowing it to drop could cause damage to the vehicle or charge connector or personal injury.
CAUTION
If the charge connector cannot easily be connected to the quick charge port, do not force the connection. Foreign material may be in the charge connector or quick charge port, or the charging device may not be compatible with your vehicle. Contact a certified iMiEV dealer.
General information/Charging 3-27
Quick charging (charging method with quick charger)
NOTE
A
Repeatedly performing only quick charging
can reduce the battery capacity. Regular
3
charging is recommended unless quick charging is necessary.
Before using a publicly available quick char-
ger, confirm that the charger is suitable for
your vehicle.
Make sure to lock the doors to prevent theft,
etc. during charging.
B
Do not turn the electric motor switch to the
"ON" position during quick charging; doing
so will stop quick charging.
1. Fully apply the parking brake and move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position.
2. Stop the electric devices such as lamps, air conditioning, etc. and turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position.
3. Pull the quick charging lid opener (A) at the bottom left of the driver's seat to open the quick charging lid (B) at the left rear side of the vehicle.
4. Remove key and lock the vehicle. 5. Press the tab (C) to open the inner lid (D).
D
E
C
WARNING
Do not touch the metal terminal of the quick charge port (E) and the quick charge connector. Doing so could cause an electric shock and/or malfunction.
CAUTION
Be sure to insert the quick charge connector straight into the quick charge port all the way to the base. Failure to do so may result in the main drive lithium-ion battery not charging or cause damage to the charging equipment.
Do not leave the inner lid open for any significant period of time without the charge connector inserted. Foreign material, if allowed to enter the quick charge port, can damage the quick charge port and/or prevent charging.
NOTE
There is a hole on the quick charge port for water drainage. If this hole is blocked and water gets trapped in the quick charge port, do not charge. Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
3-28 General information/Charging
NOTE
If the quick charge port becomes frozen, use a hair dryer to defrost and dry it before charging. Forcing the charging connector into the quick charge port while it is frozen can damage the quick charge port, and it may prevent charging.
6. Insert the quick charge connector completely into the quick charge port to begin charging. For connecting and disconnecting, follow the instruction manual for each quick charger.
WARNING
Be sure to insert the charge connector completely into the quick charge port. If the charge connector is only partially inserted and the connector latch is not locked, the electric motor switch could be turned to the "START" position and the vehicle could start moving
7. Make sure that the charging indicator on the instrument cluster is illuminated.
Quick charging (charging method with quick charger)
NOTE
The charge level for the main drive lithiumion battery can be checked with the energy
3 level gauge (F) on the instrument cluster.
Refer to "Energy level gauge" on page 5-41.
If the charging indicator is not illuminated, charging has not started. Refer to the quick charger user manual.
NOTE
When the quick charging plug is connected to the charging connection, the charging indicator will blink. Once charging has started, the charging indicator will illuminate.
F
You may hear operating sounds from the main drive lithium-ion battery cooling system, such as sounds from the cooling fan and air conditioning compressor, during quick charging. This is normal.
Since the main drive lithium-ion battery cooling system uses cool air from the air conditioning system, the air conditioning will automatically be operated. After quick charging, you may find dehumidified water from the air conditioning system under the vehicle. This is normal.
8. Charging is complete when the charging indicator turns off. Disconnect the quick charge connector according to the manual of the quick charger.
General information/Charging 3-29
Quick charging (charging method with quick charger)
CAUTION
Do not leave the quick charge connected to
the quick charge port after charging.
3
Someone might stumble on the charger or the quick charge port might get damaged.
9. Close the inner lid and close the quick charging lid.
NOTE
Make sure that the inner lid is completely closed before closing the quick charging lid. If the quick charging lid is forcibly closed without first completely closing inner lid, the hinge on the inner lid may be broken.
WARNING
After charging, be sure to close the inner lid and the quick charging lid completely. Be careful that water or dust does not enter in the quick charge port, inner lid and quick charge connector. Entry of water or dust could cause a fire, electric shock or short circuit.
NOTE
If the electric motor switch is turned to the "START" position with the quick charge connector connected to the quick charge port, the electric motor unit cannot be started. Be sure to disconnect the quick charge connector before starting the electric motor unit.
Charging may stop before full charge. This is a control for efficient charge and not a malfunction. To achieve full charge, repeat charging from Step 5 again.
3-30 General information/Charging
Charging troubleshooting guide
Charging troubleshooting guide
N01202301032
Symptom Charging cannot be
Possible cause
Possible solution
The electric motor switch is in the Before charging, place the electric motor switch in the "LOCK" position.
3
started.
ON position.
The main drive lithium-ion battery is Charging cannot be performed if the main drive lithium-ion battery is already
already fully charged.
fully charged. Charging automatically turns off if the main drive lithium-ion
battery is fully charged.
The temperature of the main drive Confirm the main drive lithium-ion battery temperature.
lithium-ion battery is too high or too Refer to "Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat" on page 3-8 and "Cau-
low to charge.
tions and actions to deal with intense cold" on page 3-10.
The 12V starter battery is discharged.
The main drive lithium-ion battery can be charged if the vehicle electrical systems cannot be turned on. If the battery is discharged, charge or jump start the 12V starter battery. Refer to "Jump-starting" on page 8-2.
The vehicle or the charging cable has a malfunction.
The vehicle or the charging cable may have a malfunction. Confirm if the warning light on the meter is illuminated. Confirm if the indicator on the charger is indicating a malfunction. If a warning is displayed, stop charging and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
General information/Charging 3-31
Charging troubleshooting guide
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
Regular charging can- There is no electrical power coming Confirm that there has not been a power failure. Make sure the breaker is on. If
not be started.
from the outlet.
an outlet with a timer device installed is used, power will only be available at
3
the time set by the timer.
Confirm if the POWER indicator on the control box is illuminated.
The charge connector is not connected correctly.
Confirm the charge connector is connected correctly.
The charge connector was connected Disconnect the charge connector, wait for a while, then start charging procedure and disconnected repeatedly in a again from the beginning. short time.
A charging cable for other vehicle is Use the EV charging cable only for your vehicle. used.
The regular charger may not be compatible with your vehicle.
Ask an administrator or the manufacturer of the regular charger whether the charger is compatible with your vehicle. Always follow the instructions shown on the regular charger.
Charging Timer by MiEV remote cannot be started.
Refer to "Action to be taken when the MiEV Remote system does not operate correctly" on page 3-51.
3-32 General information/Charging
Charging troubleshooting guide
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
Regular charging is There is no power coming from the There may have been a electrical power failure, or the breaker may have
discontinued.
outlet.
failed.Charging will resume when the power source is reset.
The EV charging cable has been dis- Check that the EV charging cable has not been disconnected.
3
connected.
The button on the regular charge connector has been pressed.
If the charge connector button is pressed for a long period of time, charging will be stopped. Start the charging procedure again.
The temperature of the main drive Confirm the main drive lithium-ion battery temperature.
lithium-ion battery is too hot or too Refer to "Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat" on page 3-8 and "Cau-
cold to charge.
tions and actions to deal with intense cold" on page 3-10.
Charging is stopped by the regular charge timer.
Charging will stop depending on the timer function setting of the regular charge device. If you need to charge the main drive lithium-ion battery more, start the charging procedure again.
Quick charging cannot The charge connector is not con- Check that the charge connector is connected correctly and that it is locked.
be started.
nected correctly and/or not locked.
The self-diagnostic function of the There is a possibility that the vehicle has a malfunction. Stop charging and conquick charge device returns a nega- tact a certified i-MiEV dealer. tive result.
The power switch of the quick char- Check the power switch of the quick charger.
ger is off.
Consult an administrator or a maker of the quick charger.
Quick charge is discon- Charging is stopped by the quick
tinued.
charge timer.
Charging will stop depending on the timer function setting of the quick charge device.If you need to charge the main drive lithium-ion battery more, start the charging procedure again.
Charging stops at 80% capacity.
Charging is designed to stop when the main drive lithium-ion battery capacity reaches 80%. If you need to charge the main drive lithium-ion battery more than 80%, start the charging procedure again.
The power supply for the quick charger is off.
Check whether the power supply for the quick charger is off. Consult an administrator or a maker of the quick charger.
General information/Charging 3-33
High-Voltage components
Symptom
Possible cause
EV (Electric Vehicle) The vehicle has a malfunction. system does not start
3 after quick charging.
Possible solution
Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer. If you need to push the vehicle, turn the electric motor switch to the "ON" position and move the selector lever to the "N"(NEUTRAL) position.
High-Voltage components
N01205700027
WARNING
The EV (Electric Vehicle) system uses high voltage up to DC 330 volt. The system can be hot during and after starting and when the vehicle is shut off. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature. Follow the warning labels that are attached to the vehicle.
Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace high-voltage parts, exposed electrical components, cables or connectors. Failure to follow this instruction can result in severe burns or electric shock causing serious injury or death. High-voltage cables are colored orange. The vehicle high voltage system has no user serviceable parts. Take your vehicle to a Certified i-MiEV dealer for any necessary maintenance.
Always assume the high voltage battery and associated components are energized and fully charged.
High voltage components and wiring cables are located as shown in the figure below.
1- Regular charge port 2- MCU 3- Main drive lithium-ion battery 4- Heater 5- Air conditioner compressor 6- High voltage connector 7- Service plug 8- Electric motor (Electric motor unit) 9- On board charger/DC-DC converter 10- Quick charge port
In case of a collision
N01205800031
A crash or impact significant enough to require an emergency response for conven-
tional vehicles would also require the same response for electric vehicles. Also follow the instructions described below to avoid severe burns and electrical shock that may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
If your vehicle is drivable, pull your vehicle off the road to a safe, nearby location and remain on the scene. Also, if possible, do the following operations and stay out of the way of any oncoming traffic while awaiting the arrival of emergency responders. · Apply chocks to the wheels. · Move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position. · Apply the parking brake. · Open the windows, doors and liftgate. · Turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position. · Turn on the hazard warning flashers. · Move the key away from the vehicle to prevent unintended start-up of the system by inadvertent contact with a switch or impact from the crash.
3-34 General information/Charging
WARNING
Never touch high-voltage wiring, connectors, and other high-voltage parts, such as the inverter unit and main drive lithiumion battery. An electric shock may occur if exposed electric wires are visible when viewed from inside or outside of your vehicle. For their locations, see "Highvoltage components" on page 3-34.
If the vehicle receives a strong impact to the floor while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the floor.
Leaks or damage to the main drive lithium-ion battery may result in a fire. If you discover them, contact emergency services immediately. Since the fluid leak may be lithium manganite from the Lithium-ion battery, never touch any fluid leaking from the inside or outside of the vehicle. If the fluid contacts your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water and receive immediate medical attention to help avoid serious injury.
If you are unable to safely assess the vehicle due to vehicle damage, do not touch the vehicle. Leave the vehicle and contact emergency services. Advise emergency responders that this is an electric vehicle.
WARNING
If a fire occurs in this vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible and contact emergency services. Do not attempt to extinguish a fire by yourself. If the fire involves a lithium-ion battery, it will require large, sustained volumes of water for extinguishment. Using a small amount of water or the incorrect fire extinguisher can result in serious injury or death from electrical shock.
When you leave the vehicle, if possible, open the windows, doors and liftgate to prevent accumulation of poisonous/combustible gasses. This will also assist in the rescue and fire fighting process.
As with any vehicle fire, the byproducts of combustion can be toxic. Do not inhale smoke, vapors, or gas from the vehicle. Move to a safe distance upwind and uphill from the vehicle fire and out of the way of any oncoming traffic while awaiting the arrival of emergency responders.
If you detect leaking fluids, sparks, smoke, flames, gurgling, popping or hissing noises originating from the high voltage battery compartment, contact emergency services immediately. This may result in a fire.
Physical damage to the vehicle or high voltage battery may result in immediate or delayed release of toxic and/or flammable gases and fire.
High-Voltage components
WARNING
If your vehicle needs to be towed, transport the vehicle on a flatbed truck or tow
3 the vehicle either with all wheels or the
rear wheels (drive wheels) off the ground. If the rear wheels are on the ground when towing, this may cause damage to the electric motors. This may also cause a fire, if wiring in the electric motor unit room becomes damaged. Refer to "Towing" on page 8-11. Do not attempt to repair a damaged electric vehicle yourself. Please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer for service. In the event of an accident that requires body repair and painting, the vehicle should be delivered to a Certified i-MiEV dealer to have the main drive lithium-ion battery and high voltage parts such as the inverter, including the attached wiring harness, removed prior to painting. If exposed to heat in the paint booth, the main drive lithium-ion battery will experience battery capacity loss. A damaged main drive lithium-ion battery can also pose safety risks to untrained mechanics and repair personnel.
NOTE
The emergency shut-off system will be activated and the high-voltage system will automatically turn off under the following conditions:
General information/Charging 3-35
MiEV Remote System
NOTE
· Certain front, side or rear collisions.
· Certain EV (Electric Vehicle) system mal-
3
functions. When the emergency shut-off system is acti-
vated, the ready indicator is turned off. Refer
to "Indicator and warning light package" on
page 5-43.
If the emergency shut-off system activates,
contact a Certified i-MiEV dealer.
MiEV Remote System
N01203401056
The MiEV Remote System has the following three functions.
COOL:Operates in cooling mode intended for exclusive use with Remote Climate Control (Pre-Cooling Mode).
HEAT:Operates in heating mode intended for exclusive use with Remote Climate Control (Pre-Heating Mode). The heated seats can be used while the Remote Climate Control is activated. :Operates in defroster mode intended for exclusive use with Remote Climate Control (Pre-Defroster Mode). The electric rear window defogger is activated automatically when the Remote Climate Control is activated in Pre-Defroster Mode.
Charging Timer P.3-40 When the EV charging cable (regular charger) (Level 1 or Level 2) is connected, the batteries will only charge during the pre-set time period selected using the MiEV Remote.
Remote Climate Control P.3-46 When the EV charging cable (regular charger) (Level 1 or Level 2) is connected, the air-conditioner or heater can be activated for up to 30 minutes prior to vehicle usage. This feature can be used to cool or heat the car and to activate the front and rear window defroster.
Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Level Indicator P.3-49 The charge remaining in the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery can be confirmed through the MiEV Remote.
For your quick reference, refer to "Basic operation of the MiEV Remote" on page 3-39.
3-36 General information/Charging
Glass antenna
MiEV Remote
WARNING
Individuals who use implantable pacemakers or implantable cardiovasculardefibrillators should keep away from the external and internal transmitters. The electromagnetic waves used in the MiEV Remote System may affect the operation of implantable pacemakers and implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators.
Individuals using other electro-medical apparatus besides implantable pacemakers and implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators should check with the manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm the effect of the electromagnetic waves used by the MiEV Remote System. The electromagnetic waves may affect the operations of the electro-medical apparatus.
Never use the MiEV Remote near medical equipment. Electromagnetic waves could adversely affect the medical equipment.
WARNING
Keep the MiEV Remote in the place where children will not touch or play with the remote.
When bringing the MiEV Remote on flights, do not press any switches on the MiEV Remote while on the plane. If a switch is pressed on the plane, the MiEV Remote emits electromagnetic waves which like cell phones and other wireless devices, could interfere with systems on the airplane. When carrying the MiEV Remote in a bag, be careful that no switches on the MiEV Remote can be pressed by mistake.
CAUTION
Never disassemble or modify the MiEV Remote. No user serviceable parts are inside except batteries.
Disassembling or modifying the MiEV Remote or removing a label from the MiEV Remote may violate regulations.
NOTE
The MiEV Remote system uses radio waves. The MiEV Remote can operate within approximately 328 feet (100 m) from the vehicle. In the following environments or situations, the MiEV Remote may not transmit and receive radio waves correctly. As a result, the remote may not operate properly.
· When the vehicle and the MiEV Remote are separated by a concrete wall.
· When there is a metal wall between the vehicle and the MiEV Remote.
· When the vehicle is surrounded by other tall vehicles.
· When the vehicle and/or the MiEV Remote is near a facility emitting strong radio waves, such as a television tower, a transformer substation, a broadcasting station or an airport.
· When other electrical equipment such as computers or cell-phones are placed near the MiEV Remote.
· When the MiEV Remote touches something metallic, or is covered by a metal object.
· When batteries for the MiEV Remote are weak.
Melody and buzzer from the MiEV Remote can be turned on or off. Refer to "To turn on/off melody and buzzer" on page 3-48.
MiEV Remote System
NOTE
The transmitter signal will reach further when the antenna of the MiEV Remote is
3 fully extended and held upright.
The onboard antenna is printed on the right side delta glass of the vehicle.
When the MiEV Remote is not used for more than 30 seconds, the MiEV Remote will automatically turn off.
Some charge facilities have a timer function which turns the power supply on and off automatically. When using a charge facility with this timer function, please adjust the charging time set by the MiEV Remote to be consistent with the timer used by the charging facility.
When you need additional MiEV Remotes, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer. Up to four MiEV Remotes can be used per vehicle.
You may hear operating sounds such as sounds from the cooling fan and air conditioning compressor when the Remote Climate Control is activated even if the electric motor switch is in "LOCK" position during timer charging. This is normal. Refer to "Remote Climate Control" on page 3-46.
General information/Charging 3-37
MiEV Remote System
MiEV Remote
3 Switches
N01203501044
5- UP switch - scrolls up the display items 6- DOWN switch - scrolls down the dis-
play items 7- Display 8- Antenna
Display (LCD monitor)
1- Power/communication switch - Press and hold to turn remote on. Press quickly to transmit command to vehicle.
2- MODE switch - The display of the MiEV Remote is changed in order of "ON timer", "OFF timer" and "Remote Climate Control" by pressing this switch.
3- Manual charge switch (this can also cancel the timers and Remote Climate Control).
4- Ring
3-38 General information/Charging
1- Blinks when communicating with vehicle, and when error occurs.
2- The indicator lights up during charging. The indicator blinks when the manual charging button is pressed. The indicator will rapidly blink, if EV charging cable (regular charger) is not connected when the timer charging or Remote Climate Control is set.
3- Blinks if there is an operation or com-
munication error.
4- Shows remaining charge of the Main
Drive Lithium-ion Battery. Blinks if
battery has less than 20% charge.
5-
: Indicates ON timer is set
: Indicates OFF timer is set 6- Indicates amount of time until Charg-
ing Timer is complete. 7- When Remote Climate Control is set,
displays mode set to operate: COOL: Pre-Cooling Mode HEAT: Pre-Heating Mode
: Pre-Defroster Mode A/C OFF: Remote Climate Control OFF
CAUTION
Never leave the MiEV Remote in a place where it will be subject to high temperatures, such as in direct sunlight, or subject to extreme low temperatures. The MiEV Remote can be damaged and may not properly operate.
Never drop or hit the MiEV Remote. Do not apply force to bend the antenna. These can cause damage to or failure of the remote.
If the MiEV Remote gets wet, please wipe water off immediately. Water entering the MiEV Remote can cause a failure.
Basic operation of the MiEV Remote
Press the power/communication switch for 1 second or more to turn the MiEV Remote on.
ON timer
OFF timer
Remote Climate Control
MiEV Remote System
Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Level Indicator
N01206100015
3
Press the MODE switch to show the ON timer display.
Press the MODE switch to show the OFF timer display.
Press the MODE switch to show the Remote Climate Control display.
Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Level Indicator
Repeat these steps to set other MODE.
Press the UP switch or DOWN switch to select desired setting.
Press the power/communication switch to send the data to the vehicle.
Press the power/communication switch for 3 seconds or more to turn the MiEV Remote off or the MiEV Remote will automatically turn off 30 minutes after it has been sent the data to the vehicle.
General information/Charging 3-39
MiEV Remote System
Charging Timer
N01203701020
The Charging Timer can be set as follows.
3 ON timer: Time from the present to when
charging will begin. OFF timer: Time from the start of charg-
ing to the end of charging
To set the timer, the following conditions must be met.
Selector lever: "P" (PARK) position Electric motor switch: "LOCK"position EV charging cable (regular charger): Con-
nected
WARNING
Improper charging can result in a fire, property damage, and serious injury or death. Before Charging Timer, carefully read and follow the instructions in "Precaution on Charging the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery" on page 3-15 and "Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)" on page 3-16.
NOTE
Charging Timer cannot be used with a quick charging system.
3-40 General information/Charging
MiEV Remote System
Example of Charging Timer
1. In case you set the timer at 9:00 PM so that charging starts at 11:00 PM and stops at 7:00 AM of the following day (for 8 hours). 2. In case you set the timer at 7:00 PM so that charging starts and stops at the same time the last time.
N01205001030
3
1. Setting of ON Timer = 2h, OFF Timer = 8h
2. When Charging timers are set up, initially 4h for ON-Timer and 8h for OFFTimer are displayed.
9:00 11:00
7:00
PM PM
AM
ON Timer = 2h
OFF Timer = 8h
7:00
11:00
PM
PM
Charging Waiting
7:00 AM
ON-Timer initial display = 4h
OFF-Timer initial display = 8h
General information/Charging 3-41
MiEV Remote System
To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF
N01205100018
3 1. Extend the antenna (A) and press the power/communication switch (B) for 1 second or more to turn the MiEV Remote on. When it communicates with the vehicle properly, the vehicle information will be displayed on the screen.
2. Turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
3. Press the UP switch (C) or the DOWN switch (D) once. The time remaining from the present to the time that was previously set for the ON timer will be displayed and blink.
NOTE
If the MiEV Remote cannot communicate with the vehicle, the remaining time will not be displayed.
4. If you need to change the remaining time for the ON timer, press the UP switch (C) or the DOWN switch (D) to change the remaining time. The remaining time can be changed within the range from 0 to 19.5 hours in half hour increments.
2. To turn the MiEV Remote off, press the power/communication switch (B) for 3 seconds or more and store the antenna (A).
NOTE
The remaining time for the last charging is displayed with blinking as follows. Example: If you set the charging starting time to 11:00 PM of the day before:
To set the ON timer
N01205201029
1. Start the regular charging. Refer to "Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)" on page 3-16.
Present time
Remaining time
9:00 PM
2:00
9:10 PM
1:50
9:40 PM
1:20
Display
2h 2h 1.5h
3-42 General information/Charging
NOTE
When you want to start the charging at the same time as the last time, changing the remaining time is unnecessary.
When the remaining time is set to 0h, the charging starts immediately after step 5.
5. Press the power/communication switch (B) for less than 1 second to send the setting data to the vehicle. The MiEV Remote will sound melodies on transmission and reception.
NOTE
The melodies can be turned off. Refer to "To turn on/off melody and buzzer" on page 3-48.
If a communication error occurs or the MiEV Remote System is not functioning properly, the buzzer will sound. Refer to "Display of MiEV Remote during communicating with vehicle" on page 3-45.
If the OFF Timer is unset when setting the ON timer, the OFF timer will be automatically set with "fully charged".
To set OFF Timer, refer to "To set OFF Timer" on page 3-44.
NOTE
The energy level gauge (E) in the instrument panel on the vehicle will illuminate and the charging indicator (F) will blink approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle has received the setting for the ON timer. After approximately 30 seconds, the energy level gauge and the charging indicator will go off, and the vehicle will be prepared for the Charging Timer.
E
MiEV Remote System
NOTE
If the charge connector is disconnected before the time set by the ON timer, the
3 Charging Timer is not canceled. If the charge
connector is re-connected again before starting the charge or setting the charge timers, the Charging Timer will resume.
To start the charging immediately after the ON timer has been set
N01206000014
1. Turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
2. Press the UP switch (C) or the DOWN switch (D) once, and the remaining time from the present to the time set for the ON timer will be displayed and blink.
6. To turn off the MiEV Remote, refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
F
Turning the electric motor switch to the "ON" position or the "ACC" position will cancel the Charging Timer.
If the MODE switch is pressed while changing the ON timer setting, the change will be canceled.
The
symbol on the MiEV Remote
will be illuminated while the vehicle is
charging.
3. Change the remaining time to 0h by pressing the UP switch (C) or the DOWN switch (D).
General information/Charging 3-43
MiEV Remote System
4. Press the power/communication switch
(B) for less than 1 second to send the set-
ting data to the vehicle. The MiEV
Remote will sound melodies on transmis-
3
sion and reception. The charging will
start.
Refer to "Regular charging (charging
method with rated AC 120 V outlet)" on
page 3-16.
5. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page
3-42.
To set OFF Timer
N01205301033
The OFF timer can be set during the regular charging or after setting the ON timer.
1. When the power of MiEV Remote is off, turn the power on. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
2. Press the MODE switch (G) to change the display to the OFF timer (2).
3-44 General information/Charging
1_ Shown the ON timer 2_ Shown the OFF timer 3_ Shown the Remote Climate Control 3. Press the UP switch (C) or the DOWN
switch (D) once. The time set last time for the OFF timer will be displayed and blink.
4. If you need to change the time for the OFF timer, press the UP switch (C) or the DOWN switch (D) to change the time.
· The time can be changed within the range from 0.5h to 19.5h by half hour and can be changed to "-h".
· When "-h" is displayed, the charging will end when Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery is fully charged.
NOTE
To display "-h", press the UP switch (C) when 19.5h is displayed or press DOWN switch (D) when 0.5h is displayed.
5. Press the power/communication switch (B) for less than 1 second to send the setting data to the vehicle. The MiEV Remote will sound melodies on transmission and reception.
NOTE
The melodies can be turned off. Refer to "To turn on/off melody and buzzer" on page 3-48.
If a communication error occurs or the MiEV Remote System is not functioning properly, the buzzer will sound. Refer to "Display of MiEV Remote during communicating with vehicle" on page 3-45.
If the ON timer is unset when setting the OFF timer, the ON timer will be automatically set with "0h".
MiEV Remote System
6. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
NOTE
The Charging Timer will be cancelled if the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON"
NOTE
or "ACC" position. Once the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery is
3
The energy level gauge (E) in the instrument panel will illuminate and the charging indicator (F) will blink approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle has received the setting for the OFF timer.
fully charged, the charging will end even if before the time set by the OFF timer. If the charge connector is disconnected during charging, the OFF charging timer will be canceled.
After approximately 30 seconds, the energy
level gauge and the charging indicator will then go off, and the vehicle will be prepared for Charging Timer in accordance with the
Display of MiEV Remote during communicating with vehicle
To cancel Charging Timer
ON/OFF setting.
N01203801021
N01203901022
It communicates with the vehicle when the There are two methods to cancel Charging
power of the MiEV Remote is turned on with Timer.
pressing the power supply/communication
switch (B) for 1 second or more and if the By using the MiEV Remote
E
power supply/communication switch (B) is By operating the electric motor switch on
pressed for less than 1 second while the
the vehicle
power of the MiEV Remote is on.
If the normal reception melody sounds after
NOTE
the transmitting melody, it is set completion. Communication symbol (H) blinks while
If the Charging Timer is canceled during charging, the charging will continue until the
communicating with the vehicle.
Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery is fully
If the buzzer sounds with ERROR symbol (I)
charged.
F
blinks, a problem is detected. Refer to If the Charging Timer is canceled before
The
symbol on the MiEV Remote
illuminates while the Main Drive Lithium-
"Actions to be taken when the MiEV Remote system does not operate correctly" on page 3-51.
charging starts, charging will start immediately and continue until the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery is fully charged.
ion Battery is charging.
General information/Charging 3-45
MiEV Remote System
NOTE
Charging Timer cannot be canceled by dis-
connecting the charge connector before the
3
time set by the ON timer. The Charging Timer will resume when the charging con-
nector is again connected to the vehicle.
A. By using the MiEV Remote 1. When the power of MiEV Remote is off, turn the power ON. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42. 2. Press the manual charging switch (J), then press the power/communication switch (B) for less than 1 second.
3. Canceling Charging Timer is complete, and the MiEV Remote will sound two different melodies.
4. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
B. By operating the electric motor switch on the vehicle Turn the electric motor switch to the "ACC" or "ON" position, then turn back to the "LOCK" position. Canceling the Charging Timer is now complete.
Remote Climate Control
N01204201035
WARNING
The Remote Climate Control, even when
set, cannot be relied upon to maintain safe
vehicle cabin temperatures while the vehi-
cle is stopped or parked. Never leave chil-
dren
or
persons
requiring
supervision/nursing unattended inside the
vehicle. Temperature inside the vehicle
could become extremely high or low
resulting in a risk of heat stroke or hyper-
thermia that could result in death.
In addition, children can activate switches
and controls, resulting in an injury or
fatal accident.
While the Remote Climate Control is acti-
vated, keep away from the cooling fan
under the front hood, since the cooling fan
may automatically operate even if the
electric motor switch is in the "LOCK"
position.
NOTE
If the manual charging switch (J) is pressed,
the
symbol of MiEV Remote will
blink. Remote Climate Control is also
stopped.
3-46 General information/Charging
NOTE
The Remote Climate Control works regardless the position of the air conditioning switch or dial on the vehicle. While the Remote Climate Control is activated, the air conditioning switch or dial on the vehicle will not affect operation of the cooler, heater or defroster.
NOTE
The Remote Climate Control will automatically stop 30 minutes after the Remote Climate Control has been set.
The Remote Climate Control is operated by electric power supplied through the EV charging cable (regular charger).
Under the following conditions, the effect of the Remote Climate Control can be decreased.
· When the outside temperature is very high.
· When the sunlight is strong.
· When the outside temperature is very low. When Remote Climate Control is activated
while charging the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery, the time required to fully charge the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery will become longer or the amount of charge may decrease if the OFF timer has been set. If the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Warming System is operated while the Remote Climate Control is activated, the Remote Climate Control will stop. When the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Warming System stops, the Remote Climate Control will resume. Refer to "Main Drive Lithiumion Battery Warming System" on page 3-21. While the Remote Climate Control is activated, if a heated seat switch is ON, the heated seat will operate.
To operate the Remote Climate Control
N01204301036
The following conditions must be met to operate the Remote Climate Control.
Selector lever: P (PARK) position. Electric motor switch: LOCK position. EV charging cable (regular charger): Con-
nected. Quick charging: Not used. Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Level
Indicator: Shows one bar or more. Refer to "Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Level Indicator" on page 3-49. All doors and the liftgate: Closed.
WARNING
Improper charging can result in a fire, property damage, and serious injury or death. Carefully read and follow instructions in "Precaution during Charging the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery" on page 3-15 and "Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)" on page 3-16.
1. Start charging. Refer to "Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 120 V outlet)" on page 3-16.
MiEV Remote System
2. Turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page
3-42.
3. Press the MODE switch (G) to change the
mode to Remote Climate Control (3).
3
1_ Shown the ON timer 2_ Shown the OFF timer 3_ Shown the Remote Climate Control
4. Select a desired mode by pressing UP switch (C) or DOWN switch (D).
General information/Charging 3-47
MiEV Remote System
The modes will be changed in the order from 1 to 4 by pushing the UP switch.
NOTE
If a communication error occurs or the MiEV
B. By using the MiEV Remote, select the A/C OFF mode and send the setting. Refer to "To operate the Remote Climate
3
Remote System is not functioning properly, the buzzer will sound. Refer to "Display of MiEV Remote during communicating with
Control" on page 3-47. C. Turn the electric motor switch to the
vehicle" on page 3-45.
"ACC" or the "ON" position.
D. Disconnect the regular charge connector
6. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To
from the vehicle.
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page
3-42.
NOTE
1_ COOL: Pre-Cooling Mode
To stop the Remote Climate Control
The Remote Climate Control will not stop if the doors or liftgate are opened after the Remote Climate Control has started.
2_ HEAT: Pre-Heating Mode
N01204401024
3_ : Pre-Defroster Mode
The Remote Climate Control can be stopped
4_ A/C OFF: Remote Climate Control by either of the following methods.
To turn on/off melody and buzzer
OFF
N01204100024
A. By using the MiEV Remote, after press- 1. Turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To
5. Press the power/communication switch (B) for less than 1 second to send the setting to the vehicle. The MiEV Remote will sound melodies on transmission and reception.
ing the manual charging switch (J), press the power/communication switch (B) for less than 1 second.
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42. · To turn off the sounds, press the UP switch (C) while pressing MODE switch (G). · To turn on the sounds, press the DOWN
NOTE
The melodies can be turned off. Refer to "To
switch (D) while pressing MODE switch (G).
turn on/off melody and buzzer" on page
3-48.
3-48 General information/Charging
2. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Level Indicator
N01204500015
The remaining energy in the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery can be checked using the MiEV Remote.
1. If the MiEV Remote has been turned off, turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
2. Current remaining energy in the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery is shown on the display while the MiEV Remote is ON.
MiEV Remote System
General information
N01205400011
Your MiEV Remote System operates on a
3 radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and RSS-Gen of the Industry Canada
Rules.
The remening energy is shown by the Operation is subject to the following two con-
number of segments displayed.
ditions.
: 3 segments: Full or near full : 2 segments: Moderate : 1 segment: Low : 0 segments: Empty or near empty
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
More than
remained quantity in the
Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery is necessary
to operate the Remote Climate Control.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
3. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
General information/Charging 3-49
MiEV Remote System
Replacement of batteries for the MiEV Remote
3
CAUTION
N01204600016
MiEV Remote is a precision electronic
device with a built-in signal transmitter. Do
not disassemble or touch an internal parts.
Keep away from water or dust.
Be careful not to break the tab on the battery
cover when removing or installing the bat-
tery cover.
About battery
N01204700017
Two coin type batteries are used. Replace as necessary to assure proper operation.
NOTE
Standard battery life on the MiEV Remote is about 1 year. Battery life can vary depending on environmental and usage conditions.
3. By moving the battery cover (B) in the arrow direction, tabs (C) on the battery cover will come out and the battery cover can be removed.
Coin type batteries CR2032
6. Attach the battery cover (A) in the reverse order from the way you have detached it.
7. Confirm the MiEV Remote can be turned ON. Refer to "To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF" on page 3-42.
NOTE
Replace both batteries with new ones at the same time.
A certified i-MiEV dealer can replace the batteries for you if you prefer.
To replace the batteries
N01204800021
1. Before replacing the batteries, remove static electricity from your body by touching a metal grounded object.
2. Battery cover (B) lifts when the slide portion (A) is moved to the arrow direction.
3-50 General information/Charging
4. Remove the old batteries. 5. Install two new coin type CR2032 batter-
ies (D) with the "+" side up.
MiEV Remote System
Actions to be taken when the MiEV Remote system does not operate correctly
N01204901032
Take the following actions when the system does not operate correctly. If the system still does not operate correctly after the action(s) have been
taken, a system component may not be working properly. Please consult with a certified i-MiEV dealer to check it.
3
Phenomena
Cause
Remedy
Charging does not start when regular charge connector is inserted.
"ON" timer has been set.
The regular charge connector is not locked completely.
Cancel the "ON" timer. Lock the regular charge connector securely.
A household electrical outlet, which the Turn on the household electrical outlet and make EV charging cable is connected to, is shut sure the plug is securely connected. down.(e.g. disconnected plug)
MiEV Remote does not operate normally.
MiEV Remote is not powered on.
Batteries in the MiEV Remote are defective or the batteries are discharged.
No indicator lights come on when the remote is turned on.
Replace the batteries in the MiEV Remote. Refer to "Replacement of batteries for the MiEV Remote" on page 3-50.
Melody or buzzer does Melody or buzzer has been disabled. not sound.
Enable the melody or buzzer. Refer to "To turn on/off melody and buzzer" on page 3-48.
General information/Charging 3-51
MiEV Remote System
Phenomena
Cause
Remedy
The following
Blinks after about 1 sec- Electrical noise source is present in the Move away from the noise source.
symbol blinks
ond.
vicinity of the MiEV Remote. (e.g.
3 when the power supply/communi-
personal computer) Electrical noise source is present
cation switch on
between the vehicle and the MiEV
the MiEV Remote
Remote.
is pressed. ERROR symbol
symbol
Blinks after about 10 seconds.
The MiEV Remote antenna is not extended.
Out of effective communication range. (e.g. too far away from the vehicle, or
Extend the MiEV Remote antenna to communicate.
Move to the location where the system reaches the effective communication range.
radio signal is interfered)
The electric motor switch is at the position Turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" posi-
other than "LOCK" position.
tion.
Electrical noise source is present in the Move away from the noise source.
vicinity of the vehicle. Electrical noise source is present
between the vehicle and the MiEV
Remote.
12V starter battery is discharged.
Charge or replace the 12V starter battery. Refer to "Jump-starting" on page 8-2, "12V starter battery" on page 11-6.
The below symbol blinks about 10 seconds
after the power/communication switch on the
MiEV Remote is pressed. ERROR symbol
Some errors occur while the system is in processing.
Press the power/communication switch again.
3-52 General information/Charging
MiEV Remote System
Phenomena
Cause
Remedy
Charging Timer is After the power/commu- Regular charge connector is not inserted Lock the regular charge connector securely.
not possible.
nication switch is
or not locked completely.
pressed, the following A household electrical outlet, which the Turn on the household electrical outlet which the
3
symbol blinks in several EV charging cable (regular charger) is EV charging cable (regular charger) is connected
seconds. ERROR symbol
connected to, is shut down.(e.g. discon- to. nected plug)
symbol
Ground fault at the household electrical Check the ground fault and confirm the plug is con-
outlet. Otherwise, the power supply at the nected.
household electrical outlet is cut off.
If the charging unit is equipped with the timer function, the power supply to the unit has been cut off.
Preset the Charging Timer while the charging unit with timer function is powered on.
After the power/commu- The selector lever is at a position other
nication switch is
than P (PARK).
pressed, the following
symbol blinks in several
seconds. ERROR symbol
Quick charging is in progress. (The symbol illuminates.)
The temperature of the Main Drive Lith-
ium-ion Battery has exceeded about
140 °F (60 °C).
Place the selector lever to P (PARK) position.
Terminate the quick charging, or wait until the quick charging completes.
Allow the temperature of the Main Drive Lithiumion Battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to "Cautions and action to deal with intense heat" on page 3-8.
General information/Charging 3-53
MiEV Remote System
Phenomena
Cause
Remedy
Charging Timer is The system is charged Backup charging for the Main Drive Lith- This is not a malfunction.Charging will be termi-
not possible.
although the ON timer is ium-ion Battery Warming System has nated when the system has been charged enough for
3
being set.
been operated.
the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Warming System.
Charging is preset, but The timer is cancelled or the preset time is Check whether another person has operated his or
the specified charging changed by using another MiEV Remote. her MiEV Remote.
level is not satisfied. The charging level is
The electric motor switch has been operated before the system is charged.
not expected amount.
Is not charged.
The temperature of the Main Drive Lith-
Is not charged at the ium-ion Battery has exceeded about
preset time.
140 °F (60 °C).
Check whether the electric motor switch has been operated before the system is charged.
Allow the temperature of the Main Drive Lithiumion Battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to "Cautions and action to deal with intense heat" on page 3-8.
Charging Timer is not preset correctly. Preset the timed charging again.
Although the charging is The Remote Climate Control has been
preset, too much time is activated.
needed to charge the sys- The Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery
tem fully.
Warming System has been operated.
Check whether the Remote Climate Control has been activated.
Move the vehicle to a warmer location.
Temperature of the Main Drive Lithium- Refer to "Cautions and action to deal with intense
ion Battery is low.
cold" on page 3-10.
Charging Timer is It is not fully charged. not possible.
If the charging unit is equipped with the timer function, the power supply to the unit has been cut off.
Preset the Charging Timer while the charging unit with timer function is powered on.
3-54 General information/Charging
MiEV Remote System
Phenomena
Cause
Remedy
The Remote Cli- After the power/commu- The regular charge connector is not
Lock the regular charge connector securely.
mate Control can- nication switch is
inserted or it is not locked completely.
not be activated. pressed, the following A household electrical outlet, which the Turn on the household electrical outlet which the
3
symbol blinks in several EV charging cable (regular charge) is con- EV charging cable (regular charge) is connected to.
seconds. ERROR symbol
nected to, is shut down.(e.g. disconnected plug)
symbol
Ground fault at the household electrical Check the ground fault and confirm the plug is con-
outlet. Otherwise, the power supply at the nected.
household electrical outlet is cut off.
If the charging unit is equipped with the timer function, the power supply to the unit has been cut off.
Preset the Charging Timer while the charging unit with timer function is powered on.
After the power/commu- The Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery
nication switch is
charging level is low.
pressed, the following
symbol blinks in several
seconds. ERROR symbol
symbol
Charge the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery until the MiEV Remote illuminates the battery charging level by at least 1 segment.
General information/Charging 3-55
MiEV Remote System
Phenomena
Cause
Remedy
The Remote Cli- After the power/commu- Any of the door or liftgate is open.
Close all the doors and liftgate.
mate Control can- nication switch is
The selector lever is at the position other Place the selector lever to P (PARK) position.
3 not be activated. pressed, the following than P (PARK).
symbol blinks in several
seconds.
Quick charging is in progress.
Terminate the quick charging, or wait until the
ERROR symbol
(The
symbol will illuminate.)
quick charging completes.
The temperature of the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery has exceeded about 140 °F (60 °C).
Allow the temperature of the Main Drive Lithiumion Battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to "Cautions and action to deal with intense heat" on page 3-8.
The Remote Climate The electric motor switch has been oper- Check whether the electric motor switch has been
Control is not activated. ated before the system is charged.
operated before the system is charged.
The temperature of the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery has exceeded about 140 °F (60 °C).
Allow the temperature of the Main Drive Lithiumion Battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to "Cautions and action to deal with intense heat" on page 3-8.
The Remote Climate Control cannot be activated.
The heated seat is not powered on.
The heated seat becomes hot while the air conditioning (cooling) is activated.
The heated seat switch is turned off. The heated seat switch is turned on.
Turn on the heated seat switch. Turn off the heated seat switch.
Cleaning the MiEV Remote
1. Gently wipe with gauze or another soft cloth soaked with a mild soap and water solution. 2. Wipe off all the detergent with a soft cloth dipped in fresh water and thoroughly wrung out. 3. Wipe all moisture off and dry in a shaded, well-ventilated area.
N01203600019
3-56 General information/Charging
MiEV Remote System
CAUTION
Never use benzine, petrol, or other organic solvents, or acid or alkaline solvents. Doing so could cause deformation, discolor, or malfunction. Also, these substances may be present in various cleaners, so check carefully before use.
3
General information/Charging 3-57
Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2
4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats .........................................................................................4-5
Head restraints .................................................................................4-6
Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-8
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-12
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-12
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-13
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-20
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-20
Seats
Seats
4
N00408400495
1 - Front seats
To adjust the seat forward or backward P.4-3
To adjust the seatback P.4-3 To adjust the seat height (Driver's side
only) P.4-4 Heated seats P.4-4
2 - Rear seats
To adjust the seatback P.4-5 Folding the seatbacks forward P.4-6
Seats and restraint systems
N00401600209
Your vehicle has seat belts and other features that help protect you and your passengers in an accident. Seat belts are the most important safety device. When worn properly, seat belts can reduce the chance of serious injury or death in various types of crashes. For added protection during a severe frontal collision, your vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with airbags for the driver and passengers. The seats, head restraints, and door
locks are also safety equipment, which must be used correctly.
Always check the following before you drive:
That everyone in your vehicle is properly wearing their seat belt.
That infants and small children are properly secured in appropriate child restraint systems in the rear seat.
That all doors are fully closed and locked. That seatbacks are upright, with head
restraints properly adjusted.
4-2 Seat and restraint systems
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can help reduce the risk of injury or death, however, by following the instructions in this manual.
Front seats
N00401800386
Position the driver's seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel and safely operate the vehicle.
WARNING
To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death during deployment of the driver's airbag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle.
To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death during deployment of the passenger's airbag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the front passenger's seat as far back as possible.
Always place children 12 years old and under in the rear seat and use appropriate child restraint systems.
Front seats
To adjust the seat forward or backward
N00401900303
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
4 seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seat in place.
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. This can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is securely locked into position.
CAUTION
Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unexpected accident might occur.
Do not place a cushion or the like between your back and the seatback while driving. The effectiveness of the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an accident.
When sliding the seats, be careful not to catch your hand or leg.
When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, pay careful attention to the rear seat passengers.
WARNING
To make sure that the seat is securely locked, try to move it forward or backward without using the adjusting lever.
To adjust the seatback
N00402000356
To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then lean backward to a comfortable position and
Seat and restraint systems 4-3
Front seats
release the lever. The seatback will lock in place.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sud-
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
4
motion. Seat belt performance during an accident
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body during an accident, there is
1- Raise 2- Lower
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Heated seats
The reclining mechanism used in the seatback is spring loaded, and will cause the seatback to return quickly to the vertical position when the lock lever is operated. When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
To adjust the seat height (Driver's side only)
N00402100230
N00435601434
The heated seats can be operated when the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position.
back or hold the seatback with your hand to Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower
control its return motion.
the seat.
4-4 Seat and restraint systems
A- For the driver's seat B- For the front passenger's seat
1- Heater on. 2- Heater off
The indicator light (C) will illuminate while the heater is on.
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel temperature change or skin pain due to age, illness, injury, medication, alcohol use, fatigue or other physical conditions or who have sensitive skin may suffer burns when using the heated seat even at low temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns, people with such conditions must use care when using the heated seat.
CAUTION
Switch off the seat heater when not in use. Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects into the seat. Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other insulating material on the seat while using the heater; doing so can cause the heater element to overheat. When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic solvents; doing so can cause damage not only to the surface of the seat, but also to the heater.
CAUTION
If water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before attempting to use the heater.
Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be malfunctioning during use.
Rear seats
4
NOTE
Do not turn the electric motor switch to the "ON" position; doing so will stop quick charging.
You can use the heated seats while the Remote Climate Control is activated. Refer to "Remote Climate Control" on page 3-36, 3-46 and "For persons with electromedical apparatus such as implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable cardiovascular defibrillator" on page 3-6.
Rear seats
N00402500218
CAUTION
Child restraint lower anchorages (A) are provided between the seat cushion and the seatback. Be careful that the lower anchorages may be hot due to heat of the electric motor unit room.
To adjust the seatback
N00402800022
To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, gently pull the seatback lock lever, then lean backward to a comfortable position and release the lever. The seatback will lock in place.
Seat and restraint systems 4-5
Head restraints
NOTE
It is possible to adjust the seatback angle independently on each side.
4 Folding the seatbacks forward
N00402901219
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide additional luggage compartment space. Pull the lever, and fold the rear seatbacks forward. Confirm that the seatback locks securely when it is returned.
WARNING
To avoid reducing rearward vision, do not load cargo or luggage higher than the top of the seatback.
Firmly secure cargo and luggage. Unsecured cargo and luggage can move during braking or in an accident, causing serious injury or death.
To maximize the effectiveness of your head restraint, seatback to the upright position, and the head restraint to the proper position. Sit back against the seatback with your head close to the head restraint.
NOTE
Do not push the lever toward the rear of the vehicle. Doing so could damage the lever and make it impossible to operate the seatback.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to ride in the center of rear seat or in the luggage compartment vehicle is in motion. People who are not properly seated and restrained can be seriously injured or killed in an accident.
4-6 Seat and restraint systems
Head restraints
N00404300571
Padded head restraints for the seats can reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear. The head restraints are equipped in the illustrated position.
WARNING
In order to minimize the risk of a neck injury due to a rear impact, the head restraint must be adjusted to the proper position before vehicle operation. For the driver and front passenger, the seatbacks must be adjusted to the upright position before adjusting the head restraints. The driver should never adjust the seat while the vehicle is in motion.
Head restraints
WARNING
WARNING
Driving without the head restraints in
To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
place can cause you and your passengers
the event of an accident, the head
serious injury or death in an accident. To
restraints must be properly installed and
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
positioned to proper height before vehicle
always make sure the head restraints are installed and properly positioned when
operation.
4
the seat is occupied.
Never place a cushion or similar device on the seatback. This can adversely affect
To install
head restraint performance by increasing the distance between your head and the
First check that the head restraint is facing in
restraint.
To remove
the right direction as shown in the previous illustration, and then insert it into the seat-
Adjustment of the head restraint height
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction shown by the arrows. Then pull the head
back. Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint locks into place.
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, adjust the head restraint height so that the center of the restraint is at your eye level when seated. Any person too tall for the restraint to reach their eye level when seated
restraint up and out of the seatback.
CAUTION
Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out as shown in the illustration. Then pull the head restraint up to make sure that it is locked in place and will not come out of the
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
seatback.
position.
To raise the restraint, pull it straight up. To lower the restraint, push down on it
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
direction shown by the arrow. After adjusting the height, push down on
the restraint to make sure it is locked in
position.
Seat and restraint systems 4-7
Seat belts
4
Seat belts
N00406001494
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help reduce the risk of injury to the driver and passenger in the event of an accident. Always use the provided seat belts. Carefully review the following information for proper seat belt usage.
CAUTION
The shape and size of the head restraint differs according to the seat. Always use the correct head restraint provided for the seat and do not install the head restraint in the wrong direction.
WARNING
To help reduce the risk of injury or death in an accident, seat belts and child restraint systems must always be used. Refer to "Child restraint systems" on page 4-13 for additional information.
Never use one seat belt for more than one person.
Never carry more people in your vehicle than there are seat belts.
Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit. Always place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never put it behind you or under your arm. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible across your hips, not around your waist. Never modify or alter the seat belts in your vehicle.
WARNING
To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death during deployment of the driver's airbag, always properly wear the seat belt and adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle.
To reduce the risk to a front seat passenger of serious injury or death from a deploying airbag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt properly, remains seated all the way back and upright in their seat, and moves the seat as far back as possible. Refer to "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag" on page 4-20 for additional information.
Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions creates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop.
4-8 Seat and restraint systems
WARNING
Children 12 years old and under should always ride in the rear seat and be properly restrained. This reduces their risk of serious injury or death in an accident, especially due to a deploying front passenger's airbag. Refer to "Child restraint systems" on page 4-13 for additional information.
Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system.
Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing child safety seat and positioned in the rear seat.
In the event of an accident, all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attachment hardware, should be inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer to determine whether replacement is necessary.
Seat belt instructions
N00406200457
All seats are equipped with a seat belt which uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with an emergency locking retractor.
retractor in the event of a sudden change in the vehicle's motion.
NOTE
For instructions on installing a child restraint system using a seat belt, refer to "Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt" on page 4-18.
1. Occupants should always sit back in their seats with their backs against the upright seatback. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death during deployment of the airbag, adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while maintaining a position that still enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily control the steering wheel, and safely operate the vehicle. The front passenger seat should also be moved as far back as possible. Refer to "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag" on page 4-20. Also refer to "To adjust the seat forward or backward" on page 4-3.
This system is designed to provide both comfort and safety. It permits full extension and automatic retraction of the belts during normal vehicle operation. A sensing device inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
Seat belts
4
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident or sudden stop, all seatbacks should be kept in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Seat belt performance during an accident can be adversely affected if the seatbacks are reclined. The more a seatback is reclined, the more likely seat belt performance will be adversely affected. If the seat belt is not properly positioned against the body during an accident, there is increased risk you will slide under the belt and receive serious injury or death.
2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the webbing so that it easily pulls across your body.
Seat and restraint systems 4-9
Seat belts
4
4. The lap part of the belt must always be worn low and snug across the hips. Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to take up any slack in the lap belt.
WARNING
Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and is worn as low as possible across the hips, not around the waist. Failure to follow this instruction will increase the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat belt performance.
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding the latch plate. Push the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click". Pull up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is locked securely in the buckle.
NOTE
If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled out, pull it once with force and let it retract all the way. Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
4-10 Seat and restraint systems
NOTE
With the exception of the seat belt for the driver, the seat belts in all other seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint installation function (see page 4-18). When the ALR function has been activated, the seat belt will only retract. If this happens, let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.
5. To release the belt, press the button on the buckle and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists in the webbing. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Driver's seat belt reminder/warning light
N00418400371
A tone and warning light are used to remind the driver to fasten the seat belt.
Seat belts
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, always wear your own seat belt. Do not allow anyone to ride in your vehicle unless he or she
The light comes on when a person sits on the front passenger seat but does not fasten the seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is subsequently fastened.
is also seated and wearing a seat belt. Children should additionally be restrained
WARNING
4
in a secure child restraint system.
When a child booster seat is used on the
front passenger seat, the front passenger
Front passenger seat belt warn-
seat belt warning light will not come on, if the seat belt is not fastened when the
If the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position without the driver's seat belt being fastened, a warning light will come on, and a tone will sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind you to fasten your seat
ing light
N00418300224
The front passenger seat belt warning light is located in the instrument panel.
booster seat is used. Confirm that the child is wearing the seat belt properly. Do not install any accessory or sticker that makes the light difficult to see.
belt. If the seat belt remains unfastened approxi-
Adjustable seat belt shoulder
mately 1 minute later, the warning light will
anchor (front seats)
flash and the tone will sound intermittently
N00406300328
for approximately 90 seconds when the vehicle is driven. If the seat belt subsequently remains unfastened, the warning light and tone will issue further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving from a stop. And if the driver unfas-
The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted. To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A) and slide the anchor to the desired position. Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into position.
tens the seat belt while driving, the warning
will operate in the same way. When the seat
belt is fastened, the warnings will stop.
When the electric motor switch is turned to
the "ON" position, this indicator normally
comes on and goes off a few seconds later.
Seat and restraint systems 4-11
Seat belt use during pregnancy
obtained. The extender may be used for either or killed in an accident if they do not wear
of the front seats.
seat belts.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or
4
death to pregnant women and unborn children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
WARNING
have any additional questions or concerns.
Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so
that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder without touching your neck. The shoulder belt should
WARNING
Seat belt pre-tensioner and
The extender should only be used if the force limiter systems
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
N00417701736
ure to follow this instruction can adversely affect seat belt performance and increase the risk of serious injury or death in the event of an accident.
who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an extender can adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident.
The driver's and front passenger's seats each have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner system and force limiter system.
Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when the vehicle is not in motion.
Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed.
Pre-tensioner system
position after adjusting it.
Seat belt use during preg-
The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
Seat belt extender
N00406700087
When your seat belt, even fully extended, is not long enough, a seat belt extender must be
nancy
N00406800121
Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, pregnant women are more likely to be seriously injured
tem. In moderate-to-severe front or side collisions, this system operates simultaneously with the deployment of the front airbags, side airbags or curtain airbags. The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,
4-12 Seat and restraint systems
Child restraint systems
the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt webbing and increase seat belt performance.
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the electric motor switch is in the "ON" or "START" position. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring. The pre-tensioner seat belt system will operate only when the electric motor switch is in the "ON" or "START" position.
WARNING
The seat belt pre-tensioner system is designed to work only once. After the seat belt pre-tensioners have been activated, they will not work again. They must
4 promptly be replaced and the entire seat
belt pre-tensioner system inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,
some smoke is released and a loud noise will
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes the following components:
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should be taken not to intentionally inhale it, as it may cause some temporary irritation to people with respiratory problems. The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a moderate-to-severe front or side impact, even if the seat belt is not being worn. The seat belt
SRS warning light
N00408700124
This warning light tells you if there is a problem involving the SRS airbags and/or the pretensioner seat belts. Refer to "SRS warning light" on page 4-26.
pre-tensioners may not activate in certain
frontal collisions, even though the vehicle Force limiter system
may appear to be severely damaged. Such
N00408900113
non-activation does not mean something is wrong with the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather that the collision forces were not severe enough or not of the type to activate
In the event of an accident, the seat belt force limiter system will help reduce the force applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
the system.
Child restraint systems
N00407101795
1- SRS warning light 2- Front impact sensors 3- Seat belt pre-tensioners 4- Airbag control unit 5- Side impact sensors
When transporting infants or small children in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint system must always be used. This is required by law in the U.S. and Canada.
Seat and restraint systems 4-13
Child restraint systems
Child restraint systems specifically designed for infants and small children are offered by several manufacturers. Choose only a child restraint system with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
4 Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufacturer's statement of compliance on the box and child restraint system itself.
The child restraint system should be appropriate for your child's weight and height, and should properly fit your vehicle's seat. For detail information, refer to the instruction manual accompanying the child restraint system.
Guidelines for child restraint system selection
Children older than 1 year of age and who weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall must be in a forward-facing restraint used only in the rear seat.
Children who weigh more than 40 pounds (18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches (100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should use a suitable child seat or a booster seat in the rear seat until the vehicle's lap/shoulder belt fits them properly.
WARNING
All children must be seated in the rear seat, and properly restrained. Accident statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat, rather than in the front seat.
All children should be properly restrained in a restraint device that offers the maximum protection for their size and age. Be sure to check local, state, or provincial requirements for child size and age that may vary from the recommendations listed below.
Children less than 1 year old and who weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.
4-14 Seat and restraint systems
WARNING
Any child who is too large to use a child restraint system should ride in the rear seat and wear the lap and shoulder belt properly. The shoulder belt must be positioned over the shoulder and across the chest, not across their neck, and with the lap belt positioned low on the child's hips, not across their stomach. If necessary, a booster seat should be used to help achieve a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions. Only use a booster seat that is certified as complying with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regulations.
Never hold an infant or child in your arms or on your lap when riding in this vehicle, even when you are wearing your seat belt. Never place any part of the seat belt you are wearing around an infant or child. Failure to follow these simple instructions creates a risk of serious injury or death to your child in the event of an accident or sudden stop.
WARNING
Your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger's airbag. Never put REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger's airbag. During deployment of the airbag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraint systems or infant restraint systems must only be used in the rear seat.
Airbag
WARNING
FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If they must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint system, properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death to the child.
Child restraint systems
WARNING
It is important to use an approved rearfacing infant restraint until the infant is one year old (unless the infant outgrows the seat sooner). This allows the infant's
4 neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event of an accident. When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer and follow the directions in this manual. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death to your child in an accident or sudden stop. After installation, push and pull the child restraint system back and forth, and side to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If the child restraint system is not installed securely, it may cause injury to the child or other occupants in the event of an accident or sudden stop. When not in use, keep your child restraint system secured with the seat belt, or remove it from the vehicle, in order to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during an accident.
Seat and restraint systems 4-15
Child restraint systems
NOTE
Before purchasing a child restraint system,
try installing it in the rear seat to make sure
there is a good fit. Because of the location of
the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat
4
cushion, it may be difficult to securely install some manufacturer's child restraint systems.
If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
choose another manufacturer's child restraint
system.
Depending on the seating position in the
vehicle and the child restraint system that
you have, the child restraint system can be
attached using one of the following two
methods:
· To the lower anchorage in the rear seat
ONLY if the child restraint system is com-
patible with the LATCH system (See page
4-16).
· To the seat belt (See page 4-18).
Installing a child restraint system using the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for children) system
N00418800144
Lower anchor locations
Tether anchor locations
N00418900187
Your vehicle has 2 attachment points on the floor of the luggage compartment. These are for securing a child restraint system tether strap to each of the 2 rear seating positions in your vehicle.
The seating positions in the rear seat of your vehicle are equipped with lower anchors for attaching child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system.
NOTE
The symbols on the seatback show the location of the lower anchor points.
4-16 Seat and restraint systems
Examples of child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system
N00419000185
A- Rear-facing child restraint system B- Front-facing child restraint system C- Child restraint system lower anchor
connectors D- Tether strap (These are only examples.)
Using the LATCH system
N00419100229
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, remove the head restraint from the location where you wish to install the child restraint system.
2. Open the gap a little between the seat cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with your hand to locate the lower anchorages (C).
3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the child restraint system into the lower anchors (C) in accordance with the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Remember, the lower anchors provided with your vehicle are designed to secure suitable child restraint systems compatible with the LATCH system in the outboard positions of the rear seat only.
A- Vehicle seat cushion B- Vehicle seatback C- Lower anchor D- Connector
NOTE
In order to secure a child restraint system compatible with the LATCH system, use the lower anchor points in the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the vehicle's seat belt.
Child restraint systems
WARNING
If there is any foreign material in or around the lower anchors, remove it before installing the child restraint system. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
4 from, not looped through or otherwise
interfering with, the child restraint system. If foreign matter is not removed and/or the seat belt interferes with the child restraint system, the child restraint system will not be secured properly, could detach and move forward in the event of sudden braking or an accident, and could result in injury to the child or other vehicle occupants. When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust the seat where the child restraint system is installed.
4. Open the cover (E) for the tether anchor by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (4).
5. Latch the tether strap hook (F) of the child restraint system to the anchor (G) as illustrated below (5) and tighten the top tether strap so it is securely fastened.
Seat and restraint systems 4-17
Child restraint systems
from normal Emergency Locking Retractor Installation
(ELR) mode to Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull 1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the
where you wish to install it.
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
To help assure proper fitting of the child
4
installation function. Always use the ALR child restraint installation function when you
restraint system, always remove the head restraint.
install a child restraint system using the seat 2. Route the seat belt through the child
belt.
restraint system according to the instruc-
6. Push and pull the child restraint system in all directions to be sure it is firmly secured.
Children 12 years old and under should always be restrained in the rear seat, whenever possible, although the front passenger seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
tions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Then insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure you hear a "click" when you insert the latch plate into the buckle.
WARNING
Child restraint system tether anchors are
WARNING
When you install a child restraint system using the seat belt, always make sure the
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
retractor has been switched to the ALR
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
child restraint installation function. The
no circumstances are they to be used for
ALR function will keep the child restraint
adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching
system tightly secured to the seat.
other items, or equipment to the vehicle.
Failure to convert the retractor to the
ALR function may allow the child
restraint system to move forward during
Installing a child restraint system using the seat belt (with emergency/automatic locking
sudden braking or an accident, resulting in serious injury or death to the child or other occupants.
3. To activate the ALR child restraint installation function, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out of the
mechanism)
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt
N00407301481
feed back into the retractor.
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt in all other seating positions can be converted
4-18 Seat and restraint systems
Child restraint systems
WARNING
Child restraint system tether anchors are designed only to withstand loads from correctly fitted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances are they to be used for
4 adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching
other items, or equipment to the vehicle.
4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is in the ALR function, you will not be able to pull it out. If the webbing can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR function has not been activated and you will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt allowing the slack to feed into the retractor. Remember, if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child restraint system will not be secure. It may help to put your weight on the child restraint system and/or push on its seatback while pulling up on the belt (see illustration).
If your child restraint system requires the use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in accordance with the following procedures.
6. Open the cover from the tether anchor installation point by pulling it back with your hand as illustrated below (6).
7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint system to the tether anchor (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the top tether strap so it is securely fastened.
8. Before putting your child in the restraint, push and pull the restraint in all directions to be sure it is firmly secured. Do this before each use. If the child restraint system is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1 through 7.
9. To remove a child restraint system from the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode, remove the child from the restraint. Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt from the restraint and let the belt fully retract.
10. Reinstall the head restraint. Refer to "Head restraints" on page 4-6.
Children who have outgrown child restraint systems
N00407601615
Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should be seated in the rear seat and wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses their stomach, a commercially available
Seat and restraint systems 4-19
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts
booster seat must be used, to raise the child so that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder and the lap belt remains positioned low
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts
across their hips. The booster seat should fit
N00407000351
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying The seat belt webbing may be cleaned with
4 compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle mild soap or detergent solution. Do not use an Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint organic solvent. Allow the belts to dry in the
Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- shade. Do not allow them to retract until com-
tions.
pletely dry. Do not attempt to bleach or re-
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair or replace any part of the seat belt assemblies. This work should be done by a certified i-MiEV dealer. Failure to have a certified i-MiEV dealer perform the work could reduce the effectiveness of the belts and could result in a serious injury or death in an accident.
WARNING
dye the belts. The color may rub off and the
webbing strength may be affected.
Supplemental Restraint Sys-
Any child who is too small to properly wear a seat belt must be properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system, to reduce their risk of
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and their release mechanisms for positive engagement and release of the latch plate. Check the
tem (SRS) - airbag
N00407701834
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
serious injury or death in an accident.
retractors for automatic locking when in the Restraint System (SRS), which includes air-
A child should never be left unattended in, Automatic Locking Retractor function.
bags for the driver and passengers.
or unsupervised, around your vehicle.
When you leave the vehicle always take The entire seat belt assembly should be The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
the child out as well.
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious ment the primary protection of the driver and
Children can die from heat stroke if left or cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on hot days. Keep your vehicle locked when not in use. Keep your vehicle keys away from children.
tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or severe fading from sunlight. All of these conditions indicate a weakening of the belt, which may adversely affect seat belt performance in an accident.
ing those occupants with protection against head and chest injuries in certain moderate to severe frontal collisions. The SRS front airbags, together with sensors at the front of the vehicle and sensors
attached to the front seats, form an advanced
airbag system.
The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags are also designed to supplement the seat belts. The SRS side airbags provide the driver and front passenger with protection against chest,
4-20 Seat and restraint systems
abdomen and hip injuries by deploying the bag on the side impacted in moderate to severe side impact collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide the driver and passengers on the front seat and rear seat with protection against head injuries by deploying a bag on the side impacted in moderate to severe side impact collisions.
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use of the seat belts. For maximum protection in all types of accidents, seat belts must ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or rides in this vehicle (with infants and small children in an appropriate child restraint system in the rear seat, and older children buckled in the rear seat). Refer to "Child restraint systems" on page 4-13.
WARNING
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
WARNING
· Seat belts help keep the driver and passengers properly positioned. This reduces the risk of injury in all collisions, and reduces the risk of serious injuries or death when the airbags inflate. During sudden braking just before a collision, an unrestrained or improperly restrained driver or passengers can move forward into direct contact with, or within close proximity to, the airbag when it begins to inflate. The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injuries or death if the occupant comes in contact with the airbag at this time.
· Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in rollovers, rear impact collisions, and in lower-speed frontal collisions, because the airbags are not designed to inflate in those situations.
· Seat belts reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle in a collision or rollover.
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY SEATED.
· A driver or front passenger sitting too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment can be seriously injured or killed.
WARNING
· Airbags inflate very quickly and with great force. If the driver and front passenger are not properly seated and restrained, the airbag may not provide
4 the proper protection and can cause seri-
ous injuries or death when it inflates.
· To reduce the risk to the driver of serious injury or death due to a deploying driver's airbag, always properly wear your seat belt and adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible, maintaining a position that still allows the driver to have good control of the steering wheel, brake, accelerator, and other vehicle controls.
· To reduce the risk to the front passenger of serious injury or death from a deploying passenger's airbag, make sure the passenger always wears the seat belt properly, remains seated upright and all the way back in the seat, and positions the seat as far back as possible.
· Seat all infants and children in the rear seat, properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint system.
Airbags inflate very quickly and with great force. Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or the instrument panel.
Do not put your feet or legs on or against the instrument panel.
Seat and restraint systems 4-21
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4
Airbag
WARNING
Infants and small children should never ride unrestrained, or lean against the instrument panel. They should never ride held in your arms or on your lap. They can be seriously injured or killed in an accident, especially when the airbags inflate. Infants and children should be properly seated in the rear seat in an appropriate child restraint system. Refer to "Child restraint systems" on page 4-13.
WARNING
NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front passenger seat. This places the infant too close to the passenger's airbag. During deployment of the airbag, the infant can be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing child restraint systems or infant restraint systems must only be used in the rear seat.
WARNING
FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat whenever possible. If they must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat to the most rearward position and make sure the child stays in the child restraint system, properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury or death to the child.
4-22 Seat and restraint systems
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
WARNING
Older children should be seated in the rear seat with their seat belt properly worn, and with an appropriate booster seat if needed.
7- Passenger's seat occupant classification sensor system
8- Airbag control unit
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale the smoke as it may cause temporary irritation to people with respiratory problems.
Refer to "Children who have outgrown child restraint systems" on page 4-19.
4 After deployment, the airbags will quickly
deflate, so quickly that some people may not
even realize the airbags inflated.
How the Supplemental Restraint System works
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, and does not prevent people from leaving the
N00407800489
vehicle.
The SRS includes the following components:
9- Side airbag modules 10- Curtain airbag modules 11- Side impact sensors
CAUTION
Airbags inflate very quickly and with great force. In certain situations, contact with an inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
sions, and bruises.
of the electronic parts of the system whenever
the electric motor switch is in the "ON" or "START" position. These include all of the items listed above and all related wiring.
Event Data Recording
N00418600227
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
1- Driver's airbag 2- SRS warning light 3- Passenger's airbag off indicator 4- Front impact sensors 5- Passenger's front airbag 6- Driver's seat position sensor
The airbags will operate only when the electric motor switch is in the "ON" or "START" position.
When the impact sensors detect a sufficient front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s), the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
Seat and restraint systems 4-23
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
WARNING
· Do not place metallic objects or luggage under the front seat.
If the vehicle is involved in a severe impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by
4
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Driver's seat position sensor
Whether or not the driver safety belt was
N00417900210
a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
The driver's seat position sensor is attached to the seat rail and provides the airbag control unit with information on the seat's fore-aft position. The airbag control unit controls deployment of the driver's front airbag in accordance with the information it receives from this sensor. If there is a problem involving the driver's seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to "SRS warning light" on page 4-26.
WARNING
If the SRS warning light comes on, have the vehicle inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
Please observe the following instructions to ensure that the driver's seat position sensor can operate correctly. · Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well back against the seatback. Refer to "Front seats" on page 4-3. · Do not recline the seatback more than necessary when driving.
Passenger's seat occupant classification sensor system
N00418000351
The passenger's seat occupant classification sensor system is attached to the front passenger seat cushion and provides the airbag control unit with information regarding the occupant on the front passenger seat. The airbag control unit controls deployment of the passenger's front airbag in accordance with the information it receives from this system. The passenger's front airbag will not deploy in an impact when the system senses no occupant on the front passenger's seat or a child in a child restraint system. In this case, the passenger's airbag off indicator will come on. Refer to "Passenger's airbag off indicator" on page 4-25. If there is a problem involving the passenger's seat occupant classification sensor system, the SRS warning light in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to "SRS warning light" page 4-26.
4-24 Seat and restraint systems
WARNING
If any of the following conditions occur, you should immediately have your vehicle inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible: · The SRS warning light does not initially come on when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" or "START" position. · The SRS warning light does not go out after several seconds. · The SRS warning light comes on while you are driving.
To ensure that the passenger's seat occupant classification sensor system can sense correctly, observe the following instructions. Failure to follow these instructions can adversely affect the performance of the passenger's airbag system. · Adjust the seat to the correct position, and sit well back against the seatback. Refer to "Front seats" on page 4-3. · Do not recline the seatback more than necessary. · Never have more than one person (adult or child) sitting on the seat. · Do not place anything between the seat and the floor console. · When attaching a child restraint system, secure it firmly. · Do not place luggage or other objects on the seat. · Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
WARNING
· Do not modify or replace the seat and seat belt.
· Do not place luggage or other objects under the seat.
· Do not place and use an electronic device such as a computer on the seat.
· Do not place heavy objects on the seat or stick pins, needles, or other objects into it.
· Do not remove the seat cushion skin. · If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it
and dry the seat immediately. If the vehicle is involved in a severe
impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
4
The indicator normally comes on when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position and goes out a few seconds later. In the following situations, the indicator will stay on to show that the passenger's front airbag is not operational.
Passenger's airbag off indicator
N00418100310
The passenger's airbag off indicator is located in the instrument panel.
The front passenger's seat is not occupied. The system senses that a child is in the
child restraint system on the front passenger's seat.
When the passenger's seat occupant classification sensor system senses there is a person seated in the front passenger's seat, the indicator goes out to show that the passenger's front airbag is operational.
Seat and restraint systems 4-25
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
WARNING
If any of the following conditions occur, you should immediately have the airbag system in your vehicle inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible:
lem involving one or more of the SRS components, the warning light will come on and stay on. The SRS warning light is shared by the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system.
WARNING
The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-tensioners are designed to help reduce the risk of serious injury or death in certain collisions. If either of the above conditions
4
· The passenger's airbag off indicator
comes on when an adult is sitting on the
occurs, immediately have your vehicle checked by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
front passenger seat.
· The passenger's airbag off indicator does not come on when the front passenger's seat is not occupied.
Driver's and passenger's front airbag system
· The passenger's airbag off indicator does
N00407900321
not come on when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position.
· The passenger's airbag off indicator comes on and goes out repeatedly.
Do not attach any accessory to your vehicle that makes the passenger's airbag off indicator difficult or impossible to see. You must be able to see the passenger's airbag off indicator and verify the status of the passenger's airbag system.
WARNING
If any of the following conditions occur, there may be a problem with the SRS airbags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and they may not function properly in a collision or may suddenly activate without a
The driver's airbag is located under the padded cover in the middle of the steering wheel. The front passenger's airbag is contained in the instrument panel above the glove compartment. The driver's airbag and the front passenger's airbag are designed to deploy at the same time. However, the front passenger's airbag does not deploy when the front passenger seat is not occupied or when the system senses that a child is in the child restraint system.
SRS warning light
N00408301606
There is a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) warning light on the instrument panel. The system checks itself every time the electric motor switch is turned on. The SRS warn-
collision: · Even when the electric motor switch is in
"ON" position, the SRS warning light does not come on or it remains on. · The SRS warning light comes on while driving.
ing light will come on for several seconds and
then go out. This is normal and means the
system is working properly. If there is a prob-
4-26 Seat and restraint systems
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Driver Front passenger
Deployment of front airbags
The front airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when...
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher
4
N00408000589
Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows
Seat and restraint systems 4-27
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
The front airbags are designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical condition is shown
The front airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when ...
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow objects
in the illustration to the left.
In certain types of front collisions, the front
The front airbags are designed to deploy only airbags may not deploy, even if the deforma-
4 in certain moderate to severe frontal colli- tion of the body seems to be large, because
sions within the shaded area between the the vehicle's body structure is designed to
arrows in the illustration to the right.
absorb the impact and deform in order to help Collision where the vehicle slides under the rear
The front airbags will deploy if the impact to protect the occupants. Some typical situations body of a truck
the vehicle's main structure is above a spe- where the front airbags may not deploy are
cific threshold level. The threshold level is shown in the illustrations.
approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) for a frontal
collision straight into a solid flat wall that Because the front airbags do not protect the
does not bend or deform. If the impact to the occupant in all types of frontal collisions, be vehicle's main structure is below this thresh- sure to always wear your seat belts properly.
Oblique frontal impact
old level, the front airbags may not deploy.
This threshold level may also be higher if the
vehicle hits something that absorbs the
impact, either by bending or moving (for
example, another stationary vehicle, a pole or
a guard rail).
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful, and can cause serious injuries or death if you are too close to the deploying airbag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
always wear the available seat belt.
...
The front airbags are not designed to deploy in situations where they cannot provide protection to the occupants.
4-28 Seat and restraint systems
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Some typical situations are shown in the illustrations. Because the front airbags do not protect the occupants in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Side collision to your vehicle
The front airbags MAY DEPLOY when ...
The front airbags may deploy if the underside of the vehicle suffers a moderate to severe impact (undercarriage impact). Some typical situations are shown in the illustrations.
Because the front airbags may deploy in certain types of unexpected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, and these unexpected impacts can move you out of position, it is important to always wear your seat belts properly. When worn properly, seat belts can help maintain your distance from the airbags when they begin to inflate. The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful and can cause serious injury or death if you are close to the deploying airbag.
Collision with an elevated median/island or curb
4
Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Seat and restraint systems 4-29
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
WARNING
Do not attach anything to the steering
wheel's padded cover, such as trim mate-
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
4
Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove
compartment. Such items could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
WARNING
Do not place objects, such as packages or pets, between the airbags and the driver or the front passenger. Such objects can adversely affect airbag performance, or cause serious injury or death when the airbag deploys.
Immediately after airbag inflation, some parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do not touch them. You could be burned.
The airbag system is designed to work only once. After the airbags deploy, they will not work again. They must promptly be replaced and the entire airbag system must be inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Side airbag system
N00408100418
The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver and front passenger seatbacks. The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to, or put them in front of, the windshield. They could restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and injure an occupant, when the airbag inflates.
Do not attempt to remove, install, disassemble or repair the SRS airbags.
A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehicles with side airbags.
4-30 Seat and restraint systems
Curtain airbag system
N00419200204
The curtain airbags are contained in the front pillars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no passenger in the front seat.
WARNING
The side airbag and curtain airbag can cause serious injury or death to anyone too close to the airbag when it deploys. To reduce the risk of injury from a deploying side airbag and curtain airbags, all occupants must be properly restrained and seated well back, upright, and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean against the door.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
WARNING
Do not attach a microphone (A) or any other object around the part where the curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the windshield, side door glass or front and
4 rear pillars and roof side rail. When the
curtain airbag inflate, the microphone or other object may be hurled with great force or the curtain airbag may not inflate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of injury from a deploying side airbag, do not allow any rear seat passengers to hold onto the back of either front seat. Special care should be taken with children.
Do not place any objects near or around the front of either front seatback. Such objects can interfere with proper side airbag deployment and cause injury during deployment of the side airbag.
Do not place stickers, labels or additional trim on the back of either front seat. They can interfere with proper side airbag deployment.
Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats that have side airbags. Covers can interfere with proper side airbag deployment and adversely affect side airbag performance.
WARNING
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system in the front passenger seat. Rearfacing child restraint systems MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.
Seat and restraint systems 4-31
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
WARNING
Front-facing child restraint systems should also be used ONLY in the rear seat. If a front-facing child restraint system
Deployment of side airbag and curtain airbag
N00408200523
occupants, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.
The side airbag and curtain airbag
4
must be used in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, and make sure that the child stays in the child
The side airbag and curtain airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY
MAY NOT DEPLOY when ...
restraint system, properly restrained and away from the door.
when ...
In certain types of side collisions, the side airbag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
Do not allow a child to lean against or sit close to the passenger door, even if the
if the deformation of the body seems to be A side airbag and curtain airbag are designed large, because the vehicle's body structure is
child is seated in a child restraint system. to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate designed to absorb the impact and to deform
The child's head should also not lean to severe side impact to the middle of the pas- in order to help protect the occupants. Some
against or be close to the section of the senger compartment.
typical situations where the side airbag and
seatback where the side airbag and cur- The typical situation is shown in the illustra- curtain airbag may not deploy are shown in
tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain airbag
tion.
the illustrations.
deploys. Failure to follow all of these instructions could lead to serious injury or death to the child. Work done on or in the vicinity of the side airbag and curtain airbag system compo-
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle body's side structure
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of side collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.
nents should be done only by a certified i-
MiEV dealer. Improper work methods can
cause accidental side airbag and curtain
airbag deployment, or render a side air-
bag and curtain airbag inoperable. Either
of these situations can result in serious
injury or death.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in an accident. The SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all
4-32 Seat and restraint systems
Side impact in an area away from the passenger compartment
Oblique side impact
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collision with the side of vehicle
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Head-on collision
4
Rear end collision
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object
The side airbag and curtain airbag ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when ...
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in situations where they cannot provide protection to the occupants. Some typical situations are shown in the illustrations.
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not protect the occupants in all types of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts properly.
Seat and restraint systems 4-33
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
SRS servicing
N00408500715
WARNING
Any maintenance performed on or near
4
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Do not permit anyone else to do any ser-
vice, inspection, maintenance or repair on
any SRS components or wiring. Similarly,
no part of the SRS should ever be handled,
removed or disposed by anyone except a
certified i-MiEV dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
dental airbag deployment or could make
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-
tions could result in serious injury or
death.
Do not modify your steering wheel or any
other SRS component or related vehicle
part. For example, replacement of the
steering wheel, or modifications to the
front bumper or body structure can
adversely affect SRS performance and
may lead to injury.
If your vehicle has received any damage,
you should have the SRS inspected by a
certified i-MiEV dealer to make sure it is
in proper working order.
4-34 Seat and restraint systems
WARNING
Do not modify your front seats, center pillar or center console. Such modifications can adversely affect SRS performance and may lead to injury. Also, if you discover any tear or open seam in the seat fabric near the side airbag, have the seat inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
If you find a crack in or damage to the front pillar, rear pillar, or roof side rail where the curtain airbag is located, have the SRS inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
NOTE
When you transfer ownership of the vehicle to another person, we urge you to alert the new owner that it is equipped with the SRS and refer that owner to the applicable sections in this owner's manual.
If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, we urge you to first take it to a certified iMiEV dealer so that the SRS can be made safe for disposal.
If any of the following parts needs to be modified for use by a handicapped person, the advanced airbag system will be greatly affected. Please consult a certified i-MiEV dealer for assistance. · Driver's seat · Front passenger seat · Front seat belt
NOTE
· Steering wheel · Instrument panel
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to: Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department P. O. Box 6400 Cypress, CA 90630-0064
[For vehicles sold in Canada] To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or write to: Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 41009 4141 Dixie Road Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
Warning labels
N00408600370
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS are located in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
Located in the passenger's side as well.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4
Seat and restraint systems 4-35
Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-2 Warning lights ................................................................................5-44
5 Keys .................................................................................................5-2 Combination headlights and dimmer switch .................................5-46
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-2 Turn signal lever ............................................................................5-48
Keyless entry system .......................................................................5-5 Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-49
Door locks ........................................................................................5-8 Front fog light switch ....................................................................5-49
Power door locks .............................................................................5-9 Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-50
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-10 Electric rear window defogger switch ...........................................5-52
Liftgate ...........................................................................................5-11 Horn switch ...................................................................................5-53
Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-12 Link System (if so equipped) .........................................................5-53
Power window control ...................................................................5-14 Parking brake .................................................................................5-16 Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-16 Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-17 Electric motor switch .....................................................................5-18 Steering wheel lock ........................................................................5-20 Starting the electric motor unit ......................................................5-20 Selector lever .................................................................................5-21 Acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS) ......................................5-23
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped).......................................5-53 USB input terminal (if so equipped) ..............................................5-73 Sun visors ......................................................................................5-75 12 V power outlet ..........................................................................5-76 Interior lights .................................................................................5-76 Storage spaces ................................................................................5-79 Cup holder .....................................................................................5-80 Assist grip ......................................................................................5-80
Service brake .................................................................................5-24
Brake assist system ........................................................................5-25
Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-25
Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-27
Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-28
Tire pressure monitoring system ....................................................5-30
Rear-view camera (if so equipped).................................................5-34
Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-36
Indicator and warning light package ..............................................5-43
Indicators .......................................................................................5-44
Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations
N00508700343
Advanced automobile manufacturing techniques permit you to operate your new vehicle without requiring a long break-in period of low-speed driving.
5 However, you can add to the future performance and economy of your vehicle by observing the following precautions during the first 300 miles (500 km). Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during the break-in period.
Do not overload the vehicle. Observe the seating capacity (See "Cargo load precautions" on page 6-10).
Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
Keys
N00508800618
Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks. Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
NOTE
The key number (A) is stamped on the key number plate as shown in the illustration. Make a record of the key number and store the key and key number plate in separate places, so that you can order a key from a certified i-MiEV dealer if the original keys are lost.
The key is a precision electronic device with a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe the following in order to prevent damage.
· Do not leave where it may be exposed to heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on top of the dashboard.
· Do not take the remote control transmitter apart.
· Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to strong impacts.
· Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
· Keep away from magnetic objects such as key holders.
NOTE
· Keep away from devices that produce magnetism, such as audio systems, computers and televisions.
· Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. · Do not leave the key where it may be
exposed to high temperature or high humidity. As your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer, the electric motor unit is designed so that it will not start if the ID code registered in the immobilizer computer and the key's ID code do not match. Refer to the section entitled "Electronic immobilizer" for details and key usage.
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
N00509101846
The electronic immobilizer is designed to significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt can only be achieved (subject to certain conditions), using a key "registered" to the immobilizer system. All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle's electronics.
5-2 Features and controls
NOTE
In the following cases, the vehicle may not be able to recognize the registered ID code from the key. This means the electric motor unit will not start even when the registered key is turned to the "START" position. · When the key contacts a key ring or other metallic or magnetic object
· When the key grip contacts metal of another key
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
NOTE
· When the key contacts or is close to other immobilizing keys (including keys of other vehicles)
CAUTION
Do not make any alterations or additions to the immobilizer system. Alterations or additions could cause failure of the immobilizer.
In cases like the above, move the offending object(s) away from the key and turn the key back to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. Then try to start the electric motor unit again. If the electric motor unit does not start, contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Electronic immobilizer is not compatible with commercially available remote starting systems. Use of commercially available remote starting systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
A system failure is suspected when the electric motor switch is turned to the "START" position, and the electric motor unit does not start. In such a case, contact a certified iMiEV dealer.
Replacement keys
5
Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle.
If you lose a key, you can order a key from a certified i-MiEV dealer by referring to the key number. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the vehicle keys must be changed. Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to a certified i-MiEV dealer to have your ID code changed.
Additional keys
To add a key, you need to register the ID code to the vehicle. Registering the ID code can be done by a certified i-MiEV dealer. Or it can be done by yourself (except for vehicles sold in Canada). To register the ID code yourself, follow the "Customer key programming" procedure below.
Features and controls 5-3
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
If you choose to have a certified i-MiEV dealer register the ID code, take your vehicle and any remaining keys to a certified i-MiEV dealer.
NOTE
You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
5
add up to 6 more keys.
Customer key programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)
N00562200113
You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid (already registered) keys and blank (not registered) immobilizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at a certified iMiEV dealer) by doing the following:
4. When the immobilizer indicator starts blinking, turn the second valid key to the "LOCK" position and remove it. Within 30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank immobilizer key into the ignition and turn it to the "ON" position. Perform this operation no more than 30 seconds after the immobilizer indicator starts blinking. When registration of the ID code is complete, the immobilizer indicator will come on for 3 seconds then go off. If an error occurs, the immobilizer indicator will go off during the procedure.
NOTE
· the immobilizer indicator does not come on for 3 seconds after turning the ignition to the "ON" position with a blank immobilizer key
The procedure will be terminated automatically if:
· a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the first key is turned to the "LOCK" position to the moment when the second key is turned to the "ON" position
· a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses from the moment when the second key is turned to the "LOCK" position to the moment when the blank immobilizer key (specially cut for your vehicle at a certified i-MiEV dealer) is turned to the "ON" position
· more than 20 seconds elapse after the immobilizer indicator starts blinking
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the ignition to the "ON" position for 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition to the "LOCK" position and remove the first key.
3. Within 30 seconds of turning the first key to the "LOCK" position, insert the second valid key into the ignition and turn it to the "ON" position. About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer indicator will start blinking.
5. If you wish to register another key, perform the process again from step 1.
NOTE
It is not possible to register a key if: · the immobilizer indicator goes off during the procedure
General information
N00562300084
Your electronic immobilizer operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of the Industry Canada
5-4 Features and controls
Keyless entry system
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.
To unlock
This device may not cause harmful inter-
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
ference. This device must accept any interference
driver's door only. Within about 2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
received, including interference that may
button one more time to unlock all the doors
cause undesired operation.
5 and the liftgate.
If the dome light switch is in the door posi-
This digital apparatus does not exceed the
tion, the dome light will turn on for about 30
Class A limits for radio noise emissions from
seconds. The turn signal lights will also blink
digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
1- LOCK ( ) button 2- UNLOCK ( ) button 3- PANIC button
twice.
NOTE
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
4- Indicator light
If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed and no door or liftgate is opened within approximately 30 seconds, relocking will automati-
approved by the manufacturer for compli- To lock
ance could void the user's authority to oper-
cally occur (automatic relocking function). The time for automatic relocking can be
ate the equipment.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
changed. For details, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
doors and the liftgate.
The door and liftgate unlock function can be
Keyless entry system
N00509000910
Press the remote control transmitter buttons
If the dome light switch is in the door position, the dome light will blink once. The turn signal lights will also blink once.
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once. For details, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
to lock or unlock the doors and to open the liftgate. It can also help you signal for attention by setting off the panic alarm.
NOTE
If you press the LOCK button (1) after locking the doors and the liftgate, the horn will sound once to confirm that they are locked.
Answerback function
The keyless entry system answerback func-
tions from the horn can each be turned on or
off as desired.
Features and controls 5-5
Keyless entry system
Horn deactivation/reactivation
Changing the setting of the turn Replacement remote control
signal lights answerback function transmitters
The horn answerback function can be set to
N00543800077
the following three conditions.
The turn signal lights answerback function Only remote control transmitters pro-
Each time the horn answerback function is can be changed.
grammed with the vehicle's electronics can
set, a chime will sound to tell you the condi- If you want to change the answerback func- lock or unlock all doors.
5 tion of the answerback function.
tion, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer
for details.
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you
Number of chimes
One chime Two chimes
Condition
The horn will not sound. The horn will sound.
Setting of door unlock function
N00543600105
The door and liftgate unlock function can be
can order a remote control transmitter from a certified i-MiEV dealer by referring to the key number. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID codes for all the remote control transmitters except the one
The horn will sound if the Three chimes auto light switch is ON (if
so equipped).
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once. For details, please contact a certified i-MiEV
for the lost key must be programmed again. Take your vehicle and all the remaining remote control transmitters to a certified i-
The horn will sound if the dealer.
MiEV dealer to have your ID codes pro-
Four chimes LOCK button is pressed
grammed again.
twice quickly.
Using the panic alarm
N00543700050 Additional remote control
1. Remove the key from the electric motor switch.
2. Open the driver's door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the "OFF" position.
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 seconds and press the UNLOCK button (2) during this time.
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows:
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than 1 second.
2. The headlights will blink on and off and the horn will sound intermittently for about 3 minutes.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on the remote control transmitter.
transmitters
N00543900065
To add a remote control transmitter, you must already have one registered remote control transmitter. Registering the ID code can be done by yourself or by a certified i-MiEV dealer. For you to register the ID code yourself, follow the "Customer remote control transmitter programming" procedure below.
5-6 Features and controls
If you choose to have a certified i-MiEV dealer register the ID code, take your vehicle and all remaining keys to a certified i-MiEV dealer.
NOTE
You are provided with 2 remote control transmitters, but you may register up to 4 remote control transmitters.
General information
N00546100101
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of the Industry Canada Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions.
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Procedure for replacing the remote control transmitter battery
N00544101133
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static electricity from your body by touching a metal grounded object.
2. With the Mitsubishi mark facing up, insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the notch in the remote control transmitter case and use it to open the case.
Keyless entry system
NOTE
Be sure to perform the procedure with the Mitsubishi mark facing up. If the Mitsubishi mark is not facing up when you open the remote control transmitter case, the buttons may come out.
5 3. Remove the remote control transmitter
from the remote control transmitter case. Then, open the remote control transmitter using the method described in step 2.
4. Remove the old battery. 5. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
down.
Features and controls 5-7
Door locks
+ side
- side
5 Coin type battery CR1620
6. Close the remote control transmitter firmly.
7. Place the remote control transmitter in the remote control transmitter case, then securely close the remote control transmitter case.
8. Check the keyless entry system to see that it works.
NOTE
A certified i-MiEV dealer can replace the battery for you if you prefer.
CAUTION
When the remote control transmitter case is opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch internal components.
Door locks
N00509200534
WARNING
Make sure all doors are tightly closed and locked while driving.
· Locked doors, in combination with the use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk of ejection in an accident.
· Locked doors can help keep passengers, especially small children, from opening doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
· Locked doors can help prevent outsiders from gaining access to your vehicle when you slow down or come to a stop.
Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. Children who get into unlocked vehicles may not be able to get out. Children trapped inside vehicles can quickly be overcome by heat and suffer serious injury or death due to heat stroke.
Never leave children unattended inside a vehicle. In addition to the risk of heat stroke, children can activate switches and controls, resulting in an injury or fatal accident.
To lock or unlock the door with the key
Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to lock the door. After checking that the door is locked, turn the key back to the center and remove it.
1- Insert or remove the key 2- Lock 3- Unlock
5-8 Features and controls
To lock or unlock the door from the inside
Move the lock knob to the lock position to lock the door. All doors should be kept locked while driving.
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehicle. Close the door.
Power door locks
Power door locks
N00509300607
NOTE
When locking or unlocking with the key on the driver's door, only the driver's door will lock or unlock.
5 Repeated continuous operation between lock and unlock could activate the power door locking systems built-in protection circuit and prevent the system's from operating. If this occurs, wait about 1 minute before operating the power door lock switch.
1- Lock 2- Unlock
The driver's door can be unlocked without using the lock knob by pulling on the inside door handle.
To lock the door without using the key
Key reminder buzzer
N00549600240
If you open the driver's door while the key is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position, a tone will sound, reminding you to remove the key.
Lock out protection
N00549700179
If the key is in the electric motor switch when you push the lock knob forward with the driver's door or passenger's door open, the lock knob will automatically return to the unlocked position.
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked position.
Features and controls 5-9
Child safety locks for rear door
To lock and unlock by the power door lock switch
5
Using the selector lever position
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the selector lever is moved to the "P" (PARK) position with the electric motor switch in the "ON" position.
Child safety locks for rear door
N00509400288
1- Lock 2- Unlock
All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked or unlocked by operating the power door lock switch on the driver's or the passenger's door.
To unlock the doors and liftgate
N00563400095
You can select the functions to unlock the doors and liftgate either using the electric motor switch position or using the selector lever position. These functions are not activated when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. To activate or deactivate these functions, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
5-10 Features and controls
1- To lock 2- To release
Child safety locks help prevent rear passengers, especially children, from opening the rear door using the inside door handle. A lock lever for the child safety lock is provided on each rear door. When the lever is in the lock position (1), the rear door cannot be opened using the inside door handle. To open the rear door when the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, pull the outside door handle. When the lever is in the release position (2), the child safety lock is released and the rear
Liftgate
door can be opened using the inside door handle.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the liftgate, make sure
To close
WARNING
Always keep the doors tightly closed and locked when driving. An unlocked door may be accidentally opened by a passenger, especially by a child who could fall out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it.
To open
Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as illus-
trated. Gently push the upper gate from the
outside with enough force so that it is com-
pletely closed. Always ensure the liftgate is
securely closed.
5
is a greater risk of someone being thrown After unlocking the liftgate, push the switch
from the vehicle in an accident.
(A) and pull up the liftgate.
Liftgate
N00510101266
WARNING
When opening and closing the liftgate, make sure that there are no people nearby and be careful not to hit your head or pinch your hands, neck, etc.
If snow or ice has accumulated on the liftgate, remove it before opening the liftgate. Otherwise the liftgate may abruptly close due to the weight of the snow or ice.
When opening the liftgate, always fully open it. A partially opened liftgate can unexpectedly close due to its own weight.
When the vehicle is parked on a slope, the effort required to open or close the liftgate may be greater or less than expected. The liftgate may also open or close more quickly.
NOTE
If you do not open the liftgate immediately after pulling the handle, the liftgate can not be lifted. If this happens, pull the handle again and lift the liftgate.
The liftgate cannot be opened when the battery is flat or disconnected.
CAUTION
To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not attempt to close the liftgate the gate grip (A).
Before starting the vehicle, be sure to confirm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate opens while driving the vehicle, objects stored in the luggage compartment could fall out into the road.
When closing the liftgate, always ensure that everybody removes their hands and fingers from the liftgate opening.
Features and controls 5-11
Theft-alarm system
NOTE
Gas struts (B) are installed to support the lift-
gate.
To prevent damage or faulty operation.
· Do not hold the gas struts when closing the
liftgate.
· Also, do not push or pull on the gas struts.
5
· Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts.
· Do not tie anything, etc., around the gas
struts.
· Do not hang any objects on the gas struts.
ond is the "alarm" stage, and third is the "disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides both audible and visual alarm signals.
CAUTION
Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm to malfunction.
Armed stage
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A) in the meter cluster flashes for confirmation.
Park the vehicle and stop the electric motor unit. Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the key from the electric motor switch.
2. Lock all doors and the liftgate by using the keyless entry system.
Arm the system and leave
Theft-alarm system
N00510200244
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "armed" stage, the sec-
5-12 Features and controls
3. The system has entered the armed stage after about 20 seconds, when the theftalarm indicator flashing becomes slower. The theft-alarm indicator continues to flash while the system is in the armed stage.
NOTE
The system will be disarmed if, while the theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, all doors and the liftgate are unlocked by using the keyless entry system.
The system will be disarmed if, while the theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON".
The system will not be armed if a door or the liftgate is not completely closed. If this happens, rearm the system as described above.
NOTE
The theft-alarm system can be activated when people are riding inside the vehicle or when the windows are open. To prevent accidental activation of the alarm, do not set the system to the system armed mode while people are riding in the vehicle.
If the answerback function (flashing of the turn signal lights by locking and unlocking the doors and the liftgate) is deactivated, the turn signal lights do not flash after the locking and unlocking operation. For information on the answerback function, refer to "Keyless entry system" on pages 5-5.
Alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if the following occurs while the vehicle is parked and the system is armed.
One of the doors and the liftgate is opened without using the keyless entry system.
2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3 minutes.
Theft-alarm system
Turn the electric motor switch to the "ON" position.
Horn sounds! Headlights blink on and off!
NOTE
The alarm will continue to operate for 3 minutes. At the end of that period, the alarm will automatically shut off to save battery power. The system will then be rearmed until the proper disarming step is taken.
The alarm will resume if unauthorized actions are taken again, even if the alarm has stopped.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed if the following
operation is performed.
5
The electric motor switch is turned to the
"ON" position. All doors and the liftgate are unlocked by
using the keyless entry system.
Disarm...by using the keyless entry system
Type of alarm
When the alarm is activated:
1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 minutes. After 3 minutes the headlights automatically shut off.
Alarm deactivation
The alarm can be deactivated in the following ways.
By using the keyless entry system to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.
NOTE
If the UNLOCK button on the remote control transmitter is operated when all doors and the liftgate are closed and no door is opened within approximately 30 seconds, re-arming will automatically occur.
Features and controls 5-13
Power window control
NOTE
The amount of time after unlocking until the
vehicle relocks automatically can be
adjusted. See a certified i-MiEV dealer for
details.
Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
5
ing procedure.
Testing the theft-alarm system
Power window control
N00510801410
Use the following procedure to test the system:
1. Lower the driver's window. 2. Arm the system as explained in "Armed
stage". 3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
comes on and flashes for approximately 20 seconds. 4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the driver's side door by using the inside door lock knob. Open the door. 5. Make sure that the horn sounds intermittently and the headlights blink when a door is opened. 6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors and the liftgate by using the keyless entry system.
1- Open (down) 2- Close (up)
NOTE
Never try to operate the main switch and sub-switch in different directions at the same time. This will freeze the window in position.
Operating the power windows repeatedly with the electric motor unit stopped will run down the 12V starter battery. Use the window switches only while the electric motor unit is operating.
Do not turn the electric motor switch to the "ON" position during quick charging. Doing so will stop quick charging.
WARNING
Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing can be trapped (head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.
Never leave the vehicle without carrying the key.
Never leave children or unreliable adults unattended inside the vehicle.
5-14 Features and controls
Main switch
N00548700127
The main switch located on the driver's door can be used to operate all the windows. A window can be opened or closed by operating the corresponding switch. Press the switch down to open the window, and pull up the switch to close it. If the driver's door window switch is fully pressed down, the driver's door window automatically opens completely. If you want to stop the window movement, operate the switch lightly in the reverse direction.
Sub switch
1- Close 2- Open
Power window control
Lock switch
N00548800115
N00549000156
When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-
senger door switches cannot be used to open
or close the door windows, and the main
switch will open or close only the driver's
door window. To unlock the switch, press it
again.
5
1- Driver's door window switch 2- Front passenger door window switch 3- Left rear door window switch 4- Right rear door window switch 5- Lock switch
Each sub-switch can be used for it's own passenger door window, unless the driver's window lock switch is activated.
Power window timer function
N00548900145
The power windows can be run up or down when the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position. The door windows can be opened or closed for a 30-second period after the electric motor switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. However, once the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened, the power windows cannot be operated.
1- Lock 2- Unlock
WARNING
Before driving with a child in the vehicle, be sure to lock the window switch to make it inoperative. Children tampering with the switch could easily trap their hands or heads in the window.
Features and controls 5-15
Parking brake
Parking brake
To release
Inside rearview mirror
N00511400386
N00511600287
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
making any seat adjustments so as to have a
and set the selector lever to "P" (PARK) posi-
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
tion.
5
To apply
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
view mirror while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
1- Pull the lever up slightly. 2- Press and hold the button at the end of
the hand grip.
ing.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the view through the rear window.
3- Push the lever downward.
To adjust the vertical mirror
When parking on a hill, apply the parking position
brake and turn the front wheels toward the
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the button at the end of hand grip.
curb on a downhill grade, away from the curb It is possible to move the mirror up and down
on an uphill grade.
to adjust its position.
When the parking brake is set and the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position, the brake warning light in the instrument cluster will come on.
Before driving, be sure to release the parking brake.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and brake warning light is off. If a vehicle is driven without releasing the parking brake, the brakes will be overheated, resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
5-16 Features and controls
To reduce the glare
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you during night driving.
To adjust the mirror position
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and left/right to adjust its position.
1- Daytime position 2- Night position
Outside rearview mirrors
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirrors while driving. This can be dangerous. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driving.
Your front passenger's side mirror is con-
5 vex. The objects you see in the mirror will
look smaller and farther away than they appear in a regular flat mirror. Do not use this mirror to estimate the distance of vehicles following you when changing lanes.
Outside rearview mirrors
N00512200222
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after making any seat adjustments so you have a clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
Features and controls 5-17
Electric motor switch
To adjust the mirror position
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted when the electric motor switch is in the "ON"
NOTE
After adjusting, return the lever to the "·" (off) position.
The heater will be turned off automatically in about 20 minutes.
or "ACC" position.
Move the lever (A) to the same side as the To fold the mirror
mirror you wish to adjust.
5
The outside mirror can be folded in toward
the side window to prevent damage when
parking in tight locations.
L- Left outside mirror adjustment R- Right outside mirror adjustment
Electric motor switch
N00571500011
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror position.
1- Up 2- Down 3- Right 4- Left
5-18 Features and controls
Heated mirror
N00549301231
When the rear window defogger switch is pressed, the outside rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Current will flow through the heater element inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or condensation. The indicator light (C) will illuminate while the defogger is on.
LOCK
The steering wheel is locked. The key can be inserted and removed only when the switch is in this position.
ACC
NOTE
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic immobilizer. To start the electric motor unit, the ID code which the transponder inside the key sends must match the one registered to the immobilizer computer. (Refer to "Electronic immobilizer" on page 5-2.)
Electric motor switch
To remove the key
N00571600025
When removing the key, first set the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position, and then turn the key to the "LOCK" position and remove it.
5
The ready indicator is not illuminated, but the audio system and other electric devices can be operated.
ON
The electric motor unit is running, and all the vehicle's electrical devices can be operated.
START
The electric motor unit operates. After the electric motor unit has started, release the key and it will automatically return to the "ON" position.
ACC power auto-cutout function
N00573800021
After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the electric motor switch in the "ACC" position, the function automatically cuts out the power for the audio system and other electric devices that can be operated with that position. When the electric motor switch is turned from the "ACC" position, the power is supplied again to those devices.
NOTE
It is possible to modify functions as follows: · The ACC power auto-cutout function can be deactivated by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
CAUTION
Do not remove the key from the electric motor switch while driving. The steering wheel will lock, causing loss of control.
If the ready indicator is turned off while driving, the power brake booster will stop functioning and braking efficiency will be reduced. Also, the power steering system will not function and it will require greater effort to manually steer the vehicle.
Do not leave the key in the "ON" position for a long time when the electric motor unit is not running. This will cause the 12V starter battery to run down.
Features and controls 5-19
Steering wheel lock
Key reminder buzzer
N00571700013
If the driver's door is opened while the electric motor switch is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position, a tone will sound.
5 Steering wheel lock
N00512500209
To lock
Remove the key at the "LOCK" position. Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
To unlock
Turn the key to the "ACC" position while moving the steering wheel slightly.
CAUTION
Remove the key when leaving the vehicle. If your vehicle needs to be towed, turn the
key to the "ACC" position to unlock the steering wheel.
NOTE
If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn the key from "LOCK" position to "ACC" position. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or to the right as you turn the key.
Starting the electric motor unit
N00571800014
CAUTION
Never attempt to start the electric motor unit by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
6. Turn the key to the "ON" position and make certain that all warning lights are functioning properly before starting the electric motor unit.
7. Turn the key to the "START" position for one to two seconds, and slowly return it to its original position. When you hear the startup sound and the ready indicator comes on, startup of the electric motor unit is complete.
Electric motor reminder
If the driver's door is opened while the key is in the "ON" position, the electric motor reminder buzzer sounds intermittently to remind the key is in the electric motor switch.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly seated with seat belts fastened.
2. Insert the key. 3. Make sure the parking brake is applied. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal down with
your right foot. 5. Make sure the selector lever is in the "P"
(PARK) position.
5-20 Features and controls
Selector lever
N00583600022
Selector lever operation
N00583700023
WARNING
Always depress the brake pedal when shifting the selector lever into another position from the "P" (PARK) or "N" (NEUTRAL) position. Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever from the "P" (PARK) or "N" (NEUTRAL) position.
Selector lever
5
While depressing the brake pedal, move the selector lever through the gate.
Move the selector lever through the gate.
NOTE
To avoid erroneous operation, move the selector lever firmly into each position and briefly hold it there. Always check the position shown by the selector lever position display after moving the selector lever.
If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, the shift-lock device activates to prevent the selector lever from being moved from the "P" (PARK) position.
When the selector lever position indicator flashes while you are driving, there could be a malfunction in the transmission.
Selector lever position indicator
N00583800024
When the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position, the current position of the selector lever is indicated on the instrument cluster.
Features and controls 5-21
Selector lever
CAUTION
If the selector lever position indicator blinks
while you are driving, it is likely that a safety
device is operating because of a malfunction
in the transmission system. We recommend
you to have your vehicle inspected as soon as
possible.
5
The selector lever position indicator warning
function does not operate with the selector
lever in the "R" (REVERSE) position.
Selector lever positions
"R" REVERSE
This position is to back up.
CAUTION
Never move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) or "R" (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion. If the lever is moved to the "P" (PARK) or "R" (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion, the transmission could be damaged.
"D" DRIVE
Use this position for normal driving.
CAUTION
To avoid transmission damage, never shift into the "D" (DRIVE) position from the "R" (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in motion.
"ECO" ECO MODE
"P" PARK
N00583900025
This position locks the transmission to prevent the vehicle from moving. The electric motor unit can be started from the "PARK" position.
WARNING
Do not leave the vehicle with the electric motor switch in the "ON" position. The vehicle can move suddenly. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on level ground, always set the parking brake and move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position.
"N" NEUTRAL
Use this position only when the vehicle is stationary for an extended length of time while driving, such as in a traffic jam.
WARNING
Never move the selector lever to the "N" (NEUTRAL) position while the vehicle is in motion. You will lose regenerative braking. In addition, a serious accident could occur if the selector lever were inadvertently moved into the "P" (PARK) position or "R" (REVERSE) position.
Use this position when you desire to limit power consumption and/or when moderate regenerative braking is required.
"B" REGENERATIVE BRAKE MODE
Use this position when strong regenerative braking is required, such as on a steep downhill. Refer to "Regenerative braking" on page 3-3. Refer to "When driving downhill" on page 6-5.
5-22 Features and controls
Acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS)
WARNING
While driving on a slippery road, do not use the "B" position. Abruptly releasing
CAUTION
Operating the accelerator pedal while the other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, always switch off the electric motor unit and carry the key.
the accelerator pedal can apply strong regenerative braking causing the vehicle
affect braking efficiency and may cause premature wear of brake pads.
NOTE
to skid which could result in an accident.
On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
NOTE
When the main drive lithium-ion battery level is full or nearly full, or the main drive lithium-ion battery temperature is too high or too low, the regenerative braking force may be reduced and stronger effort may be required to operate the brakes.
Waiting
N00584100024
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals the vehicle can be left in selector lever position and held stationary with the service brake. For longer waiting periods with the electric motor unit running, place the selector lever in
brake before moving the selector lever to the
5 "P" (PARK) position. If you move the selec-
tor lever to the "P" (PARK) position before applying the parking brake, it may be difficult to disengage the selector lever from the "P" (PARK) position when next you drive the vehicle, requiring application of a strong force to the selector lever to move from the "P" (PARK) position.
the "N" (NEUTRAL) position and apply the
Operation of the transmission
parking brake, while holding the vehicle sta-
tionary with the service brake.
Acoustic vehicle alerting
N00584000023
CAUTION
Before selecting a position with the electric motor unit running and the vehicle stationary, fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping. The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the transmission is engaged, the brakes should
CAUTION
Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill with the accelerator. Always apply the parking brake and/or service brake.
Parking
system (AVAS)
N00571900028
While driving at low speeds, such as in parking lots, the acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS) alerts people who may not hear your vehicle approaching. The system sounds when the vehicle speed is approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or less.
only be released when you are ready to drive away. Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at all times. Using the left foot could cause driver movement delay in case of an emergency.
N00584200025
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position.
The acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS) will operate under the following conditions:
When the vehicle speed is approximately 2 mph (3 km/h) or less and the brake pedal is not depressed.
Features and controls 5-23
Service brake
When the vehicle speed is approximately 2-22 mph (3-35 km/h).
WARNING
Do not leave any objects near the brake
The system will not operate under the following conditions:
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the full pedal stroke that would be necessary in an
When the vehicle speed is approximately
5
2 mph (3 km/h) or less and the brake pedal is depressed.
When the vehicle speed is approximately
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can be operated freely at all times. Make sure the floor mat is securely held in place.
22 mph (35 km/h) or more. When the selector lever is in the "P"
(PARK) position.
WARNING
Always pay special attention to pedestrians. Even if the acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS) sounds, pedestrians may not notice your vehicle.
Under normal conditions, the indicator light
NOTE
If the indicator light blinks, turn the electric motor switch back to the "LOCK" position and again turn the switch to the "ON" position. It is not a malfunction if the indicator light goes off. If the indicator light blinks again, however, have the vehicle inspected at a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
It is important not to drive the vehicle with your foot resting on the brake pedal when braking is not required. This practice can result in very high brake temperatures, premature pad wear, and possible damage to the brakes.
Power brakes
N00517600423
in the instrument cluster illuminates when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position and goes off a few seconds later. Always confirm the indicator light goes off before driving.
Service brake Brake pedal
N00517500305
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes for more braking force with reduced brake pedal effort. Your brakes are designed to operate at full capacity, even if the power assist is lost. If the power assist is lost, the effort needed to
press the brake pedal is greater.
Overuse of the brake can cause poor brake If you should lose the power assist for some
response and premature wear of the brake reason, the brakes will still work.
pads.
If the power brake unit or either of the two
brake hydraulic systems stop working prop-
5-24 Features and controls
Brake assist system
erly, the rest of the brake system will still work, but the vehicle will not slow down as quickly. You will know this has happened if you find you need to depress the brake pedal down further, or harder when slowing down or stopping, or if the brake warning light comes on.
WARNING
Driving with worn brake pads will make it harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
Brake assist system
NOTE
The brake assist system may become operational when the brake pedal is fully depressed even if it has not been depressed suddenly.
When the brake assist system is in use while driving, you may feel as if the depressed
WARNING
N00567300063
The brake assist system is a device assisting
5 brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
motions in conjunction with the operation
Never turn off the electric motor switch while driving. Doing so will result in a loss of power assist for the brakes and steering, increasing the effort required to steer and brake the vehicle.
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal firmly such as in emergency stop situations and provides greater braking force.
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the brakes will be applied with more force than
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake assist system is operating normally and does not indicate faulty operation. Continue to depress the brake pedal. You may hear an operation noise when the
NOTE
At times, you may hear the brake electric
usual.
CAUTION
brake pedal is depressed suddenly while stationary. This does not indicate a malfunction and the brake assist system is operating normally.
vacuum pump for the power brakes operat-
The brake assist system is not a device
ing when the ready indicator illuminates or the brake pedal is depressed.
designed to exercise braking force greater than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
Anti-lock braking system
This sound is normal and does not indicate a
sufficient distance between vehicles in front
N00517900325
problem.
of you without relying too much on the brake The anti-lock braking system helps prevent
assist system.
the wheels from locking up when braking.
Brake pad wear alarm
N00532500162
NOTE
This helps you keep control of your vehicle and its direction.
The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a
Once the brake assist system is operational,
metallic squeal when the brake pads have worn down enough to need service. If you hear this sound, have the brake pads replaced at a certified i-MiEV dealer.
it maintains great braking force even if the brake pedal is lightly released. To stop its operation, completely remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Features and controls 5-25
Anti-lock braking system
Driving hints
When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden
braking), steering is slightly different
from normal driving conditions. Use the
steering wheel carefully.
Always keep a safe distance from the
5
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
system, leave a greater braking distance
when:
· Driving on gravel or snow-covered
roads.
· Driving on uneven road surfaces. Operation of anti-lock braking system is
not restricted to situations where brakes
are applied suddenly. This system may
also prevent the wheels from locking
when you drive over manholes, steel
roadwork plates, road markings, or any
uneven road surface. When the anti-lock braking system is in
use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-
ing and hear a unique sound. You may
also feel as if the pedal resists being
pressed.
In this situation, simply hold the brake
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
brake, which will result in reduced
braking performance.
An operation noise may be emitted from under the hood in the following situations. The sound is associated with checking the operations of the anti-lock braking system. At this time, you may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you depress it. These do not indicate a malfunction. · When the electric motor switch is set to the "ON" position. · When the vehicle is driven for a while after the electric motor is turned on.
The ABS can be used after the vehicle has reached a speed over approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops working when the vehicle slows below approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
Anti-lock braking system warning light
N00531600661
This light comes on in the event of a malfunction in the anti-lock braking system. It will also come on as a self-check for a few seconds when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position. Always make sure that the light goes out before beginning to drive.
CAUTION
The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent accidents. It is your responsibility to take safety precautions and to drive carefully.
Be sure to use the specified type and size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the ABS may not work properly.
Do not install any aftermarket limited slip differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ABS may stop functioning properly.
CAUTION
If the anti-lock braking system warning light comes on and stays on after starting the electric motor unit or while driving, it means that the anti-lock braking system is not working and that only the standard brake system is available. (The standard brake system will still work properly.) If this happens, take your vehicle to a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
5-26 Features and controls
If the warning light illuminates while driving
N00531700590
If only the ABS warning light illuminate
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, put the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position and turn off the electric motor unit. Restart the electric motor unit and check to see whether the light goes out after a few minutes driving; if it then remains off during driving, there is no problem. However, if the warning light does not disappear, or if it comes on again when the vehicle is driven, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked.
If the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminate at the same time
The ABS and brake force distribution function may not work, so hard braking could make the vehicle unstable. Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and we recommend you to have the vehicle checked.
NOTE
The warning light may be illuminated when the electric motor unit is started while the 12V starter battery voltage is low, but this is not an ABS malfunction. When the main drive lithium-ion battery is charged, the 12V starter battery is charged at the same time, and the warning light will go out. If the warning light does not go out or illuminates from time to time even after the battery is charged, take your vehicle to a certified iMiEV dealer and have the system checked as soon as possible.
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove any snow and ice which may have been left around the wheels. On vehicles that have an anti-lock braking system, be careful not to damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the cables located at each wheel.
Front
Electric power steering system (EPS)
Rear
5
Electric power steering system (EPS)
N00568400058
The power steering system operates while the electric motor unit is running. It helps reduce the effort needed to turn the steering wheel. The power steering system has mechanical steering capability in case the power assist is lost. If the power assist is lost for some reason, you will still be able to steer your vehicle, but you will notice it takes much more effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected at a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Features and controls 5-27
Active stability control (ASC)
WARNING
Do not turn the key from the ON position while the vehicle is moving. Stopping the electric motor unit would make the steering wheel extremely hard to turn, possibly resulting in an accident.
5
NOTE
During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering wheel (for example, while you are
maneuvering the vehicle into a parking
space), a protection function may be acti-
vated to prevent overheating of the power
steering system. This function will make the
steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
this event, limit your turning of the steering
wheel for a while. When the system has
cooled down, the steering effort will return
to normal.
If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the
headlights may become dim. This behavior
is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
their original brightness after a short while.
5-28 Features and controls
Electric power steering system warning light
N00574400024
If there is a malfunction in the system, the warning light will come on. Under normal conditions, the warning light comes on when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position and goes off a few seconds later.
CAUTION
If the warning light appears while the electric motor unit is running, have the vehicle inspected at a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible. It may become harder to turn the steering wheel.
Active stability control (ASC)
N00559100163
The active stability control (ASC) takes overall control of the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function to help maintain the vehicle's control. Also refer to the following pages on the anti-lock braking system, traction control function and skid control function.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) P.5-25 Traction control function P.5-29 Skid control function P.5-29
CAUTION
Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. This system, like any other system, has limits and cannot help you to maintain traction and control of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driving can lead to accidents. It is the driver's responsibility to drive carefully. This means taking into account the traffic, road and environmental conditions.
Be sure to use the specified type and size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the ASC may not work properly.
Do not install any aftermarket limited slip differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC may stop functioning properly.
Active stability control (ASC)
NOTE
An operation noise may be emitted from
CAUTION
When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
ASC, momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; the indicator is turned off.
under the hood in the following situations.
road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
The sound is associated with checking the
the vehicle at moderate speeds.
operations of the ASC. At this time, you may
feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc- Skid control function
tion. · When the electric motor switch is set to the
N00546800049
5
"ON" position.
The skid control function is designed to help
· When the vehicle is driven for a while after the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
the electric motor unit is turned on.
slippery roads or during rapid steering
When the ASC is activated, you may feel a maneuvers. It works by controlling the elec-
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin- tric motor unit output and the brake on each
ing sound from under the hood. This indicates that the system is operating normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. When the anti-lock braking system warning light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
wheel.
NOTE
The skid control function operates at speeds of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch should be operated when your vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
Traction control function ASC OFF switch
N00559200089
normal circumstances. If you deactivate the ASC to move out of
mud, sand or fresh snow, be sure to reacti-
On slippery surfaces, the traction control function prevents the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the vehicle to start moving from a stopped condition. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle turns while pressing the acceleration pedal.
N00559401280
The ASC is automatically activated when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position. You can deactivate the system by pressing down the ASC OFF switch for 3 seconds or longer.
When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-
vate the ASC immediately when done. Do not deactivate the ASC except when necessary. If you depress the accelerator pedal excessively and the wheels continue spinning while the ASC is deactivated, the transmission or other parts may become damaged and could cause an accident.
tor will be illuminated. To reactivate the
Features and controls 5-29
Tire pressure monitoring system
NOTE
Using the ASC OFF switch turns off both the skid control function and the traction control function.
When trying to move out of mud, sand or
indicator blinks when the ASC is operating.
indicator is illuminated when the ASC is deactivated.
Tire pressure monitoring system
N00530201537
The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire
fresh snow, even if the accelerator pedal is depressed, the ASC may not allow the elec-
CAUTION
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The
5
tric motor speed to increase enough to move
When indicator blinks, the ASC is oper- system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
the vehicle out.
ating, which means that the road is slippery cantly under-inflated.
In such situations, deactivating the ASC may
or that your vehicle's wheels are beginning
make it easier to move your vehicle out.
to slip. If this happens, drive slower.
Refer to "If your vehicle becomes stuck in
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
sand, mud or snow" on page 8-13.
If you continue to press the ASC OFF switch
tem while driving, the and indicators
after the ASC has been turned off, the ASC
will illuminate.
will automatically be reactivated to prevent
In these cases, follow these procedures:
misoperation of the ASC OFF switch.
· Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop
the electric motor unit. Restart the electric
ASC indicator, ASC OFF indicator
motor unit again and check whether the
and indicators go out. If these indicators go out, there is no abnormal condition.
N00546901063
The indicators should illuminate when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position, and should turn off after a few seconds. If the indicator stays on or does not illuminate when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position, have the vehicle inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer as soon as possible.
If the and indicators remain on even
after your vehicle is driven a short distance after re-starting the electric motor unit, have the vehicle inspected by a certified iMiEV dealer as soon as possible. When towing the vehicle with only the rear wheels raised off the ground, do not place the electric motor switch in the "ON" position. Placing the electric motor switch in the "ON" position could cause the ASC to operate, resulting in an accident. For details, refer to "Towing" on page 8-11.
NOTE
The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for regularly checking tire inflation pressures. Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures as described in "Tires" on page 9-10.
5-30 Features and controls
NOTE
The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is installed in the illustrated location. Replace grommet (B) with a new one when the tire is replaced. For details, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Tire pressure monitoring system warning light
N00554800136
When the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position, this light normally illuminates and goes off a few seconds later. If one or more of the vehicle tires is significantly under-inflated, however, this light will remain illuminated while the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position. Refer to "If the warning light illuminates while driving" on page 5-32 and take the necessary measures.
CAUTION
If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light does not illuminate when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position, it means that the tire pressure monitoring system is not working properly. Have the system inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer. In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving.
If a malfunction is detected in the tire pressure monitoring system, the tire pressure monitoring system warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. The warning light will issue further warnings each time the electric motor unit is restarted as long as the malfunction exists. Check to see whether the warning light goes off after few minutes of driving. If it then goes off during driving, there is no problem. However, if the warning light does not go off, or if it blinks again when the electric motor unit is restarted, have the vehicle inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer. In such situations, a malfunctioning of the system may be preventing the monitoring of the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when the warning light appears while driving, avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and high-speed driving.
Tire pressure monitoring system
5
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Features and controls 5-31
Tire pressure monitoring system
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
failure.
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
Under-inflation also reduces alternative fuel erly.
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
If the warning light illuminates
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
5
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
while driving
N00532800484
pressure, even if under-inflation has not 1. If the low tire pressure monitoring system
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
warning light illuminates, avoid hard
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
high speeds. You should stop and adjust
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
soon as possible. Refer to "Tires" on page
the system is not operating properly. The
9-10.
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
NOTE
When the system detects a malfunction, the
When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
telltale will flash for approximately one min-
sure, to avoid breakage, do not apply exces-
ute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
sive force to the valve stem. After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the valve stem. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve, resulting in damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor. Do not use metal valve caps, which may cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion and damage of the tire inflation pressure sensors.
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
Once adjustments have been made, the warn-
ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of
function telltale after replacing one or more
driving.
5-32 Features and controls
2. If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light remains illuminated after you have been driving for about 20 minutes after you adjust the tire inflation pressure, one or more of the tires may have a puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a puncture, have it repaired by a certified iMiEV dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates while you are driving, avoid hard braking, sharp steering maneuvers and high speeds. Driving with an under-inflated tire adversely affects vehicle performance and can result in an accident.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system warning light may not illuminate immediately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid leak.
NOTE
To avoid the risk of damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors, have any punctured tire repaired by a certified i-MiEV dealer. If the tire repair is not done by a certified iMiEV dealer, it is not covered by your warranty.
Tire pressure monitoring system
NOTE
NOTE
General information
Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
N00533000207
on any tire. Such a spray could damage the tire inflation pressure sensors. Using the tire repair kit may damage the tire inflation pressure sensor. The vehicle must promptly be inspected and repaired by a certified i-MiEV dealer after using the tire repair kit.
ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to large variations in ambient temperature, the tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated (causing the warning light to come on) when the ambient temperature is relatively low. If the warning light comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure.
Your tire pressure monitoring system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry
5 Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS- Gen of the Industry Canada
The tire pressure monitoring system may not
Rules.
work normally in the following circum- Whenever the tires and wheels
stances:
are replaced with new ones
Operation is subject to the following two conditions.
A wireless facility or device using the
N00532900182 This device may not cause harmful inter-
same frequency is near the vehicle.
If you use new wheels with new tire inflation
Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders pressure sensors, their ID codes must be pro-
ference. This device must accept any interference
and/or on the wheels.
grammed into the tire pressure monitoring
The tire inflation pressure sensors' battery system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
is exhausted. Wheels other than Mitsubishi Motors gen-
uine wheels are being used. Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-
tion pressure sensors are being used. Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
rized by the vehicle are used. A window tint that affects the radio wave
signals is installed.
formed by a certified i-MiEV dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire inflation pressure sensors.
CAUTION
The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of the sensors.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Features and controls 5-33
Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
Rear-view camera (if so
equipped)
N00546201200
Location of rear-view camera
The rear-view camera is in the liftgate.
When the selector lever is in the "R" (REVERSE) position with the electric motor
5 switch is in the "ON" position, the rear-view image will be displayed on the screen of the Mitsubishi Multi Communication System. When the selector lever is shifted out of the "R" position, the rear-view image will turn off.
Reference lines on the screen
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
Red line (B) indicates approximately 20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.
Two Green lines (C) indicate approximately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the vehicle body.
Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate distance from the rear bumper.
WARNING
Never rely solely on the rear-view camera to clear the area behind your vehicle. Always check visually behind and all around your vehicle for persons, animals, obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to do so can result in vehicle damage, serious injury or death.
The rear-view camera is an aid system for backing up, but it is not a substitute for your visual confirmation.
The view on the screen is limited, and objects outside the view, such as under the bumper or around either corner of the bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.
CAUTION
If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the lens with clean water and gently wipe with a clean, soft cloth.
To avoid damaging the camera; · Do not rub the cover excessively or polish it by using an abrasive compound. · Do not disassemble the camera. · Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. · Do not spray the camera and its surroundings with high-pressure water. · Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up.
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the rear bumper
2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) 3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)
5-34 Features and controls
CAUTION
The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle lens. As a result, images and distances shown on the screen are not exact.
Actual distance may be different from distance indicated by the lines on the screen, depending on the loading condition of the vehicle and road surface condition. The reference lines for distance and vehicle width are based on a level, flat road surface. In the following cases, objects shown on the screen will appear to be farther off than they actually are. · When the rear of the vehicle is weighed down with the weight of passengers and luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) · When there is an upward slope at the back. (Case2)
Case 1
A: Actual objects B: Objects shown on the screen
Case 2
A: Actual objects B: Objects shown on the screen
CAUTION
The reference lines for distance and vehicle width are intended to indicate the distance to a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. They may not indicate correct distance depending on the shape of an obstacle. For example, when there is an object behind the vehicle that has upper sections projecting in the direction of the vehicle, the reference lines on the screen will indicate that point A is the farthest point and point B is the closest point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B are actually the same distance from the vehicle, and point C is farther off than point A and B.
Rear-view camera (if so equipped)
5
NOTE
Mirror image is displayed on the screen. Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically
by sensors. It is possible to change the display language
of the screen. For details, please refer to the separate owner's manual for "Mitsubishi Multi-Communication System". Under certain circumstances, it may become difficult to see an image on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly. · In a dark area, such as at night. · When water drops or condensation are on
the lens. · When sunlight or headlights shine directly
into the lens.
Features and controls 5-35
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
N00519000375
Type 1
Type 2
5
1- Energy level gauge
2- Energy usage indicator
3- Odometer/Trip odometer/Dash lights
brightness
indicator/Service
reminder/Cruising range indicator/Out-
side temperature display
4- Speedometer
5- Reset button/Dash lights illumination
button/Selector button
Speedometer
N00519100246
When the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position, the speedometer indicates the vehicle's speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
NOTE
The display setting can be changed to the preferred units (miles or km). Refer to "Changing the display unit" on page 5-36.
Changing the display unit
N00572000013
It is possible to select the speedometer's display unit.
1. Press the reset button (A) to display the odometer (B). (Refer to "To change the display" on page 5-37.)
2. Keep the reset button pressed for 2 seconds or longer to change the display unit from MPH to km/h or from km/h to MPH.
NOTE
Once the display unit has changed, keeping the reset button pressed will not cause the display unit to change again.
The display unit for the cruising range will change to match the selected speedometer's display unit.
Speedometer MPH km/h
Cruising range miles km
NOTE
Even if speedometer's display unit is changed, the display units for the odometer, trip odometer, and service reminder do not change.
5-36 Features and controls
Energy usage indicator
N00572101037
The power consumption of the electric motor, the air conditioning, and power generation by the regenerative brake are indicated. When the ready indicator comes on, the red needle will move to the neutral point (A) and then move to the right or left according to the amount of power consumption or power generation.
NOTE
When the main drive lithium-ion battery is at or near full charge, or the main drive lithiumion battery temperature is too high or too low, the needle in the energy usage indicator may not move to the left of the neutral point, since the main drive lithium-ion battery cannot receive charge.
Instrument cluster range indicator, and outside temperature are displayed.
To change the display
N00572201025
The display is changed every time the reset button (A) is briefly pressed.
5
[When the red needle moves to the right of the neutral point] This indicates that the electric motor unit and/or the air conditioning are consuming electric energy from the main drive lithiumion battery. The more the needle moves to the right, the more electrical energy is being consumed.
[When the red needle moves to the left of the neutral point] This indicates that electric energy is being generated by the regenerative brake and charged to the main drive lithium-ion battery. The more the needle moves to the left, the more electric energy is being generated.
Odometer/Trip odometer/Dash lights brightness indicator/Service reminder/Cruising range indicator/Outside temperature display
N00519501449
Odometer, trip odometer, dash lights brightness indicator, service reminder, cruising
1- Odometer 2- Trip odometer 3- Trip odometer 4- Dash lights brightness indicator 5- Service reminder (Drive distance
remaining until next inspection) 6- Service reminder (Number of months
remaining until next inspection) 7- Cruising range indicator
Features and controls 5-37
Instrument cluster
8- Outside temperature display
Trip odometer can be used to measure the Service reminder
NOTE
The cruising range indicator and outside
distance traveled since the current trip began. At the same time, Trip odometer can be used to measure the distance from a second
N00572500021
The service reminder shows the driving distance or number of months remaining until
temperature display are not indicated when location.
the next recommended periodic maintenance
the electric motor switch is in the "ACC" or
"LOCK" position.
5
If there is no operation for about 10 seconds when the meter illumination control or ser-
NOTE
Even if the electric motor switch is turned to
inspection is required. When the next inspection is nearly due, the display shows "------".
vice reminder is shown, the display returns
"ACC" or "LOCK" position, the trip odome-
to the odometer.
ter will be displayed for about 30 seconds after the reset button is pressed.
NOTE
The service reminder time can be modified
Odometer
To reset the trip odometer
by a certified i-MiEV dealer, to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to "Severe mainte-
N00572300016
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has traveled.
To zero the counter, press and hold the reset button for more than 1 second. Only the currently displayed value will be reset.
nance schedule" in your vehicle's Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For further information, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
NOTE
Even if the electric motor switch is turned to "ACC" or "LOCK", the odometer will be displayed for about 30 seconds after the reset button is pressed.
If trip odometer is displayed, for example, only trip odometer will be reset.
NOTE
Both trip odometer
and trip odometer
Even if the electric motor switch is turned to "ACC" or "LOCK" position, the service reminder will be displayed for about 30 seconds after reset button is pressed.
can measure trips up to 9999.9
Driving distance
miles/kilometers.
Trip odometer
If the 12V starter battery is disconnected for
N00572400020
a long time, both of these displays will be
The trip odometer shows the distance traveled since the last time it was reset.
reset to "0".
Number of months
There are two trip odometer displays: and
.
5-38 Features and controls
1. The display shows the driving distance or number of months remaining until the next periodic inspection.
2. This informs you that a periodic inspection is due. Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer to have the system checked.
At this time, a spanner mark is shown for a few seconds whenever the electric motor switch is turned from the "LOCK" position or the "ACC" position to the "ON" position.
NOTE
It is possible to change the settings for the service reminder. For further information, we recommend you to consult a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Resetting the service reminder
With the electric motor switch in the "LOCK" position or the "ACC" position, it is possible to reset the spanner mark (A) and "-----" indication (B). When they have been reset, the driving distance or number of months remaining until the next periodic inspection are shown and the spanner mark (A) is no longer shown every time the electric motor switch is turned from the "LOCK" position or the "ACC" position to the "ON" position.
3. After your vehicle is inspected at a certified i-MiEV dealer, it displays the time and miles (km) until the next periodic inspection.
NOTE
The indicated distance decreases in steps of 100miles (100 km). The indicated number of months decreases in steps of one month.
Instrument cluster
5
1. Push the reset button (D) to view the driving distance or number of months remaining until the next periodic inspection.
2. Give the reset button (D) a long push (at least 2 seconds) to make the spanner mark (A) start flashing. (If you do not touch the reset button for about 10 seconds while the spanner mark is flashing, the display will revert to its original indication.)
3. Give the reset button (D) a gentle push while the spanner mark is flashing. The "-----" indication (B) will change to "cLEAr" (C).
4. The driving distance or number of months remaining until the next periodic inspection will be shown.
Features and controls 5-39
Instrument cluster
CAUTION
The customer is responsible for making sure that regular inspections and maintenance are performed. Inspections and maintenance must be performed to prevent accidents and malfunctions.
5
NOTE
It is not possible to reset the "------" indication (B) with the electric motor switch in the "ON" position.
When a certain distance has been driven and a certain period has elapsed after appearance of the "------" indication (B), the indication is automatically reset and the number of months until the next periodic inspection is shown.
If you accidentally reset the display, consult a certified i-MiEV dealer for assistance.
Dash lights brightness indicator
N00572600019
Each time you press the dash lights illumination button (B), the brightness of the instruments changes.
Bright
Dim
NOTE
The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the electric motor switch is
turned off.
If the 12V starter battery is disconnected for
a long time, these level of brightness will be
reset.
A- Brightness display B- Dash lights illumination button
NOTE
You can adjust to 4 different levels for when the parking lights or headlights are illuminated and 4 for when they are not.
If you press and hold the button for longer than about 1 second, the brightness automatically scrolls through its different levels, and stops scrolling when you release the button. Select your desired level of brightness.
When the combination headlights and dimmer switch is in the "AUTO" position, the meter illumination switches automatically to the adjusted brightness, depending on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Cruising range indicator
N00572700036
This displays the approximate cruising range (how many more miles or kilometres you can drive). When the cruising range becomes short, the indication changes to "---".
NOTE
The cruising range is displayed based on the past drive data. It may vary depending on the driving condition (road condition, driving situation, etc.) and air conditioning operation status. For example, the cruising range can be shortened by driving on congested roads, by driving uphill, by repeated hard acceleration, and by use of the air conditioner and heater. When the 12V starter battery terminal is disconnected, the power consumption data of the main drive lithium-ion battery in the past is deleted. A different value from before may be displayed. Be sure to use the display only for reference.
5-40 Features and controls
Instrument cluster
NOTE
NOTE
Change of the outside temperature
When the main drive lithium-ion battery is
The outside temperature displayed may dif- unit
charged, the approximate cruising range is
fer from the actual temperature on account of
N00573100011
updated.
Outside temperature display
surrounding conditions, driving conditions, etc.
If the outside temperature drops below
When the electric motor switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position, pressing the selector button (A) for more than 2 seconds will
5 N00573000010 approximately 37 °F (3 °C), the alarm sounds switch the outside temperature unit between
This value (A) shows the outside temperature and the outside air temperature warning indi- °F and °C.
of the vehicle.
cator (B) flash for approximately 10 seconds
to show there is a danger the road might be
icy.
NOTE
The outside temperature can be displayed from -40 °F (-40 °C) to 122 °F (50 °C).
When the outside temperature is over 122 °F (50 °C) or below -40 °F (-40 °C), the display will remain 122 °F (50 °C) or -40 °F (-40 °C).
CAUTION
Even when the outside air temperature warning indicator (B) indications do not flash, the road may be icy, so please take care when driving.
NOTE
Disconnecting the battery cable causes the outside temperature unit memory to be erased. If it has been disconnected, readjust the unit with the above procedure.
Energy level gauge
N00572800024
The energy level gauge indicates the remaining power in the main drive lithium-ion bat-
Features and controls 5-41
Instrument cluster
tery during charging or when the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position.
Low energy warning indicator
N00572900025
5
F- Battery is fully charged. E- Charge the battery.
NOTE
The charging indicator is also illuminated during charging. Refer to "Charging indicator" on page 5-44.
When the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position and the remaining bar of the energy level gauge shows 2 bars or less, the warning indicator (A) and the charging bars (B) flash as follows:
When the energy level gauge shows 2 bars: The warning indicator flashes. When the energy level gauge shows 1 bar: The warning indicator and the charging bars flash alternately.
Recharge the main drive lithium-ion battery as soon as possible.
NOTE
If the energy level gauge shows 0 bars during use of the air conditioning, the cooling or heating may stop operation and the mode is changed to fan only.
If the energy level gauge shows 0 bars, the power down warning light is illuminated to control the output.
If the energy level gauge shows 2 bars while the main drive lithium-ion battery is being charged, the warning indicator flashes. If the energy level gauge shows 1 bar while the main drive lithium-ion battery is being charged, the warning indicator and the charging bars flash alternately.
5-42 Features and controls
Indicator and warning light package
Indicator and warning light package
N00519801888
5
1- Low energy warning indicator P.5-42
2- Selector lever position indicator P.5-21
3- Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS) indicator P.5-23
4- High-beam indicator P.5-44 5- Turn-signal indicators/Hazard warning
lights P.5-44 6- Position indicator P.5-44 7- Front fog light indicator P.5-44 8- Service reminder P.5-38 9- Outside air temperature warning indi-
cator P.5-41
10- Regenerative brake system indicator P.5-44
11- Ready indicator P.5-44 12- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-
ing light P.5-31 13- 12V starter battery charging system
warning light P.5-45 14- Electric power steering system warning
light P.5-28 15- Electric motor unit warning light
P.5-45 16- Brake warning light P.5-44 17- Anti-lock braking system warning light
P.5-26
18- Power down warning light P.5-45 19- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
P.5-30 20- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
indicator P.5-30 21- Charging indicator P.5-44 22- Theft-alarm indicator P.5-12 23- Door-ajar warning light P.5-45 24- Driver's seat belt reminder/warning
light P.4-10 25- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
warning light P.4-13
Features and controls 5-43
Indicators
Indicators
Position indicator
Warning lights
N00519900127
N00551300039
N00520300147
Turn signal indicators/Hazard
This indicator turns on while the position
lights are on.
Brake warning light
warning lights
N00520400513
N00520000232 Ready indicator
This light comes on when the electric motor
5 The arrows will flash in time with the corre-
N00573200012 switch is turned to the "ON" position, and
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn This indicator comes on when the electric goes off after a few seconds when the parking
signal lever is used.
motor switch is turned to "START" and driv- brake is released. Before driving your vehi-
ing becomes possible.
cle, release the parking brake and make cer-
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-
tain that the brake warning light has gone off.
ing flasher switch is pressed.
Charging indicator
If the light stays on when the parking brake is fully released, the service brake system is not
NOTE
If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if the indicator stays on without flashing, check for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or turn signal connection.
N00573301023
This indicator flashes when the EV charging cable (regular charger or quick charger) is connected. After that, the light switches to being illuminated when charging starts and goes out when charging is completed.
working properly or the brake fluid level is low.
WARNING
If any of the following conditions occur, the brake effort may significantly increase. Stop the vehicle in a safe loca-
High beam indicator
N00520100086
A blue light comes on when the headlights are on high beam.
Regenerative brake system indicator
N00573400014
tion, avoiding where possible any sudden brake application, and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer. · The brake warning light does not come
on when the electric motor switch is
Front fog light indicator
N00520201244
This indicator comes on while the front fog lights are on.
The indicator comes on when the regenerative brake performance may be weakened. In this case, drive the vehicle at a lower speed.
turned to the "ON" position. · The brake warning light does not illumi-
nate while the parking brake is applied and the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position. · The brake warning light stays on when
the parking brake is not applied.
5-44 Features and controls
Warning lights
NOTE
Door-ajar warning light and
Electric motor unit warning
When the brake warning light illuminates, the warning buzzer may also sound.
When the brake pedal has been repeatedly depressed over a short period of time, the brake warning light may come on and the brake warning buzzer may sound. The service brake system is working normally, if the warning light goes out and the buzzer stops sounding in a few seconds.
12V starter battery charging
buzzer
light
N00520900316
N00573600029
This light comes on when any door or liftgate This warning light will illuminate when there
is open or not completely closed.
is a problem with a high voltage component.
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5 Refer to "Service precautions" on page 9-2.
mph (8 km/h) and any door or liftgate is open or ajar, a tone will sound 16 times and the warning light will flash 16 times to inform the driver that a door or liftgate is not properly shut.
5
CAUTION
If this light illuminates while driving, immediately park your vehicle in a safe place and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
system warning light
N00573500028
CAUTION Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar Power down warning light
This light will illuminate when there is a
warning light is off.
N00573700020
problem with the charging system for the 12V starter battery. Normally, when the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position, this light will illuminate. Then, when the electric motor unit is started and the ready indicator illuminates, the light will go out.
CAUTION
If the warning light stays on after the ready indicator illuminates, there may be a prob-
NOTE
The flashing of the warning light and the buzzer can be disabled. For further details, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
When the driver's door is open, the door-ajar warning buzzer does not sound because the electric motor reminder sounds instead.
If this warning light illuminates, the power provided by the electric motor will be reduced and the vehicle will be only able to move at low speeds. This warning light will illuminate;
When the energy level in the main drive lithium-ion battery is near empty.
lem with the charging system for the 12V
starter battery.
· Immediately park your vehicle in a safe
place and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
· Do not charge the 12V starter battery.
Features and controls 5-45
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
When temperature of the electric motor unit or the main drive lithium-ion battery is too high or too low.
When voltage of the main drive lithium-ion battery
NOTE
Illumination of the power down warning light does not indicate a malfunction.
If the power down warning light illuminates while the air conditioning is used, the cooling or heating may stop operating and only the fan will operate.
5
becomes low.
If the energy level gauge shows 0 bar, the main drive
Combination headlights and
lithium-ion battery is near dimmer switch
empty and must be charged as
N00522501805 The combinations of switch operations and
soon as possible. Refer to
illuminated lights differ in accordance with
"Charging" on page 3-13.
Headlights
If the warning light illuminates when the out-
the following conditions.
side air temperature is very low, move the
[When the ready indicator is illuminated, and
vehicle to a warmer location. If the warning light illuminates after the vehicle has been driven continuously uphill or when the outside air temperature is very high, stop the vehicle in a safe place so the electric motor unit and/or the main drive lithium-ion battery can cool down. When they have
NOTE
Do not leave the headlights and other lights on for a long period of time while the ready indicator is not illuminated. A run down 12V starter battery could result.
When it rains, or when the vehicle has been washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
the parking brake is released]
The daytime running lights will be illuminated:
OFF
The daytime running lights illuminated
cooled down, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not turn off, contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
NOTE
becomes foggy. This is the same as when window glass mists up on a humid day, and does not indicate a problem. When the light is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. However, if water collects inside the light, have it checked by a certified
The daytime running lights illuminated AUTO Headlights and other lights turn on and off automatically in accordance with outside light level.
When the power down warning light illumi-
i-MiEV dealer.
nates, avoid rapid starts and aggressive
acceleration.
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
5-46 Features and controls
The daytime running lights illuminated Parking, tail, front and rear sidemarker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on
NOTE
Once the daytime running light come on, they do not go out until the electric motor switch is turned to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position.
[When the ready indicator is not illuminated, or when the ready indicator is illuminated but the parking brake is not released]
The electric motor unit starts when the lights are off.
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
NOTE
The sensitivity of the automatic on/off control can be adjusted. For further information, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Do not place anything on the sensor (A), and do not clean with a glass cleaner. Clean only with clear water.
· If the driver's door is opened after the key is removed from the electric motor switch, a buzzer will sound to remind you to turn off the lights.
· If the driver's door is opened with the key in the electric motor switch, a buzzer will sound intermittently to remind you
5 to remove the key.
If the key is turned to "LOCK" or "ACC" position with the driver's door closed and the combination headlights and dimmer
switch in the " " or " " position, the lights will stay on for about 3 minutes and then turn off automatically.
If the lights do not turn on or off with the switch in the "AUTO" position, manually operate the switch. Have the system checked by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
NOTE
The light auto-cutout function can be deactivated. See a certified i-MiEV dealer for details.
OFF All lights off
Headlights and other lights turn on AUTO and off automatically in accor-
dance with outside light level.
Parking, tail, front and rear sidemarker lights, license plate and instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on
Light auto-cutout function (headlights and other lights)
N00532600554
If the key is turned to "LOCK" or "ACC" position or removed from the electric motor switch and the driver's door is opened with the combination headlights
and dimmer switch in the " " or " " position, the lights automatically turn off.
When you want to keep the lights on:
If the combination headlights and dimmer switch is turned to the " " or " " position again after the electric motor switch is turned to "LOCK" or "ACC" position, the auto-cutout function described above will not work. The lights (the parking lights, tail lights
Features and controls 5-47
Turn signal lever
and license plate lights) will stay on and will headlights to low beam as a courtesy when-
not turn off automatically.
ever there are oncoming vehicles, or when
there is traffic moving ahead of you. An illu-
NOTE
If the driver's door is opened and the key is removed, the headlight reminder buzzer will
minated blue light in the instrument cluster indicates when the headlights are on high beam.
sound. If the key is still in the electric motor
5
switch the key reminder buzzer will sound
intermittently.
The buzzer stops when the driver's door is
closed.
NOTE
If you turn the lights off with the headlights set to high-beam illumination, the headlights are automatically returned to their low-beam setting when the combination headlights and
dimmer switch is next turned to the " " position.
Turn signal lever
N00522600506
Headlight reminder buzzer
N00549800213
If the driver's door is opened with the key removed from the electric motor switch while the lights are on, the buzzer will sound to remind you to turn off the lights. The lights and buzzer will turn off automatically. Or you can turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the "OFF" position to stop the buzzer.
Dimmer (high/low beam
Headlight flasher
N00550000198
You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever gently toward you (2). The lights will go back to normal when you let go. While the high beam is on, you will see a blue light on the instrument panel.
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual turn, hold the lever in the "lane change" position (1). It will return to the neutral position when you let go. Use the full position (2) when making a normal turn. The lever will return to the neutral position when the turn is complete. There may be times when the lever does not return to the neutral position. This usually happens when the steering wheel is turned only slightly. You can easily return the lever by hand. Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly then release it, the turn signal lights and indicator in the instrument cluster will flash three times.
change)
N00549900155
To change the headlights from high beam to low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal lever to fully toward you (1). Switch the
NOTE
You can flash the high beams by pulling the lever toward you, even if the combination headlights and dimmer switch is off.
5-48 Features and controls
NOTE
A light in the instrument panel flashes to show when the front and rear turn signal lights are working properly. If this light flashes faster than usual, check for a burned out light bulb or malfunctioning connection. If the panel light does not come on when the lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a burned out bulb in the panel. Have the vehicle inspected by a certified iMiEV dealer.
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
· Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash function for lane changes.
· Adjust the time required to operate the lever for the 3-flash function.
See a certified i-MiEV dealer for details.
Hazard warning flasher switch
Hazard warning flasher
Front fog light switch
switch
N00522700305
N00522801433
The front fog lights illuminate only when the headlights are on low beam. Turning the knob in the direction of the "ON" position turns on the front fog lights as well
5 as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
the "OFF" position.
The knob will return to the neutral position when it is released.
If you press the flasher switch, the front and rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and so will the hazard warning lights. This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion, except for emergencies. If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers will keep working after the key is removed from the electric motor switch.
NOTE
If you keep the flashers on for a long period of time while the ready indicator is not illuminated, the 12V starter battery could go flat and the electric motor unit could be impossible to start.
NOTE
If the headlights are switched to high beam, the front fog lights will go out; they will illuminate again when the headlights are switched back to low beam.
Features and controls 5-49
Wiper and washer switch
NOTE
If the combination headlights and dimmer
switch is rotated to the "OFF" or " " posi-
tion while the front fog lights are illumi-
nated, they will automatically turn off. They
can be turned back on again by rotating the
combination headlights and dimmer switch
5
back to " " position, and turning the knob
in the direction of the "ON" position.
Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
Wiper and washer switch
N00523000640
CAUTION
If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer fluid sprayed against the glass may freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm the glass with the defroster before using the washer.
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
MIST- Misting function The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) LO- Slow
HI- Fast
To adjust intermittent intervals
1- Fast 2- Slow
NOTE
The speed-sensitive-operation function of the windshield wipers can be deactivated. For further information, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Misting function
Windshield wipers
The windshield wiper and washer can be operated with the electric motor switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted
With the lever in the "INT" (speed sensitive intermittent operation) position, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by turning the knob (A).
The wipers will operate once if the wiper lever is raised to the "MIST" position and released. This operation is useful when it is drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to operate while the lever is held in the "MIST" position.
5-50 Features and controls
Wiper and washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
NOTE
N00523200394
To ensure a clear rearward view, the wiper
The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when the electric motor switch in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.
performs several continuous operations when the reverse gear is engaged and the switch is in the "INT" position. Following this continuous operation, the
Turn the knob to operate the rear window wiper.
wiper will automatically switch to intermit-
tent operation. It is possible to modify functions as follows:
5
· Adjustment of the interval for intermittent
operation
· Changing intermittent wiper operation to
Windshield washer
continuous wiper operation For details, consult a certified i-MiEV
N00504600272
To turn on the windshield washer, pull the lever toward you with the electric motor switch in either the "ON" or "ACC" position. The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
dealer. The washer fluid reservoir is located under-
neath the hood. Check the fluid level regularly and refill if necessary. (Refer to "Washer fluid" on page 9-7.)
OFF- Off
INT- The wiper operates continuously for several seconds then operates intermittently at intervals of about 8 sec-
Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers
onds.
N00523500241
- Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window glass while the knob is turned fully in either direction. When the washer fluid is sprayed, the wiper will automatically operate 2 or 3 times.
CAUTION
If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze, blocking your view. In cold weather, heat the glass with the defroster before using the washer.
Features and controls 5-51
Electric rear window defogger switch
NOTE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
wiper blades prematurely.
Before using the wipers in cold weather,
check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers
5
while the blades are frozen could cause the
wiper motor to burn out.
If the wipers are left on the glass out of the
parked position and they become blocked by
ice or other deposits on the glass, the motor
may still burn out even if the wiper switch is
OFF. If deposits form on the windshield,
park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
electric motor switch, and clean the glass so
that the wipers can operate smoothly.
Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
when the fluid reservoir is empty or the
pump may fail.
During cold weather, add a recommended
washer solution that will not freeze in the
washer reservoir. Otherwise the washer may
not work or may be damaged.
Replace the wiper blades when they are
worn. Use the proper size replacement
blades. If you have questions, ask a certified
i-MiEV dealer.
Electric rear window defogger switch
N00523701455
The electric rear window defogger can be used when the ready indicator is illuminated. The indicator light (A) will come on when you press the electric rear window defogger switch. Electric current will flow through the heating wires on the rear window to help clear away moisture or frost.
After about 20 minutes of operation, the system will shut off automatically. To switch the defogger OFF before 20 minutes have passed, press the switch again. The indicator light will go out and the defogger will turn off. If you need the defogger for more than 20 minutes, press the switch again. This will add 20 more minutes.
5-52 Features and controls
CAUTION
The rear window defogger is not designed to melt snow. Remove any snow manually before using the rear window defogger.
Use the rear window defogger only after the ready indicator is illuminated. Be sure to turn the defogger switch off immediately after the window is clear to save on 12V starter battery power.
Do not place stickers, tape, or other items that are attached with adhesive over the grid wires on the rear window.
When cleaning the inside rear window, use a soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid wires.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, mist can also be removed from the outside rearview mirrors when the rear window defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to "Heated mirror" on page 5-18.)
The electric rear window defogger is activated automatically when the Remote Climate Control is activated in Pre-Defroster Mode. Refer to "Remote Climate Control" on page 3-36, 3-46 and "For persons with electromedical apparatus such as implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable cardiovascular defibrillator" on page 3-6.
Horn switch
Horn switch
N00523800172
To honk the horn, press around the " " mark on the steering wheel.
Refer to "To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation" on page 7-20.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
Bluetooth® music player, from the vehicle's speakers. The system is equipped with a voice recognition function, which allows you to make hands-free calls by simple switch operations
and voice command operations using a
Link System End User License defined voice tree.
Agreement
5 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can be used
N00563800015 when the electric motor switch is in the "ON"
You have acquired a device that includes soft- or "ACC" position.
ware licensed by Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
tion from JOHNSON CONTROLS Inc (the automotive experience business unit), and their subsequent 3rd party suppliers. For a complete list of these 3rd party products and their end user license agreements, please go
Before you can use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, you must pair the Bluetooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. Refer to "Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
to the following website.
Bluetooth® device" on page 5-59.
Link System (if so equipped)
http://www.jciblueconnect.com/faq/fulldisclosure.pdf
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
N00563700030
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
The Link System takes overall control of the devices connected via the USB input terminal or the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allowing the connected devices to be operated by using the
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so
equipped)
N00563901286
WARNING
Although the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows you to make hands-free calls, if you
switches in the vehicle or voice commands. See the following section for details on how to operate.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface allows for making/receiving hands-free calls in the vehicle using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone
choose to use the cellular phone while driving, you must not allow yourself to be distracted from the safe operation of your vehicle. Anything, including cellular
Refer to "Bluetooth® 2.0 interface" on page 5-53. Refer to "USB input terminal" on page 5-73.
based on the wireless communication technology commonly known as Bluetooth®. It also allows the user to play music, saved in a
phone usage, that distracts you from the safe operation of your vehicle increases your risk of an accident.
Features and controls 5-53
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
WARNING
NOTE
Steering control switch and
Refer to and comply with all state and local laws in your area regarding cellular phone usage while driving.
For detail of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, refer to the following web site: [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
microphone
N00564001170
You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North
NOTE
5
If the electric motor switch is left in the
"ACC" position, the accessory power will
automatically turn off after a certain period
of time and you will no longer be able to use
the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The accessory
power comes on again if the electric motor
switch is turned from the "ACC" position.
Refer to "ACC power auto-cutout function"
on page 5-19.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot be used
if the Bluetooth® device has a dead battery
or the device power is turned off.
America website. [For vehicles sold in Canada] You can access the Mitsubishi Motors website. Please read and agree to the "Warning about Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies", the websites mentioned above may connect you to websites other than the Mitsubishi Motors website. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/products/index.html Software updates by cellular phone/digital audio device manufacturers may change/alter device connectivity.
1- Volume up button
Hands-free calls will not be possible if your Steering control switch and microphone
2- Volume down button
phone does not have service available.
P.5-54
3- SPEECH button
If you place the Bluetooth® device in the luggage compartment, you may not be able
Voice recognition function P.5-55 Useful voice commands P.5-56
4- PICK-UP button 5- HANG-UP button
to use the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Speaker enrollment function P.5-58
6- Microphone
Some Bluetooth® devices are not compatible Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface and
with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. You can confirm the Link System software
the Bluetooth® device P.5-59 Operating a music player connected via Blue-
Volume up button
version by pressing the HANG-UP button 3 times (press and hold 2 times and then press briefly) within 10 seconds.
tooth® P.5-63 How to make or receive hands-free calls P.5-63
Press this button to increase the volume.
Phonebook function P.5-65
5-54 Features and controls
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
Volume down button
· To establish a three-way call in such situ- Microphone
ations, press the SPEECH button to enter
Press this button to decrease the volume.
voice recognition mode and then say
"Join calls."
Your voice will be recognized by a micro-
phone in the overhead console, allowing you
SPEECH button
HANG-UP button
to make hands-free calls with voice commands.
Pressing this button will activate the voice recognition mode of Mitsubishi MultiCommunication System (a beep will sound when successfully activated). To use the voice recognition of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, press the PICK-UP button.
Pressing the SPEECH button longer will deactivate the voice recognition mode.
Press this button when an incoming call is
received to refuse the call. Press this button during a call to end the
NOTE
5
If a cellular phone is within close proximity
current call.
When another call is on hold, you will
switch to that call. If this button is pressed in the voice recog-
of the microphone, it may distort the sound quality. In this case, place the cellular phone as far as possible from the microphone.
nition mode, the voice recognition mode
will be deactivated.
Voice recognition function
N00564101168
PICK-UP button
Press this button when an incoming call is received to answer the telephone.
When not receiving incoming calls, pressing the PICK-UP button will activate the voice recognition of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
When another call is received during a call, press this button to put the first caller on hold and talk to the new caller. · In such circumstances, you can press the button briefly to switch between callers. You will switch to the first caller and the other caller will be put on hold.
NOTE
When you press the PICK-UP button to enter voice recognition mode with a cellular phone paired to the system, current information on the cellular phone, such as "remaining battery life," "signal strength" or "roaming," will be displayed on the audio display.* *: Some cellular phones will not send this information to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
Call waiting and three-way calls can be used by the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, only if it is possible to use those services with your cellular phone.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped with a voice recognition function. Simply say voice commands and you can perform various operations and make or receive hands-free calls.
With the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, voice recognition is possible for US English, North American Spanish, Canadian French and Japanese. The factory setting is "English."
Features and controls 5-55
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE
NOTE
Canceling
If the voice command that you say differs
The voice guide will repeat the same mes-
N00564400018
from the predefined command or cannot be
recognised due to ambient noise or some
other reason, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface
will ask you for the voice command again up
to 3 times.
5
For best performance and further reduction
of ambient noise, the vehicle windows
should be closed, lower the blower speed and
sage twice. The first message is in the current language, and the second message is in the selected language. If many entries are registered in the vehicle phonebook, changing the language will take a longer time. Changing the language deletes the mobile phonebook imported to the Bluetooth® 2.0
There are 2 cancel functions. If you are at the main menu, say "Cancel" to exit from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. If you are anywhere else within the system, say "Cancel" to return to the main menu.
Confirmation function setting
refrain from conversation with your passengers while engaging the voice recognition function. Depending on the selected language, some functions may not be available.
Selecting the language
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Setup." 3. Say "Language." 4. The voice guide will say "Select a lan-
interface. If you wish to use it, you will have to import it again.
6. When the voice guide says "English (Spanish, French or Japanese) selected," the language change process will be completed and the system will return to the main menu.
Useful voice commands
N00564200016
N00564501061
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped with a confirmation function. With the confirmation function activated, you are given more opportunities than normal to confirm a command when making various settings to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. This allows you to decrease the possibility that a setting is accidentally changed. The confirmation function can be turned on or off by following the steps below.
guage: English, Spanish, French or Japanese." Say the desired language. (Example: "English") 5. The voice guide will say "English (Span-
Help function
N00564300017
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface is equipped
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Setup." 3. Say "Confirmation prompts." 4. The voice guide will say "Confirmation
ish, French or Japanese) selected. Is this with a help function.
prompts are <on/off>. Would you like to
correct?" Say "Yes."
If you say "Help" when the system is waiting
turn confirmation prompts <off/on>."
If you say "No," the system will return to for a voice command input, the system will
Answer "Yes" to change the setting or
Step 4.
tell you a list of the commands that can be
answer "No" to keep the current setting.
used under the circumstances.
5-56 Features and controls
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
5. The voice guide will say "Confirmation
Say a 4-digit number which you want to Say the 4-digit passcode number to enter the
prompts are <off/on>" and then the sys-
set as a passcode.
passcode.
tem will return to the main menu.
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice If the entered passcode is wrong, the voice
guide will say "Passcode <4-digit pass- guide will say "<4-digit passcode>, Incorrect
Security function
N00564601163
It is possible to use a passcode as a security function by setting a passcode of your choice for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. When the security function is turned on, it is necessary to make a voice input of a 4-digit passcode in order to use all functions of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, except for reception.
code>. Is this correct?" Answer "Yes."
passcode. Please try again." Enter the correct
Answer "No" to return to the passcode passcode.
input in Step 5.
7. When the registration of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say "Passcode is enabled" and the system will return to the main menu.
NOTE
5
You can reenter the passcode as many times
as you want.
If you have forgotten your passcode, say
"Cancel" to quit the voice input mode and
NOTE
then check with a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Passcode will be required to access the system after restarting the electric motor unit.
Disabling the passcode
Setting the passcode
Use the following procedure to turn on the security function by setting a passcode.
It is required for a little time after the ready indicator has turned off that the entered passcode is actually recorded in the system. If the electric motor switch is made to "ACC" or "ON" or the electric motor is started immedi-
Use the following procedure to turn off the security function by disabling the passcode.
NOTE
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Setup." 3. Say "Passcode." 4. The voice guide will say "Passcode is dis-
abled. Would you like to enable it?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No" to cancel the setting of the passcode and return to the main menu. 5. The voice guide will say "Please say a 4digit passcode. Remember this passcode. It will be required to use this system."
ately after the ready indicator has turned off, there is a case when the entered passcode is not recorded in the system. At this time, please try to enter the passcode again.
Entering the passcode
If a passcode has been set and the security function is enabled, the voice guide will say "Hands-free system is locked. State the passcode to continue" when the PICK-UP button is pressed to enter voice recognition mode.
System must be unlocked to disable the passcode.
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Setup." 3. Say "Passcode." 4. The voice guide will say "Passcode is
enabled. Would you like to disable it?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No" to cancel the disabling of the passcode and return to the main menu.
Features and controls 5-57
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
5. When the disabling of the passcode is completed, the voice guide will say "Passcode is disabled" and the system will return to the main menu.
Speaker enrollment function
N00564700011
5 The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can use the
speaker enrollment function to create a voice model for one person per language. This makes it easier for the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface to recognise voice commands said by you. You can turn a voice model registered with the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want.
Speaker enrollment
N00564801149
It takes about 2 to 3 minutes to complete the speaker enrollment process. To ensure the best results, run through the process while in the driver's seat, in an environment that is as quiet as possible (when there is no rain or strong winds and the vehicle windows are closed). Please turn off your phone while in speaker enrollment to prevent interruption of the process. Use the following procedure for speaker enrollment.
1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position, and then pull the parking brake lever.
NOTE
Speaker enrollment is not possible unless the vehicle is parked. Make sure you park the vehicle in a safe area before attempting speaker enrollment.
2. Press the PICK-UP button. 3. Say "Voice training." 4. The voice guide will say "This operation
must be performed in a quiet environment while the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's manual for the list of required training phrases. Press and release the SPEECH button when you are ready to begin. Press the HANG-UP button to cancel at any time." Press the SPEECH button to start the speaker enrollment process.
NOTE
If you do not start the speaker enrollment process within 3 minutes after pressing the SPEECH button, the speaker enrollment function will time out. The voice guide will say "Speaker enrollment has timed out." The system will then beep and the voice recognition mode will be deactivated.
5. The voice guide will prompt for phrase 1. Repeat the corresponding phrase listed in table "Enrollment commands" on page 5-72. The system will register your voice and then move on to the registration of the next command. Continue the process until all phrases have been registered.
NOTE
To repeat the most recent voice training command, press and release the SPEECH button.
If you press the HANG-UP button anytime during the process, the system will beep and stop the speaker enrollment process.
6. When all enrollment commands have been read out, the voice guide will say "Speaker enrollment is complete." The system will then end the speaker enrollment process and return to the main menu.
NOTE
Completing the speaker enrollment process will turn on the voice model automatically.
The commands "Help" and "Cancel" will not work in this mode.
5-58 Features and controls
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
Enabling and disabling the voice model and retraining
Connecting the Bluetooth® 2.0 To pair interface and Bluetooth® device
N00564901108
N00565001278 To pair a Bluetooth® device with the Blue-
You can turn a voice model registered with Before you can make or receive hands-free tooth® 2.0 interface, follow the steps below.
the speaker enrollment function on and off whenever you want. You can also retrain the system. Use the following procedure to perform these
calls or play music using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface function, you must pair the Bluetooth® device and Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
1. Stop your vehicle in a safe area, put the
5 selector lever in the "P" (PARK) position,
and then pull the parking brake lever.
actions.
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Voice training." 3. If you have completed a speaker enroll-
ment process once already, the voice guide will say either "Enrollment is enabled. Would you like to disable or retrain?" or "Enrollment is disabled.
NOTE
Pairing is required only when the device is used for the first time. Once the device has been paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, all you need is to bring the device into the vehicle next time and the device will connect to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically (if supported by the device).
NOTE
You cannot pair any Bluetooth® device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface unless the vehicle is parked. Before paring a Bluetooth® device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface, confirm that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
Would you like to enable or retrain?"
4. When enrollment is "enabled," the voice model is on; when enrollment is "disabled," the voice model is off. Say the
Up to 7 Bluetooth® devices can be paired with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
2. Press the PICK-UP button. 3. Say "Setup." 4. Say "Pairing Options."
command that fits your needs. Say "Retrain" to start the speaker enrollment process and recreate a new voice model. (Refer to "Speaker enrollment" on page 5-58.
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player most recently connected is automatically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
5. The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list." Say "Pair."
You can also change a Bluetooth® device to be connected.
Features and controls 5-59
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE
If 7 devices have already been paired, the
voice guide will say "Maximum devices
paired" and then the system will end the
pairing process. To register a new device,
delete one device and then repeat the pairing
process.
5
(Refer to "Deleting a device" on page 5-60.)
6. The voice guide will say "Please say a 4digit pairing code." Say a 4-digit number. When the confirmation function is on, the system will confirm whether the number said is acceptable. Answer "Yes." Answer "No" to return to pairing code selection.
NOTE
Some Bluetooth® devices require a specific pairing code. Please refer to the device manual for pairing code requirements.
NOTE
The pairing code entered here is only used for the Bluetooth® connection certification. It is any 4-digit number the user would like to select. Remember the pairing code as it needs to be keyed into the Bluetooth® device later in the pairing process. Depending on the connection settings of the Bluetooth® device, this code may have to be entered each time you connect the Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. For the default connection settings, refer to the instructions for the device.
7. The voice guide will say "Start pairing procedure on the device. See the device manual for instructions." Enter in the Bluetooth® device the 4-digit number you have registered in Step 6.
NOTE
Depending on the device, it might take a few minute to pair the Bluetooth® device with the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recognize the Bluetooth® device, the voice guide will say "Pairing has timed out" and the pairing process will be cancelled. Confirm that the device you are pairing supports Bluetooth®, and try pairing it again.
NOTE
If you enter the wrong number, the voice guide will say "Pairing failed" and the pairing process will be cancelled. Confirm the number is right, and try pairing it again.
8. The voice guide will say "Please say the name of the device after the beep." You can assign a desired name for the Bluetooth® device and register it as a device tag. Say the name you want to register after the beep.
NOTE
When the confirmation function is on, after repeating the device tag you have said, the voice guide will ask "Is this correct?" Answer "Yes." To change the device tag, answer "No" and then say the device tag again.
9. The voice guide will say "Pairing complete," and the pairing process will end.
Selecting a device
N00565101123
If multiple paired Bluetooth® devices are available in the vehicle, the cellular phone or music player most recently connected is auto-
5-60 Features and controls
matically connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. You can connect to the other cellular phone or music player by following setting change procedures.
To select a cellular phone
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Setup." 3. Say "Select phone." 4. After the voice guide says "Please say,"
the numbers of the cellular phones and device tags of corresponding cellular phones will be read out in order, starting with the cellular phone that has been most recently connected. Say the number of the cellular phone that you want to connect to. When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask you again whether the phone that you want to connect to is correct. Answer "Yes" to continue and connect to the cellular phone. Answer "No," and the voice guide will say "Please say." Say the number of the phone that you want to connect to.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE
You can connect to a phone at any time by pressing the SPEECH button and saying the
Answer "No," and the voice guide will say "Please say." Say the number of the music player that you want to connect to.
number, even before all of the paired numbers and device tags of corresponding cellular phones are read out by the system.
NOTE
You can connect to a music player at any time by pressing the SPEECH button and
5. The selected phone will be connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice
5 saying the number, even before all of the
paired numbers and device tags of corresponding music players are read out by the
guide will say "<device tag> selected"
system.
and then the system will return to the
main menu.
5. The selected music player will be con-
To select a music player
nected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. The voice guide will say "<device tag>
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Setup."
selected" and then the system will return to the main menu.
3. Say "Select music player."
4. After the voice guide says "Please say," Deleting a device
the numbers of the music players and device tags of corresponding music players will be read out in order, starting with the music player that has been most
Use the following procedure to delete a paired Bluetooth® device from the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
recently connected. Say the number of the music player that you want to connect to. When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask you again whether the music player that you want to connect to is correct. Answer "Yes" to continue and
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Setup." 3. Say "Pairing Options." 4. The voice guide will say "Select one of
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list." Say "Delete."
connect to the music player.
Features and controls 5-61
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
5. After the voice guide says "Please say," the numbers of the devices and device tags of corresponding devices will be read
To check a paired Bluetooth® device
out in order, starting with the device that
N00565201065
has been most recently connected. After it You can check a paired Bluetooth® device by
completes reading all pairs, the voice following the steps below.
guide will say "or all."
5
Say the number of the device that you want to delete from the system.
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Setup."
NOTE
If you press and release the SPEECH button and say "Continue" or "Previous" while the list is being read, the system will advance or rewind the list. Say "Continue" to proceed to the device with the next highest number or "Previous" to return to the phone with the previous number.
If you want to delete all paired phones 3. Say "Pairing Options."
You can change the device tag by pressing
from the system, say "All."
4. The voice guide will say "Select one of
and releasing the SPEECH button and then
6. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will say "Deleting <device tag>
the following: pair, edit, delete, or list." Say "List."
saying "Edit" while the list is being read. You can change the phone to be connected
<number>. Is this correct?" or "Deleting all devices. Is this correct?" Answer "Yes" to delete the phone(s). Answer "No," the system will return to Step 4. 7. The voice guide will say "Deleted," and then the system will end the device deletion process.
5. The voice guide will read out device tags of corresponding devices in order, starting with the Bluetooth® device that has been most recently connected.
6. After the device tags of all paired Bluetooth® devices have been read, the system will say "End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?"
by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying "Select phone" while the list is being read. You can change the music player to be connected by pressing and releasing the SPEECH button and then saying "Select music player" while the list is being read.
NOTE
If the device deletion process fails for some reason, the voice guide will say "Delete failed" and then the system will cancel deleting the device.
To hear the list again from the beginning, answer "Yes." When you are done, answer "No" to return to the main menu.
Changing a device tag
N00565301066
You can change the device tag of a paired cellular phone or music player. Follow the steps below to change a device tag.
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Setup." 3. Say "Pairing Options."
5-62 Features and controls
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
4. The voice guide will say "Select one of the following: pair, edit, delete, or list." Say "Edit."
5. The voice guide will say "Please say," and read out the numbers of the Bluetooth®
When the change is complete, the voice guide will say "New name saved" and then the system will return to the main menu.
NOTE
The hands-free calls might not be operated correctly when it makes calling or receiving by operating the cellular phone directly.
devices and device tags of corresponding Operating a music player con-
devices in order, starting with the Bluetooth® that has been most recently con-
nected via Bluetooth®
N00565400028
To make a call
N00565601131
5
nected. After all paired device tags have been read, the voice guide will say "Which device, please?" Say the number of the device tag you want to change.
For the operation of a music player connected via Bluetooth®, refer to "To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation" on page 7-20.
You can make a call in the following 3 ways using the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface: Making a call by saying a telephone number, making a call using the Bluetooth® 2.0 inter-
face's phonebook, and making a call by redi-
NOTE
You can press and release the SPEECH button while the list is being read, and immediately say the number of the device tag you
How to make or receive handsfree calls
N00565500061
aling.
Making a call by using the telephone number
want to change.
6. The voice guide will say "New name, please." Say the name you want to register as a new device tag. When the confirmation function is on, the voice guide will say "<New device tag>. Is this correct?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No," you can say the new device tag you want to register again.
You can make or receive hands-free calls using a Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone connected to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. You can also use the phonebooks in the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface to make calls without dialling telephone numbers.
To make a call P.5-63 Send function P.5-65 Receiving calls P.5-65
You can make a call by saying the telephone number.
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Dial." 3. After the voice guide says "Number
please," say the telephone number. 4. The voice guide will say "Dialing <num-
ber recognized>." The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will then
7. The device tag is changed.
Mute function P.5-65
make the call.
Switching between hands-free mode and pri-
vate mode P.5-65
Features and controls 5-63
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
When the confirmation function is on, the
system will confirm the telephone number
again. To continue with that number,
answer "Yes."
To change the telephone number, answer
"No." The system will say "Number
please" then say the telephone number
5
again.
NOTE
In the case of English, the system will recognise both "zero" and "oh" (Letter "o") for the number "0."
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface supports numbers (0 to 9) and characters (+, # and *).
The maximum supported telephone number length is as follows:
· International telephone number: + and telephone numbers (to 18 digits).
· Except for international telephone number: telephone numbers (to 19 digits).
Making a call using a phonebook
You can make calls using the vehicle phonebook or mobile phonebook of the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface. For details on the phonebooks, refer to "Phonebook function" on page 5-65.
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Call."
NOTE
If you say "Call" when the vehicle phonebook and the mobile phonebook are empty, the voice guide will say "The vehicle phonebook is empty. Would you like to add a new entry now?" Answer "Yes," and the voice guide will say "Entering the phonebook - new entry menu." You can now create data in the vehicle phonebook. Answer "No," the system will return to the main menu.
3. After the voice guide says "Name please," say the name you want to call, from those registered in the phonebook.
4. If there is only 1 match, the system will proceed to Step 5. If there are 2 or more matches, the voice guide will say "More than one match was found, would you like to call <returned name>." If that person is the one you want to call, answer "Yes." Answer "No," the name of the next matching person will be uttered by the voice guide.
NOTE
If you say "No" to all names read by the system, the voice guide will say "Name not found, returning to main menu" and the system will return to the main menu.
5. If only 1 telephone number is registered under the name you just said, the voice guide will proceed to Step 6. If 2 or more telephone numbers are registered that match the name you just said, the voice guide will say "Would you like to call <name> at [home], [work], [mobile], or [other]?" Select the location to call.
NOTE
If the name you selected has matching data in the vehicle phonebook but no telephone number is registered under the selected location, the voice guide will say "{home/work/mobile/other} not found for <name>. Would you like to add location or try again?" Say "Try again," and the system will return to Step 3. Say "Add location" and you can register an additional telephone number under the selected location.
If the name you selected has matching data in the mobile phonebook but no telephone number is registered under the selected location, the voice guide will say "{home/work/mobile/other} not found for <name>. Would you like to try again?" Answer "Yes," and the system will return to Step 3. Answer "No," and the call making will be cancelled. Start over again from Step 1.
5-64 Features and controls
6. The voice guide will say "Calling <name> <location>" and then the system will dial the telephone number.
SPEECH button and speak "1 2 3 4 pound send" and the 1234# will be sent via your cellular phone.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
Saying "Mute off" in the same way will turn off the mute function and cancel the mute on the microphone.
NOTE
Receiving calls
Switching between hands-free
When the confirmation function is on, the
N00565800022 mode and private mode
system will check if the name and location of
the receiver are correct. If the name is correct, answer "Yes."
If an incoming phone call is received while
N00566600014
5 the electric motor switch is in the "ACC" or The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface can switch
To change the name or location to call, "ON" position, the audio system will be auto- between hands-free mode (hands-free calls)
answer "No." The system will return to Step matically turned on and switched to the and private mode (calls using cellular phone).
3.
incoming call, even when the audio system If you press the SPEECH button and say
was originally off.
"Transfer call" during a hands-free call, you
Redialing
The voice guide announcement for the can stop the hands-free mode and talk in priincoming call will be output from the front vate mode.
You can redial the last number called, based passenger's seat speaker.
To return to hands-free mode, press the
on the history of dialed calls in the paired cel- If the CD player or radio was playing when SPEECH button again and say "Transfer
lular phone.
the incoming call was received, the audio sys- call."
Use the following procedure to redial.
tem will mute the sound from the CD player
or radio and output only the incoming call.
1. Press the PICK-UP button.
To receive the call, press the PICK-UP button Phonebook function
2. Say "Redial."
on the steering wheel control switch.
N00566000018
Send function
When the call is over, the audio system will The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface has 2 types of
return to its previous state.
unique phonebooks that are different from the
N00565700018
phonebook stored in the cellular phone. They
During a call, press the SPEECH button to enter voice recognition mode, then say "<numbers> SEND" to generate DTMF tones. For example, if during a call you need to sim-
Mute function
N00565900010
At any time during a call, you can mute the vehicle microphone. Pressing the SPEECH button and then saying
are the vehicle phonebook and the mobile phonebook. These phonebooks are used to register telephone numbers and make calls to desired numbers via voice recognition function.
ulate the pressing of a phone button as a "Mute" during a call will turn ON the mute
response to an automated system, press the function and mute the microphone.
Features and controls 5-65
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE
Disconnecting the battery cable will not
ing and transferring 1 phonebook entry from the phonebook of the cellular phone.
delete information registered in the phonebook.
To register by reading out a telephone number
N00580600106
Vehicle phonebook
5
N00566101120
This phonebook is used when making calls with the voice recognition function. Up to 32 names can be registered in the vehicle phonebook per language. Also, each entry has 4 locations associated with: home, work, mobile and other. You can
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Phonebook." 3. The voice guide will say "Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "New entry." 4. The voice guide will say "Name please." Say your preferred name to register it.
register one telephone number for each location.
NOTE
If the maximum number of entries are
You can register a desired name as a name for any phonebook entry registered in the vehicle phonebook. Names and telephone numbers can be changed later on.
already registered, the voice guide will say "The phonebook is full. Would you like to delete a name?" Say "Yes" if you want to delete a registered name. If you say "No," the system will return to the main menu.
The vehicle phonebook can be used with all paired cellular phones.
To register a telephone number in the vehicle phonebook
N00580500059
You can register a telephone number in the vehicle phonebook in the following 2 ways: Reading out a telephone number, and select-
5. When the name has been registered, the voice guide will say "home, work, mobile, or other?" Say the location for which you want to register a telephone number.
5-66 Features and controls
NOTE
When the confirmation function is on, the voice guide will say "<Location>. Is this correct?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No" to return to location selection in Step 5. If a telephone number has been registered for the selected location, the voice guide will say "The current number is <telephone number>, number please." If you do not want to change the telephone number, say "cancel" or the original number to keep it registered.
6. The voice guide will say "Number please." Say the telephone number to register it.
NOTE
In the case of English, the system will recognise both "zero" and "oh" (Letter "o") for the number "0."
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone number you have just read, and then register the number. When the telephone number has been registered, the voice guide will say "Number saved. Would you like to add another number for this entry?"
To add another telephone number for a new location for the current entry, answer "Yes." The system will return to location selection in Step 5. Answer "No" to end the registration process and return to the main menu.
NOTE
When the confirmation function is on, after repeating the telephone number you have read, the voice guide will ask "Is this correct?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No" to return to telephone number registration in step 6.
To select and transfer one phonebook entry from the phonebook of the cellular phone
N00580700080
You can select 1 phonebook entry from the phonebook of the cellular phone and register it in the vehicle phonebook.
NOTE
Transfer is not permitted unless the vehicle is parked. Before transferring, make sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
All or part of data may not be transferred, even when the cellular phone supports Bluetooth®, depending on the compatibility of the device.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE
The maximum supported telephone number length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of 20 digits or more will be truncated to the first 19 digits.
If telephone numbers contain characters other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are deleted before the transfer.
For the connection settings on the cellular phone side, refer to the instructions for the cellular phone.
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Phonebook." 3. The voice guide will say "Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "Import contact." 4. The voice guide will say "Would you like to import a single entry or all contacts?" Say "Single entry." The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will become ready to receive transferred phonebook data.
NOTE
If the maximum number of entries are already registered, the voice guide will say "The phonebook is full. Would you like to delete a name?" Say "Yes" if you want to delete a registered name. If you say "No," the system will return to the main menu.
5. After the voice guide says "Ready to receive a contact from the phone. Only a home, a work, and a mobile number can be imported," the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will receive the phonebook data from the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone.
5 6. Operate the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone to set it up so that the phonebook entry you want to register in the vehicle phonebook can be transferred to the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface.
NOTE
If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface cannot recognise the Bluetooth® compatible cellular phone or the connection takes too much time, the voice guide will say "Import contact has timed out" and then the system will cancel the registration. In such case, start over again from Step 1.
Pressing the HANG-UP button or pressing and holding the SPEECH button will cancel the registration.
7. When the reception is complete, the voice guide will say "<Number of telephone numbers that had been registered in the import source> numbers have been imported. What name would you like to use for these numbers?"
Features and controls 5-67
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
Say the name you want to register for this phonebook entry.
You can also listen to the list of names registered in the vehicle phonebook.
NOTE
If the entered name is already used for other phonebook entry or similar to a name used
NOTE
The system must have at least one entry.
for other phonebook entry, that name cannot
5
be registered.
Editing a telephone number
N00579900082
8. The voice guide will say "Adding <name>." When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the name is correct. Answer "Yes." Answer "No," the voice guide will say "Name please." Register a different name.
9. The voice guide will say "Numbers saved."
10. The voice guide will say "Would you like
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Phonebook." 3. The voice guide will say "Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact". Say "Edit number." 4. The voice guide will say "Please say the name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names." Say the name of the phonebook entry you want to edit.
to import another contact?" Answer "Yes" if you want to continue with the registration. You can continue to register a new phonebook entry from Step 5. Answer "No," the system will return to
NOTE
Say "List names," and the names registered in the phonebook will be read out in order. Refer to "Listening to the list of registered names" on page 5-69.
the main menu.
5. The voice guide will say "Home, work,
To change the content registered in the vehicle phonebook
N00579800049
mobile or other?" Select and say the location where the telephone number you want to change or add is registered.
You can change or delete a name or telephone number registered in the vehicle phonebook.
5-68 Features and controls
When the confirmation function is on, the system will check the target name and location again. Answer "Yes" if you want to continue with the editing. Answer "No," the system will return to Step 3. 6. The voice guide will say "Number, please." Say the telephone number you want to register.
NOTE
If the telephone number is already registered in the selected location, the voice guide will say "The current number is <current number>. New number, please." Say a new telephone number to change the current number.
7. The voice guide will repeat the telephone number. When the confirmation function is on, the system will ask if the number is correct. Answer "Yes." Answer "No," the system will return to the Step 3.
8. Once the telephone number is registered, the voice guide will say "Number saved" and then the system will return to the main menu.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE
If the location where a telephone number was already registered has been overwritten with a new number, the voice guide will say "Number changed" and then the system will return to the main menu.
When the confirmation function is on, the system will check if the name is correct. Answer "Yes" if you want to continue with the editing based on this information. Answer "No," the system will return to Step 4. 6. The voice guide will say "Name please."
NOTE
You can call, edit or delete a name that is being read out. Press the SPEECH button and say "Call" to call the name, "Edit name" to edit it, or "Delete" to delete it. The system will beep and then execute your
Editing a name
Say the new name you want to register. 7. The registered name will be changed.
5 command.
If you press the SPEECH button and say
N00580100084
When the change is complete, the system
"Continue" or "Previous" while the list is
1. Press the PICK-UP button.
will return to the main menu.
being read, the system will advance or
2. Say "Phonebook."
rewind the list. Say "Continue" to proceed to
3. The voice guide will say "Select one of Listening to the list of registered names
the following: new entry, edit number,
N00580200072
the next entry or "Previous" to return to the previous entry.
edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or 1. Press the PICK-UP button.
import contact." Say "Edit name." 4. The voice guide will say "Please say the
name of the entry you would like to edit, or say list names." Say the name you want to edit.
NOTE
Say "List names," and the names registered in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer to "Listening to the list of registered names" on page 5-69.
2. Say "Phonebook." 3. The voice guide will say "Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "List names." 4. Bluetooth® 2.0 interface will read out the entries in the phonebook in order. 5. When the voice guide is done reading the list, it will say "End of list, would you like to start from the beginning?" When you want to check the list again from the
Deleting a telephone number
N00580300099
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Phonebook." 3. The voice guide will say "Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "Delete." 4. The voice guide will say "Please say the name of the entry you would like to delete, or say list names." Say the name of
beginning, answer "Yes."
the phonebook entry in which the tele-
5. The voice guide will say "Changing
When you are done, answer "No" to
phone number you want to delete is regis-
<name>."
return to the previous or main menu.
tered.
Features and controls 5-69
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE
Say "List names," and the names registered in the phonebook are read out in order. Refer to "Listening to the list of registered names" on page 5-69.
7. When the telephone number deletion is complete, the voice guide will say "<name> <location> deleted" and then the system will return to the main menu. If all locations are deleted, the system will say "<name> and all locations deleted"
5. The voice guide will say "You are about to delete everything from your hands-free system phonebook. Do you want to continue?" Answer "Yes" to continue. Answer "No" to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phonebook
and the name will be removed from the
and return to the main menu.
5 5. If only one telephone number is registered in the selected phonebook entry, the voice
phonebook. If numbers still remain under the entry, the name will retain the other
6. The voice guide will say "Please wait, erasing the hands-free system phone-
guide will say "Deleting <name> <loca-
associated numbers.
book" and then the system will delete all
tion>."
data in the phonebook.
If multiple telephone numbers are regis- Erasing the phonebook tered in the selected phonebook entry, the
N00580400074
When the deletion is complete, the voice guide will say "Hands-free system phone-
voice guide will say "Would you like to delete [home], [work], [mobile], [other], or all?"
You can delete all registered information from the vehicle phonebook.
book erased" and then the system will return to the main menu.
Select the location to delete, and the voice guide will say "Deleting <name> <location>."
NOTE
To delete the telephone numbers from all locations, say "All."
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Phonebook." 3. The voice guide will say "Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "Erase all." 4. For confirmation purposes, the voice guide will ask "Are you sure you want to
Mobile phonebook
N00566201105
All entries in the phonebook stored in the cellular phone can be transferred in a batch and registered in the mobile phonebook. Up to 7 mobile phonebooks, each containing up to 1,000 names, can be registered.
6. The system will ask if you really want to delete the selected telephone number(s) to go ahead with the deletion, answer "Yes." Answer "No," the system will cancel deleting the telephone number(s) and then
erase everything from your hands-free system phonebook?" Answer "Yes." Answer "No" to cancel the deletion of all registered information in the phonebook and return to the main menu.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface automatically converts from text to voice the names registered in the transferred phonebook entries, and creates names.
return to Step 4.
5-70 Features and controls
NOTE
Only the mobile phonebook transferred from the connected cellular phone can be used with that cellular phone.
You cannot change the names and telephone numbers in the phonebook entries registered in the mobile phonebook. You cannot select and delete specific phonebook entries, either. To change or delete any of the above, change the applicable information in the source phonebook of the cellular phone and then transfer the phonebook again.
To import a devices phonebook
Follow the steps below to transfer to the mobile phonebook the phonebook stored in the cellular phone.
NOTE
Transfer should be completed while the vehicle is parked. Before transferring, make sure that the vehicle is parked in a safe location.
The already stored phonebook in the mobile phonebook is overwritten by the stored phonebook in the cellular phone.
All or part of data may not be transferred, even when the cellular phone supports Bluetooth®, depending on the compatibility of the device.
Only a home, a work, and a mobile number can be imported.
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
NOTE
NOTE
The maximum supported telephone number
The transfer may take some time to complete
length is 19 digits. Any telephone number of
depending on the number of contacts.
20 digits or more will be truncated to the first 19 digits. If telephone numbers contain characters other than 0 to 9, *, # or +, these characters are deleted before the transfer. For the connection settings on the cellular phone side, refer to the instructions for the cellular phone.
If the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface could not be
connected to the Bluetooth® compatible cel-
lular phone, the voice guide will say "Unable
to transfer contact list from phone" and then the system will return to the main menu.
5
If you press the HANG-UP button or press
and hold the SPEECH button during the data
transfer, the transfer will be cancelled and
1. Press the PICK-UP button. 2. Say "Phonebook." 3. The voice guide will say "Select one of
the following: new entry, edit number, edit name, list names, delete, erase all, or import contact." Say "Import contact." 4. The voice guide will say "Would you like
the system will return to the main menu. If an error occurs during the data transfer, all
transfer will be cancelled and the voice guide will say "Unable to complete the phonebook import" and then the system will return to the main menu. If there are no contacts in the phonebook, the voice guide will say "There are no contacts
to import a single entry or all contacts?"
on the connected phone."
Say "All contacts."
5. The voice guide will say "Importing the contact list from the mobile phonebook. This may take several minutes to complete. Would you like to continue?" Answer "Yes," transferring to the mobile
6. When the transfer is complete, the voice guide will say "Import complete" and then the system will return to the main menu.
phonebook the phonebook stored in the
cellular phone will start.
General information
Answer "No," the system will return to
N00566301092
the main menu.
MODEL: MMC FCC ID: CB2MDGMY10
IC: 279B-MDGMY10
Features and controls 5-71
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface (if so equipped)
Your Bluetooth® 2.0 interface operates on a FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi- and found to comply with the limits for a
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi- Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This provide reasonable protection against harmful
device complies with Part 15 of the FCC interference in a residential installation.
Rules and RSS-210 of the Industry Canada This equipment generates, use and can radiate
5 Rules. Operation is subject to the following radio frequency energy and, if not installed
two conditions:
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio com-
This device may not cause harmful inter- munications.
ference.
However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
This device must accept any interference ence will not occur in a particular installation.
received, including interference that may If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
cause undesired operation.
ence to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment
CAUTION
Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by the
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
manufacturer may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the
The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-
equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
users and installers must be provided with installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
ICES Notice: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
compliance.
5-72 Features and controls
Enrollment commands
N00566401080
USB input terminal (if so
equipped)
N00566701041
You can connect your USB memory device or iPod* to play music files stored in the USB memory device or iPod. The following explains how to connect and remove a USB memory device or iPod.
*: "iPod" is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.
How to connect a USB memory device
N00566800087
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in the floor console.
3. Connect a commercially available USB connector cable (C) to the USB memory device (B).
4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to the USB input terminal (D).
USB input terminal (if so equipped)
5
WARNING
Place the USB memory device and the USB connector cable so as not to interfere with driving.
NOTE
Do not connect the USB memory device to the USB input terminal directly. The USB memory device may be damaged.
5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position first and perform the installation steps in reverse.
Features and controls 5-73
USB input terminal (if so equipped)
How to connect an iPod
N00566900075
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
the electric motor switch to the "LOCK"
position.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A) in
5
the floor console.
3. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the iPod (B).
NOTE
Use a genuine Dock connector from Apple Inc.
4. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the USB input terminal (D).
Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications
N00567000031
Device types
N00567101169
Devices of the following types can be connected.
WARNING
Place the iPod and the USB connector cable so as not to interfere with driving.
5. To remove the Dock connector, turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position first and perform the installation steps in reverse.
Model name
Condition
USB memory device
Storage capacity of 256 Mbytes or more
Models other than USB memory devices and iPods
Digital audio player supporting mass storage class
For these connectable device types, "iPod*," "iPod classic*," "iPod nano*," "iPod touch*" and "iPhone*," refer to the following website: [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.] You can access the Mitsubishi Motors North America website. [For vehicles sold in Canada] You can access the Mitsubishi Motors website. Please read and agree to the "Warning about Links to the Web Sites of Other Companies". The websites mentioned above may
5-74 Features and controls
Sun visors
connect you to websites other than the Mitsubishi Motors website. http://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/en/products/index.html
File specifications
N00567201069
You can play music files of the following specifications that are saved in a USB mem-
Sun visors
N00524600340
Fold the sun visor downward (1) to reduce front glare while driving. To reduce side
*: "iPod," "iPod classic," "iPod nano," "iPod- ory device or other device supporting mass glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
touch," and "iPhone" are registered trade- storage class. When you connect your iPod,
marks of Apple Inc. in the United States and playable file specifications depend on the
other countries.
connected iPod.
5
NOTE
Depending on the type of the USB memory device or other device connected, the connected device may not function properly or the available functions may be limited.
It is recommended to use an iPod with firmware updated to the latest version.
You can charge your iPod by connecting it to the USB input terminal when the electric motor switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
Do not keep your USB memory device or iPod in your vehicle.
It is recommended that you back up the files in case of data damage.
Do not connect to the USB input terminal any device (hard disk, card reader, memory reader, etc.) other than the connectable devices specified in the previous section. The device and/or data may be damaged. If any of these devices was connected by mistake, remove it after turning the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position.
Item
Condition
File format
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV
Maximum number of
levels
Level 8
(including the root)
Number of folders 700
Number of files
65,535
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor.
Features and controls 5-75
12 V power outlet
12 V power outlet
Interior lights
N00525000602
N00525300559
CAUTION
Be sure to use a "plug-in" type accessory
operating at 12 V and 120 W or less.
Be aware that using electronic equipment
5
with the ready indicator off may run the 12 V
starter battery down.
When the 12 V power outlet is not in use, be
sure to close the 12 V power outlet cover.
This will prevent the 12 V power outlet from
Card holder
becoming dirty and possibly short-circuiting.
1- Dome light (Rear) P.5-78
Cards can be slipped into the front (A) of the lid of the vanity mirror.
The accessory can be operated when the electric motor switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.
2- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights P.5-76
To use a "plug-in" type accessory, open the
cover, then insert the plug in the socket.
Dome light (Front)/Reading
lights (if so equipped)
N00525800222
Dome light (Front)
The dome light can be turned on by sliding the dome light switch.
5-76 Features and controls
1- Door 2- Off
1- (DOOR)
The dome light comes on when any door or the liftgate is opened. It goes off approximately 30 seconds after the door or liftgate is closed (delayed off function). However, the light goes off immediately if: · The door and the liftgate are closed and the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position. · The driver's door is closed after all the other doors are closed while the lock knob of the driver's door is in the lock position. · The door and the liftgate are closed and the power door lock switch is used to lock the doors. · The keyless entry system remote control transmitter is used to lock the doors.
Interior lights
If the dome light is left switched on with the electric motor switch in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position and a door or the liftgate is opened, it goes off automatically after approximately 30 minutes. The light will illuminate again after
5 it automatically goes off in the fol-
lowing cases: · When the electric motor switch is
turned to the "ON" position. · When the keyless entry system
remote control transmitter is operated. · When any of the doors or the liftgate is opened after all doors and the liftgate are closed.
NOTE
When the key is removed while the doors and liftgate are closed, the dome light will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds before going off.
The time until the light goes off (delayed off) can be adjusted. See a certified i-MiEV dealer for details. However, the dome light will shut off in sync with the automatic relocking function, even if the dome light delayed off function has been extended. For the automatic relocking function, refer to "Keyless entry system" on page 5-5.
Features and controls 5-77
Interior lights
NOTE
The auto cut-out function can be deactivated. See a certified i-MiEV dealer for details.
2The dome light goes off.
5
Reading lights
N00553800096
Regardless of the dome light switch position, when you press the lens, the light on the side that is pressed illuminates; when you press the lens again, the light goes off.
1- On 2- Door 3- Off
1- (ON) The dome light comes on. 2- ()
The dome light comes on when any door or the liftgate is opened. It goes off approximately 30 seconds after the door or liftgate is closed (delayed off function). However, the light goes off immediately if: · The door and the liftgate are closed and the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position. · The driver's door is closed after all the other doors are closed while the lock knob of the driver's door is in the lock position. · The door and the liftgate are closed and the power door lock switch is used to lock the doors. · The keyless entry system remote control transmitter is used to lock the doors.
Dome light (Rear)
N00525400459
The rear dome light can be turned on by sliding the dome light switch.
5-78 Features and controls
If the dome light is left switched on with the electric motor switch in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position and a door or the liftgate is opened, it goes off automatically after approximately 30 minutes. The light will illuminate again after it automatically goes off in the following cases: · When the electric motor switch is turned to the "ON" position. · When the keyless entry system remote control transmitter is operated. · When any of the doors or the liftgate is opened after all doors and the liftgate are closed.
NOTE
When the key is removed while the doors and liftgate are closed, the dome light will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds before going off.
The time until the light goes off (delayed off) can be adjusted. See a certified i-MiEV dealer for details. However, the dome light will shut off in sync with the automatic relocking function, even if the dome light delayed off function has been extended. For the automatic relocking function, refer to "Keyless entry system" on page 5-5.
NOTE
The auto cut-out function cannot be operated when the dome light switch is in the "ON" position. Also, this function can be deactivated. See a certified i-MiEV dealer for details.
3- (OFF) The dome light goes off.
Storage spaces
Glove compartment
N00551500259
To open the glove compartment, pull the lever (A).
5
Storage spaces
N00526400502
CAUTION
Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans, or spectacles in the cabin when parking the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will become extremely hot, so lighters and other flammable items may catch fire and unopened drink cans (including beer cans) may rupture. The heat may also deform or crack plastic spectacle parts.
Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a storage space could otherwise cause injuries during a sudden stop.
NOTE
Do not leave valuables in any storage space when leaving the vehicle.
WARNING
An open glove compartment door can cause a serious injury or death to the front passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always keep the glove compartment door closed when driving.
Card holder
N00571400010
There is a card holder on the inside of the glove compartment.
Features and controls 5-79
Cup holder
5
Cup holder For the front seat
N00527300364
The cup holder is located in front of the side vent. The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-cans securely in its holes.
Tip the cup holder toward you to use it.
CAUTION
Do not drink beverages while driving your vehicle. This is distracting and could cause an accident.
NOTE
When not using the holder, push the holder in to stow it away.
Do not put your hand on the cup holder while getting in or out of the vehicle. The cup holder could break.
Never place anything other than cup or drink can in the cup holder.
Assist grip
N00559000058
These grips are to support the body by hand while seated in the vehicle.
5-80 Features and controls
For the rear seat
N00537000146
This cup holder is located behind the parking brake lever.
CAUTION
Do not use the assist grips when getting into or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could detach and cause an accident.
Assist grip
5
Features and controls 5-81
Driving safety
Economical driving ..........................................................................6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3 Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4
6
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-6
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-10
Dinghy towing ...............................................................................6-10
Economical driving
Economical driving
driving at full speed. Even a slight release of Your driving ability can be seriously impaired the accelerator pedal will save a significant even with blood alcohol levels far below the
N00628500029 amount of main drive lithium-ion battery legal minimum. If you have been drinking,
For economical driving, there are some tech- charge.
don't drive. Ride with a designated non-
nical requirements that have to be met. In
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
order to achieve longer life of the vehicle and the most economical operation, we recom-
Tire inflation pressure
public transportation. Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober.
mend you to have the vehicle checked at reg-
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
ular intervals according to the "WARRANTY Check the tire inflation pressures at regular drugs affect your alertness, perception and
6 AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".
intervals Low tire inflation pressure increases reaction time. Consult with your doctor or road resistance. In addition, low tire pressures pharmacist before driving while under the
Starting and acceleration
adversely affect tire wear and driving stabil- influence of any of these medications. ity.
Avoid driving with the accelerator pedal fully depressed, such as for unnecessarily sudden starts, acceleration and deceleration. Smoothly depress the accelerator pedal. Observe the speed limit and keep the speed as constant as possible while driving.
Idling
Parking for a long period with the ready indicator illuminated will shorten the cruising range.
Speed
At higher the vehicle speed the more main drive lithium-ion battery is consumed. Avoid
Cargo loads
Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the luggage compartment.
Air conditioning
Too much cooling/heating can affect the cruising range, so maintain an appropriate temperature to extend the cruising range.
Driving, alcohol and drugs
N00628900010
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
WARNING
NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. Your perceptions are less accurate, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired.
Floor mat
N00628600017
The original equipment floor mat provided with your vehicle was specifically designed for your vehicle. Always properly position the floor mat and assure it does not interfere with operation of the pedals. Always use the retaining clip on the driver's floorboard to secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will help prevent the floor mat from moving forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
6-2 Driving safety
from moving forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi genuine floor mats are recommended.
To install the floor mat
N00628700063
1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the floorboard.
2. Align the floor mat with the installation holes over the retaining clips.
3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
NOTE
The shape of the mat and the number of retaining clips may vary depending on the vehicle model.
WARNING
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the operation of the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distances resulting in a crash and injury. Always make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the accelerator or brake pedal.
Always use the retaining clip on the driver's floorboard to secure the floor mat.
Always install the mat with the correct side facing down.
Never install a second mat over or under an existing floor mat.
Do not use a floor mat designed for another model vehicle even if it is a Mitsubishi genuine floor mat.
Before driving, be sure to check the following:
· Periodically check that the floor mat is properly secured with the retaining clips. If you remove the floor mat while cleaning the inside of your vehicle or for any other reason, always check the condition of the floor mat after it has been reinstalled.
· While the vehicle is stopped with the electric motor unit off, check that the floor mat is not interfering with the pedals by depressing the pedals fully.
Vehicle preparation before driving
6
Vehicle preparation before driving
N00629000698
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always observe the following:
Seat belts and seats
Before starting the vehicle, make certain that you and all passengers are seated and wearing their seat belts properly (with children in the rear seat, in appropriate restraints), and that all the doors and the rear hatch are locked.
Driving safety 6-3
Safe driving techniques
Move the driver's seat as far backward as As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
possible, while still keeping good visibil- sure monitoring system, there is a risk of
ity, and good control of the steering damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors
wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls. when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire
Check the instrument panel indicators for replacement should, therefore, be performed
any possible problem.
only by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Move the front passenger seat as far back
as possible. Make sure that infants and small children
Lights
6
are properly restrained in accordance with
all laws and regulations.
Have someone watch while you turn all the
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn
Defrosters
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on the instrument panel.
Check these by selecting the defroster mode, and set the blower switch on high. You should be able to feel the air blowing against the windshield. (Refer to "Defrosting or defogging the windshield and door windows" on page 7-9.)
Tires
Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires for proper pressures. Replace your tires before they are heavily worn out.
Fluid leaks
Check the ground under the vehicle after parking overnight, for water, oil, or other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are correct.
Safe driving techniques
N00629200124
Even this vehicle's safety equipment, and your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you can avoid an accident or injury. However, if you give extra attention to the following areas, you can better protect yourself and your passengers:
Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, road and weather conditions. Leave plenty of stopping distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors and use your turn signal light.
While driving, watch the behavior of other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.
Always obey applicable laws and regulations. Be a polite and alert driver. Always leave room for unexpected events, such as sudden braking.
Driving during cold weather
N00629400416
Check the 12V starter battery, including terminals and cables. During extremely cold weather, the 12V starter battery will not be as strong and its power level may drop. Before driving the vehicle, check to see if the headlights are as bright as normal. Charge or replace the 12V starter battery if necessary. During extreme cold weather, it is possible that a very low 12V starter battery could freeze.
6-4 Driving safety
Braking
WARNING
Braking
When driving downhill
The 12V starter battery gives off explosive
N00629501531
hydrogen gas. Any spark or flame can cause the 12V starter battery to explode, which could cause serious injury or death. Always wear protective clothes and a face mask when working with your 12V starter battery, or let a skilled mechanic do it.
All the parts of the brake system are critical to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by a certified i-MiEV dealer at regular intervals according to the "WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL".
Put the selector lever to "B" (REGENERATIVE BRAKE MODE) or "ECO" (ECO MODE) position according to the grade of the slope and vehicle speed. This will allow effective use of the regenerative brake and prevent the service brake from overheating.
Check the antifreeze.
When brakes are wet
If there is not enough coolant because of a
6 If the brake pedal is continuously or fre-
quently depressed on downhill roads, the service brake could overheat and the brake
leak, add high-quality ethylene glycol antifreeze and water. Use Mitsubishi
Check the brake system while driving at a low speed immediately after starting, espe-
performance will be reduced.
Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium or an equivalent. The recommended blend is about 50 % water and 50
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally. A film of water can be formed on the brake
NOTE
When the main drive lithium-ion battery
% anti-freeze. Use a higher concentration (not over 60 %) when the outside temperature is -31 °F (-35 °C) or lower. When the electric motor unit is working very
discs and prevent normal braking after driving in heavy rain or through large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly
level is full or nearly full, or the main drive lithium-ion battery temperature is too high or too low, the regenerative braking force may be reduced. Refer to "Regenerative braking" on page 3-3.
hard (for example, during mountain driv- depressing the brake pedal.
If the red needle in the energy usage indica-
ing and/or when the outside temperature
tor does not move to the left of the neutral
is high), use a 50 % concentration. This
blend will provide adequate protection When driving in cold weather
point (A) while the accelerator pedal is released, the regenerative brake will not
from corrosion and boiling.
work. Refer to "Energy usage indicator" on
WARNING
Never open the coolant reservoir cap while
On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking system, making the brakes less effective. While driving in such conditions, pay close
page 5-37. In the such case, before approaching a long downhill road, reduce speed to prevent the service brake from overheating.
it is hot. You could be seriously burned.
attention to preceding and following vehicles
and to the condition of the road surface. From
time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal
and check how effective the brakes are.
Driving safety 6-5
Parking
6
NOTE
On a slope, be sure to apply the parking brake before moving the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position. If you move the selector lever to the "P" (PARK) position before applying the parking brake, it may be difficult to disengage the selector lever from the "P" (PARK) position when next you drive the vehicle, requiring application of a strong force to the selector lever to move from the "P" (PARK) position.
slopes where your bumper can scrape the road.
When leaving the vehicle
Always remove the key from the electric motor switch and lock all doors and the liftgate when leaving the vehicle unattended. Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.
Parking Parking on a hill
N00629600317
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
Parking with the electric motor unit running
Never leave the electric motor unit running while you take a short sleep/rest.
WARNING
Leaving the electric motor unit running when you are not alert risks injury or death from accidentally moving the selector lever.
Where you park
Your front bumper can be damaged if you scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. Be careful when traveling up or down steep
Do not keep the steering wheel fully turned for a long time
More effort could be required to turn the steering wheel. Refer to "Electric power steering system (EPS)" on page 5-27.
Loading information
N00629900411
It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and non-factory-installed options. The tire and loading information placard located on the driver's door sill of your vehicle will show how much weight it may properly carry.
6-6 Driving safety
WARNING
Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can damage your vehicle, adversely affect vehicle performance, including handling and braking, cause tire failure, and result in an accident.
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by two.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum of (a) Curb weight; (b) Accessory weight; (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and (d) Production options weight.
Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of oil, and coolant.
Loading information
Accessory weight: the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmis-
Tire and loading information placard
sion, power steering, power brakes, power
N00630100370
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, The tire and loading information placard is
to the extent that these items are available located on the driver's door sill.
as factory- installed equipment (whether
installed or not). Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)*
6
times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity. Production options weight: the combined
weight of those installed regular produc-
tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
in excess of those standard items which
they replace, not previously considered in
curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof This placard shows the maximum number of
rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)* well as "the combined weight of occupants
times the number of specified occupants. and cargo" (C), which is called the vehicle
(In your vehicle the number is 2)
capacity weight. This placard also tells you
Occupant distribution: distribution of the size and recommended inflation pressure
occupants in a vehicle as specified. (In for the original equipment tires on your vehi-
your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front cle. For more information, refer to "Tires" on
seat)
page 9-10.
*: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one person as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian regulations.
Driving safety 6-7
Loading information
6
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
N00630201264
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE
The above steps for determining correct load limit were written in accordance with U.S.A. regulations. For your vehicle, please determine correct load limit bearing in mind the following differences: · Your vehicle's seating capacity is 4 people. · Your vehicle cannot tow a trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
6-8 Driving safety
Loading information
NOTE
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
6
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR's) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR's, vehicle loading, see the "Specifications" section of this manual.
Driving safety 6-9
Cargo loads
Cargo loads
N00629700510
Cargo load precautions
To determine the cargo load capacity for your vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle occupants from the vehicle capacity weight.
6 For added information, if needed, refer to
"Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit" on page 6-8. DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers listed on the safety certification label located on the driver's side door pillar as the guide for passengers and/or cargo weight.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, the combined weights of the driver, passengers and cargo and must never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will adversely affect vehicle performance, including handling and braking, and may cause an accident.
Do not load cargo or luggage higher than the top of the seatback. Be sure that your cargo or luggage cannot move when your vehicle is in motion. Having either the rear view blocked, or your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if you suddenly have to brake can cause a serious accident or injury or death.
Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
Trailer towing
N00629800188
WARNING
Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. It may not be possible to maintain control or adequate braking.
Dinghy towing
N00630700015
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.
6-10 Driving safety
CAUTION
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed behind a motor home.
Dinghy towing can cause damage to the electric motor unit. Damage caused by dinghy towing will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Dinghy towing
6
Driving safety 6-11
Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Air conditioning ...............................................................................7-4
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-10
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-11
Remote Climate Control ................................................................7-11
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player
7
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-11
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation
(vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface) ...................................7-20
Steering wheel audio remote control switch (if so equipped) ........7-22
Error codes .....................................................................................7-24
Handling of compact discs .............................................................7-25
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-27
Clock (if so equipped) ....................................................................7-27
General information about your radio ...........................................7-28
Vents
Vents
N00729900265
NOTE
On rare occasions, air from the vents of an air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is only moist air cooling suddenly and does not indicate a problem.
Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the vents as they could prevent the air conditioning from operating normally.
7
1- Left-right adjustment
Changing the mode selection
2- Up-down adjustment
N00736400581
1- Center vents 2- Side vents
Side vents
To change the position and amount of air flowing from the vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to "Mode selection dial" on
page 7-5.
NOTE
Do not place beverages on top of the instrument panel. If they splash into the air conditioning vents, they could damage the system.
When the dimple (A) is pressed, the vent opens. To close the vent, press the dimple (B) on the opposite side.
These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Air flow and direction adjustments
N00730200314
Center vents
Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the knob (A) and vent.
7-2 Comfort controls
Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger compartment.
NOTE
With the mode selection dial between the
" " and " " positions, air flows mainly to the upper part of the passenger compartment. With the mode selection dial between
the " " and " " positions, air flows mainly to the leg area.
Vents
Foot/Defroster position
Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and the door windows.
Foot position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.
7
Foot/Face position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment, and flows to the leg area.
NOTE
With the mode selection dial between the
" " and " " positions, air flows mainly to the leg area. With the mode selection dial
between the " " and " " positions, air flows mainly to the windshield and door windows.
Comfort controls 7-3
Air conditioning
Defroster position
Control panel
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the door windows.
7
N00730501314
NOTE
There is an interior air temperature sensor (G) in the illustrated position. Never place anything over the sensor, since doing so will prevent it from functioning properly.
Air conditioning
N00730300328
The air conditioning can only be used when the ready indicator is illuminated.
NOTE
If the energy level gauge is at 0 bars or the power down warning light illuminates, the vehicle interior may not be cooled/heated even though the dial or switch is operated. Furthermore, the defog performance may be also reduced. Refer to "Energy level gauge" on page 5-41. Refer to "Power down warning light" on page 5-45.
7-4 Comfort controls
A- Temperature control dial B- MAX switch C- Blower speed selection dial D- Air conditioning switch E- Mode selection dial F- Air selection switch
Air conditioning
Blower speed selection dial
Temperature control dial
NOTE
N00736500191
N00736600235
When the electric motor switch is in the Use this dial to adjust the temperature of the
When the dial is moved to middle () position and then to the left while the air condi-
"ON" position, select the blower speed by air flow from the vents.
tioning is operating, the air conditioning
turning the blower speed selection dial.
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the to make the air warmer. Turn it counterclock-
system is operating again. When the temperature control dial is set to
blower speed; turning the dial counterclockwise will decrease it. When the dial is set to the "OFF" position, all fan-driven airflow will stop. When the dial is set to the "AUTO" position, the air flow is adjusted automatically according to the temperature of the interior and the
wise to make the air cooler. When the dial is set to middle () position,
only uncooled and unheated air will flow. When the dial is moved to middle () posi-
tion when using cooling or heating, cooling
or heating stops.
"C" position, the air selection will be automatically set to the recirculation position and the air conditioning will operate. When the dial is moved thereafter, the air conditioning continues to operate and the air
7 selection setting returns to the setting before
the dial was set to "C" position.
position of the temperature control dial.
Mode selection dial
N00736700210
To change the position and amount of air flowing from the vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to "Changing the mode selection" on page 7-2.
NOTE
When the dial is moved from middle () position to the left while the air conditioning is not operating, the air temperature will not change.
Comfort controls 7-5
Air conditioning
"AUTO" position
The vents change to the following positions according to the position of the temperature control dial. Refer to "Temperature control dial" on page 7-5.
CAUTION
When using the mode selection dial between
the " " and " " positions, prevent fogging by pressing the air selection switch to select outside air. (Refer to "Air selection switch" on page 7-6.)
Temperature control dial position
Vents
Air selection switch
N00736800400
7
Between "C" and middle()
: Upper part of front passen-
ger compart-
Normally, use the outside air position to keep the windshield and side windows clear and to quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
If high cooling performance is desired, or, if the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, use the recirculation position.
ment
shield.
Switch to the outside air position every now
Middle()
Set the dial to middle () from the "C" side
Set the dial to middle () from the "H" side
: Upper part of front passen-
ger compartment
: Leg area
Between
middle () and
"H"
Near middle ()
Near "H"
: Leg area
: Leg area, windshield, and door windows
To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch.
Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} Outside air is introduced into the passenger compartment.
Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} Air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment.
and then to keep the windows from fogging up.
CAUTION
Using recirculated air for a long time may cause the windows to fog up.
NOTE
When the mode selection dial is set to the " " position, the air conditioning compressor runs automatically. Outside air introduction will also be selected automatically.
When the temperature control dial is set to
the "C" position, the air selection will be
automatically set to the recirculation posi-
tion.
7-6 Comfort controls
Air conditioning switch
N00731000465
Push the switch, and the air conditioning compressor will turn on. The air conditioning indicator light (A) will come on.
When the temperature control dial is set between middle () and "H" position The heating capability is at maximum.
Air conditioning
NOTE
When the blower speed selection dial or temperature control dial is operated with the indicator light illuminated, the indicator light goes out and the selected function overrides others. Other functions return to the mode before pressing the MAX switch.
When the air conditioning is operated with the MAX switch, the air conditioning does not stop if the function is cancelled.
7
Operating the air conditioning system
N00731101290
Push the switch again and the air conditioning compressor will stop and the indicator light (A) goes off.
MAX switch
N00766500015
When the blower speed selection dial is not OFF and the MAX switch is pressed, the indicator light (A) illuminates and cooling/heating performance and the air conditioning setting is changed according to the temperature control dial position. When the switch is pressed again, the operation returns to the mode before pressing the switch.
When the temperature control dial is in middle () position
The air flow is at maximum.
When the temperature control dial is set between "C" and middle () position
The air conditioning automatically operates and the cooling capability is at maximum.
NOTE
Do not use the cooling/heating function with the MAX switch for a long time. Because the power consumption is greatly increased, the cruising range is shortened.
Heating
1. Set the mode selection dial to the " " position.
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to the desired temperature between middle () and "H" position.
4. Select the desired blower speed.
Comfort controls 7-7
Air conditioning
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to between middle () position and "H" position.
4. Turn the blower speed selection dial to any position other than "OFF" position.
5. Press the MAX switch (B).
Cooling
For ordinary cooling
N00731201363
7
NOTE
When the blower speed selection dial is set to the "AUTO" position, the air flow is adjusted automatically according to the temperature of the interior and the position of the temperature control dial.
Quick heating
1. Set the mode selection dial to the " " position.
7-8 Comfort controls
NOTE
Do not use the heating function with the MAX switch for a long time. Because the power consumption is greatly increased, the cruising range is shortened.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the " " position.
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to the desired temperature between middle () and "C" position.
4. Select the desired blower speed. 5. Push the air conditioning switch (B). 6. When the air conditioning is operating,
the switch indicator light (C) illuminates.
NOTE
If the outside air is dusty or contaminated in some way, set the air selection switch (A) to the recirculation position. Let in some outside air from time to time for good ventilation.
To cool the leg areas, set the mode selection
dial to the " " position. When the blower speed selection dial is set
to the "AUTO" position, the air flow is adjusted automatically according to the temperature of the interior and the position of the temperature control dial.
For quick cooling
Air conditioning
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door windows)
N00731400557
CAUTION
For safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows.
To remove frost or fog from the windshield
and door windows, use the mode selection
dial (" " or " ").
7
1. Set the mode selection dial to the " " position.
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the recirculation position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to between middle () and "C" position.
4. Turn the blower speed selection dial to any position other than "OFF" position.
5. Press the MAX switch (B). The air conditioning automatically operates and the indicator light (C) illuminates.
For ordinary defrosting
Use this setting to keep the windshield and door windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heated (when driving in rain or snow).
NOTE
Do not use the cooling function with the MAX switch for a long time. Because the power consumption is greatly increased, the cruising range is shortened.
1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside position.
Comfort controls 7-9
Important air conditioning operating tips 2. Set the mode selection dial to the " "
position. 3. Turn the temperature control dial clock-
wise or counterclockwise to the desired temperature between middle () and "H" position. 4. Select the desired blower speed. 5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
For quick defrosting
7
1. Set the mode selection dial to the " " position.
2. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or counterclockwise to the desired temperature between middle () and "H" position.
3. Press the MAX switch (A).
NOTE
When the mode selection dial is set to the
" " position, the air conditioning compressor runs automatically. Outside air introduction will also be selected automatically. When defrosting, do not set the temperature control dial to the maximum cool position. This would blow cool air on the window glass and fog it up. Since defogging or defrosting with the MAX switch consumes a large amount of power, stop the switch after defogging or defrosting. Use the MAX setting for a long time decreases the cruising range.
Important air conditioning operating tips
N00733700323
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the vehicle interior extremely hot which then requires more time to cool. If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the windows for the first few minutes of air conditioning to expel the hot air.
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed when the air conditioning is in use. The entry of outside air through open windows will reduce cooling efficiency.
3. When running the air conditioning, make sure the air intake, which is located in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake chamber may reduce air flow and plug the water drains.
Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations
If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. Have the system inspected by a certified iMiEV dealer.
7-10 Comfort controls
Air purifier
CAUTION
Air purifier
AM/FM electronically tuned
The air conditioning system in your vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC134a and the lubricant POE MA68EV. Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause severe damage and may require replacing your vehicle's entire air conditioning system. The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere is not recommended.
N00733800177
The air conditioning system is equipped with an air filter to reduce pollen and dust entering the cabin. The air filter's ability to collect pollen and dust will be reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace it periodically. For the maintenance interval, refer to the "WARRANTY AND
radio with CD player (if so
equipped)
N00734301062
The audio system can only be used when the electric motor switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehicle is designed not to harm the earth's ozone layer. However, it may contribute slightly to global warming. It is recommended that the old refrigerant be
MAINTENANCE MANUAL".
NOTE
Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
NOTE
To listen to the audio system while the elec-
7
tric motor unit is not running, turn the elec-
tric motor switch to the "ACC" position.
saved and recycled for future use.
ing on a dusty road or frequent use of the air
If the electric motor switch is in the "ACC"
conditioning can reduce the service life of
position, the accessory power will automati-
the filter. When you feel that the air flow is
cally turn off after a certain period of time
During a long period of disuse
lower than normal or when the windshield or windows start to fog up easily, replace the air
and you will no longer be able to use the audio system. The accessory power comes
filter.
on again if the electric motor switch is turned
The air conditioning should be operated for at
Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer for assis-
from the "ACC" position. Refer to "ACC
least five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This includes the quick defrosting mode. Operating the air condition system weekly maintains lubrication of the compressor internal parts and maintains the air conditioning in the best operating condition.
tance.
Remote Climate Control
N00766601026
You can run the air conditioning in advance
power auto-cutout function" on page 5-19. If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
it may create noise in the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is wrong with your audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far away as possible from the audio equipment.
of using the vehicle. For details, refer to
"Remote Climate Control" on page 3-36,
3-46.
Comfort controls 7-11
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
NOTE
To adjust the volume
To adjust the tone
If foreign objects or water get into the audio
N00712000408
N00712100672
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odor Turn the VOLUME knob clockwise to 1. Press the button repeatedly to select
comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system and have it checked at a certified i-MiEV dealer. Never try to repair it yourself. Avoid using the audio system until it is inspected by a qualified person.
increase the volume; counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The status will be displayed in the display.
the tone, balance and SCV (Speed Compensated Volume) function control to change. The order is: BASS TREBLE FADER BALANCE SCV
If the audio system is damaged by foreign
Audio adjust mode OFF
objects, water, or fire, have the system
2. Press the SEEK button to change the tone,
checked at a certified i-MiEV dealer.
balance and SCV function setting.
7
The status will be displayed in the display.
Volume and tone control panel
N00711900716
1- VOLUME (Volume control) knob 2- SEEK (Audio adjust) button 3- Display 4- POWER (On-Off) button 5- (Mode change) button
7-12 Comfort controls
NOTE
The volume control mode will shut off automatically if the another mode is selected, or if no adjustment is made within about 2 seconds.
A- Adjust mode B- Adjust level
SEEK button opera-
Adjust Adjust
tion
Mode Level
BASS TREBLE FADER BALANCE
SCV
-6 to 6
F11 to R11 L11 to R11
HIGH, MID, LOW, OFF
Stronger
Stronger
F (Front) increases
R (Right) increases
HIGH
MID
LOW
OFF
Weaker
Weaker
R (Rear) increases
L (Left) increases
HIGH
MID
LOW
OFF
BASS (Bass tone control)
To select the desired bass level.
TREBLE (Treble tone control)
To select the desired treble level.
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
FADER (Front/Rear balance control)
To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R (rear) speakers.
NOTE
The audio adjust mode will automatically shut off when another mode is selected, or if no adjustment is made within about 10 seconds.
BALANCE (Left/Right balance control)
Radio control panel and display
N00734900902
To balance the volume from the L (left) and
7
the R (right) speakers.
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume) function
Speed Compensated Volume function is a feature that automatically adjusts the VOLUME, BASS and TREBLE settings in accordance with the vehicle speed. The effects of the SCV function can be selected either of three levels (LOW, MID and HIGH). Select the degree of your choice by pressing the SEEK button. If you want to stop the SCV function, select the OFF.
1- FM (FM1/FM2) indicator 2- RADIO (AM/FM selection) button 3- MEMORY (Memory selection) button 4- POWER (On-Off) button 5- SCAN button 6- SEEK (Up-seek) button 7- SEEK (Down-seek) button
Comfort controls 7-13
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
To listen to the radio
Manual tuning
N00735000913
1. Press the POWER button until it beeps to turn the audio system ON and OFF. The system turns on in the last mode used. Press the RADIO button to turn ON the
The frequency changes every time the SEEK button is pressed. Press the button to select the desired station.
radio. 2. Press the RADIO button to select the
desired band (AM/FM1/FM2).
To enter frequencies into the memory
3. Press the SEEK button to tune to a station,
7
or press the MEMORY button either or to tune in to a station memorized.
As many as 6 AM and 12 FM stations can be entered into the memory.
Refer to "Automatic tuning", "Manual tuning" or "To enter frequencies into the memory".
To store a frequency in the memory, follow these steps:
1. Press the SEEK button to tune to the fre-
Automatic tuning
quency you wish to keep in the memory.
2. Press the MEMORY button either or
After pressing the SEEK button, a receivable station will be automatically selected and reception of the station will begin.
SCAN function
until it beeps. The sound will be momentarily interrupted while the frequency is being entered into the memory.
Press the SCAN button. The radio will tune consecutively to each available station for about 5 seconds per station. If you want to stop scanning, press the SCAN button again. The frequency display of the current station flashes once per second during SCAN.
3. To recall a frequency that has been saved in memory, press the MEMORY button briefly for no longer than about 1 second.
NOTE
Disconnecting the 12V starter battery cables erases all the radio station settings stored in the memory.
7-14 Comfort controls
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
CD control panel and display
N00735300743
17- SCAN button
18- SEEK
(Up-seek)
(Return) button
19- SEEK
(Down-seek)
button/ button/
NOTE
For information concerning the handing of the compact discs, refer to "Handling of compact discs" on page 7-25.
(Select) button
To listen to a CD
To eject a disc
1- Disc loading slot 2- Eject button 3- CD (CD mode changeover) button 4- TRACK (Fast-forward/Track up)
button 5- TRACK (Fast-reverse/Track down)
button 6- CD indicator 7- SEL (Select mode) indicator 8- FOLDER indicator 9- TRACK indicator 10- Display 11- RDM/F-RDM indicator 12- RPT/F-RPT indicator 13- SELECT knob 14- POWER (On-Off) button/PAGE (Title
scroll) button 15- DISP (Title display) button
N00735502097 When the eject button is pressed, the disc
automatically stops and is ejected. The sys-
To set a disc
tem automatically switches to radio mode.
7
1. Press the POWER button until it beeps to turn the audio system ON and OFF. The system turns on in the last mode used.
2. Insert the disc with the label facing up. When a disc is inserted, the CD indicator
NOTE
If you do not remove an ejected disc before 15 seconds have elapsed, the disc will be reloaded.
will come on and the CD player will begin
playing even if the radio is being used. To listen to a music CD
The CD player will also begin playing
when the CD button is pressed with a disc
set in the CD player or in the disc loading
slot, even if the radio is being used.
NOTE
For information concerning the adjustment of volume and tone, refer to "To adjust the volume" on page 7-12 and "To adjust the tone" on page 7-12.
3 inches (8 cm) compact disc cannot be played on this CD player.
16- MENU button
Comfort controls 7-15
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
Push the CD button if a disc is already in the CD player. The audio system will enter CD mode and start playback. The track number and the playing time will appear on the display. The tracks in the disc will be played consecutively and continuously.
Push the CD button if a disc is already in the CD player. The display shows "READING", then playback begins. The folder number, the track number and the playing time will appear on the display.
To listen to an MP3 CD
This CD player allows you to play MP3
7 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs (recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees, 100 folders and 255 files. During MP3 playback, the unit can display ID3 tag information. For information concerning ID3 tag, refer to "CD text and MP3 title display" on page 7-19.
7-16 Comfort controls
NOTE
While listening to a disc on which CD-DA (CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both been recorded, you can switch between reading of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files, and the external audio input mode by pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep).
With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatically played first.
The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding software and the bit rate. For details, refer to the user manual of your encoding software.
Depending on file/folder configurations on a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
MP3 encode software and writing software are not supplied with this unit.
You may encounter trouble in playing an MP3 or displaying the information of MP3 files recorded with certain writing software or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
If you record too many folders or files other than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time before playback starts.
NOTE
This unit does not record MP3 files. For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs,
refer to "Notes on CD-Rs/RWs" on page 7-26.
CAUTION
Attempting to play a file not in the MP3 format which has the ".mp3" file name may produce noise from the speakers and speaker damage, and can damage your hearing.
Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order (Example)
Root folder (Root directory)
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
Fast forward
You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the TRACK button. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.
NOTE
Pressing the TRACK button once during the song will cause the CD player to restart playback from the beginning of the song.
Fast reverse
To find a file (MP3 CDs only)
You can fast reverse the disc by pressing the
Operate the following buttons or the SELECT
TRACK button. While the button is kept knob to select desired file.
pressed, the disc will be fast-reversed.
7 When this mode is activated by pressing the
To select a desired track
button, the SEL indicator will be displayed in the display.
Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4
Folder selection In the order File selection In the order
To fast forward/reverse the disc
To fast forward or fast reverse the disc, press the TRACK button or the TRACK button.
You can select your desired track by using the TRACK button.
Track up
Press the TRACK button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display. When listening to a MP3 CD, keep pressing the button to continue to move up tracks.
Track down
Press the TRACK button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display. When listening to a MP3 CD, keep pressing the button to continue to move down tracks.
button
:Press the button to start this mode or cancel the selection.
SELECT knob :Turn the knob to show the
folder or file.
button
:Press the button to select the folder or file.
NOTE
If no operation is performed for 10 seconds or more or other button is operated after the SELECT knob has been turned, searching of the desired file is canceled.
If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or more after the file is displayed, playback starts.
Comfort controls 7-17
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
NOTE
To play tracks in repeat
To play tracks in random order
When the SEL indicator is not shown on the
N00771600014
N00771800016
display and the SELECT knob is operated, the volume adjustment is effective.
Repeat an all track (normal playback) Select the ALL REPEAT mode. Refer to "To
Random playback for a disc (music CDs only)
To select the playing mode
select the playing mode" on page 7-18.
Select the RANDOM mode. Refer to "To
N00771500013 The all tracks on the disc will be played select the playing mode" on page 7-18.
1. Press the MENU button until beeps.
repeatedly.
The RDM indicator will come on and the
2. Press the SEEK / button repeatedly
tracks on the disc will be played in a random
to select the mode.
Repeat a track
sequence.
7
Select the REPEAT mode. Refer to "To select Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs
the playing mode" on page 7-18.
only)
The RPT indicator will come on and repeat
the same track.
Select the F-RANDOM mode. Refer to "To
(MP3 CDs only) (MP3 CDs only)
Repeat tracks in the same folder (MP3 CDs only)
select the playing mode" on page 7-18. The F-RDM indicator will come on and the tracks on the currently selected folder will be played in a random sequence.
Select the F-REPEAT mode. Refer to "To
select the playing mode" on page 7-18. The F-RPT indicator will come on and the all track on the currently selected folder will be
Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3 CDs only)
played repeatedly.
Select the RANDOM mode. Refer to "To
select the playing mode" on page 7-18.
3. Press the MENU button until you hear a beep. The selected mode will operate.
NOTE
With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files
The RDM indicator will come on and the files from all the folders on the disc will be playback in a random sequence.
of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3
files only) to be repeated.
7-18 Comfort controls
AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player (if so equipped)
NOTE
CD text and MP3 title display
ID3 tag information
With a disc that contains both CD-DA and MP3 files, the random mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be repeated.
N00752100166
This audio system can display CD text and MP3 titles including ID3 tag information.
The audio system can display ID3 tag information for files that have been recorded with ID3 tag information.
CD text
1. Press the DISP button for 2 seconds or
To find the start of each track on a disc for playback
N00771900017
Press the SCAN button. "SCAN" will appear on the display and the CD player will play back the first 10 seconds of each track on the
The audio system can display disc and track titles for discs with converted disc and track title information. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: disc name track name normal display mode.
longer to switch to the ID3 tag information. "TAG" will appear on the display. 2. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence:
7 album name track name artist name
normal display mode.
selected disc (music CDs only) or the currently selected folder (MP3 CDs only). The track number will blink while the scan mode is selected. To stop the scan mode, press the SCAN button again.
NOTE
Once all tracks on the disc (music CDs only) or the currently selected folder (MP3 CDs only) have been scanned, playback of the disc will restart from the beginning of the track that was playing when scanning
NOTE
The display can show up to 11 characters. If a disc name or track name has more than 11 characters, press the PAGE button to view the next 11 characters.
When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows "NO TITLE".
Characters that the audio system cannot display are shown as " ".
MP3 title
NOTE
To return from ID3 tag information to the folder name, press the DISP button again for 2 seconds or longer.
When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows "NO TITLE".
The display can show up to 11 characters. If a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag information has more than 11 characters, press the PAGE button to view the next 11 characters.
Folder names, track names and ID3 tag
started. With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
MP3 files, the scan mode causes only files of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files only) to be played.
The audio system can display folder and track titles for discs with converted folder and track information. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: folder name track name nor-
information can each be displayed up to a length of 32 characters. Characters that the audio system cannot display are shown as " ".
mal display mode.
Comfort controls 7-19
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
To play iPod/USB memory
device tracks via voice oper-
ation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
N00772001025
Desired tracks can be selected and played
from your iPod or USB memory device by
"Artist", "Album", "Playlist" and "Genre"
using voice commands.
7 For information concerning the voice recog-
nition function or speaker registration function, refer to "Bluetooth® 2.0 interface" on page 5-53. The following explains how to prepare for
To search by artist name
N00772200017
1. Say "Play" on the main menu.
voice operation and play the tracks.
NOTE
Preparation for voice operation
N00772101026
To use the voice operation, press the PICKUP button (1) first.
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide.
2. After the voice guide says "Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?," say "Artist".
3. After the voice guide says "What Artist would you like to play?," say the artist name.
4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6.
5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say "More than one match was found, would you like to play <artist name>?" If you say "Yes," the system proceeds to step 6. If you say "No," the next matching artist is uttered by the system.
NOTE
If you say "No" to three or all artist names uttered by the system, the voice guide will say "Artist not found, please try again" and the system returns to step 2.
Search time depends on the number of songs on your connected device. Devices containing a large number of songs may take longer to return search results.
6. After the voice guide says "Playing <artist name>," the system creates a playlist index for the artist.
NOTE
If you say "Artist <name>," you can skip step 3.
7-20 Comfort controls
To play iPod/USB memory device tracks via voice operation (vehicles with Bluetooth® 2.0 interface)
NOTE
If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the artist name is correct. If the artist name is correct, say "Yes". If not, say "No". After the voice guide says "Artist not found, please try again," the system returns to step 2.
7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback.
To search by album title
N00772300018
1. Say "Play" on the main menu.
NOTE
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device. If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide.
2. After the voice guide says "Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?," say "Album".
NOTE
If you say "Album <title>," you can skip step 3.
3. After the voice guide says "What Album would you like to play?" say the album title.
4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6.
5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say "More than one match was found, would you like to play <album title>?" If you say "Yes," the system proceeds to step 6. If you say "No," the name of the next matching album is uttered by the system.
NOTE
If you say "No" to three or all album titles uttered by the system, the voice guide will say "Album not found, please try again" and the system returns to step 2.
6. After the voice guide says "Playing <album title>," the system creates a playlist index for the album title.
NOTE
If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the album title is correct. If the album title is correct, say "Yes". If not, say "No". After the voice guide says "Album not found, please try again," the system returns to step 2.
7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback.
To search by playlist
1. Say "Play" on the main menu.
N00772400019
NOTE
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device.
7 If the connected device cannot be recognized
or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide.
2. After the voice guide says "Would you like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?," say "Playlist".
NOTE
If you say "Playlist <playlist>," you can skip step 3. If the device has no playlist, the voice guide will say "There are no playlists stored on device" and the system returns to step 2.
3. After the voice guide says "What Playlist would you like to play?," say the playlist name.
4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6.
Comfort controls 7-21
Steering wheel audio remote control switch (if so equipped)
5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say "More than one match was found, would you like to play <playlist>?" If you say "Yes," the system
To search by genre
1. Say "Play" on the main menu.
N00772500010
If you say "No," the next matching genre is uttered by the system.
NOTE
proceeds to step 6. If you say "No," the next matching playlist name is uttered by the system.
NOTE
The Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts recognizing the connected device.
If you say "No" to three or all genres uttered by the system, the voice guide will say "Genre not found, please try again" and the system returns to step 2.
NOTE
If you say "No" to three or all playlist names
uttered by the system, the voice guide will
7
say "Playlist not found, please try again" and
the system returns to step 2.
If the connected device cannot be recognized or a connection error occurs, the Bluetooth® 2.0 interface starts an appropriate voice guide. Follow the voice guide.
6. After the voice guide says "Playing <genre>," the system creates an index for the genre.
2. After the voice guide says "Would you
NOTE
6. After the voice guide says "Playing <playlist>," the system creates an index for the playlist.
NOTE
If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the playlist name is
like to play by Artist, Album, Playlist or Genre?," say "Genre".
NOTE
If you say "Genre <type>," you can skip step 3.
If the confirmation function is active, the voice guide confirms if the genre is correct. If the genre is correct, say "Yes". If not, say "No". After the voice guide says "Genre not found, please try again," the system returns to step 2. Refer to "Confirmation function setting" on page 5-56.
correct. If the playlist name is correct, say "Yes". If not, say "No". After the voice guide says "Playlist not found, please try again," the system returns to step 2. Refer to "Confirmation function setting" on page 5-56.
3. After the voice guide says "What Genre would you like to play?," say the music type.
4. If there is only one match, the system proceeds to step 6.
7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback.
Steering wheel audio remote
7. The system exits the voice recognition mode and starts playback.
5. If there are two or more matches, the voice guide will say "More than one match was found, would you like to play
control switch (if so equipped)
N00714800471
<genre>?" If you say "Yes," the system The remote control switch is located on the
proceeds to step 6.
left side of the steering wheel.
7-22 Comfort controls
It can be used when the electric motor switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.
Steering wheel audio remote control switch (if so equipped)
used before turning off is displayed. To turn off the power, press and hold down the power switch for about 2 seconds until you hear a beep.
To listen to the radio
Press the mode selector button and select AM or FM mode.
Volume control
Automatic tuning
Volume up button
Seek up button/Seek down button
7 While the button is pressed, the volume will After pressing one of these buttons, a receiv-
continue to increase.
able station will be automatically selected and
reception of the station will begin.
1- Volume up button 2- Volume down button 3- Power switch/Mode selector button
Volume down button
To listen to a CD
4- Seek up/Track up/File up/Fast-forward button
5- Seek down/Track down/File
While the button is pressed, the volume will
continue to decrease.
Press the mode selector button and select CD
mode.
down/Fast-reverse button
Mode selection
To fast forward/reverse the disc
NOTE
(music CDs only)
Press the mode selector button to select the
Do not press multiple buttons at the same time when using the steering wheel audio remote control switch.
desired mode. The mode changes in the following order. AM FM1 FM2 CD USB or iPod* Bluetooth®* AM
To fast forward or fast reverse the disc, press the fast-forward button or the fast-reverse button.
To turn on the power
*: If you connect these devices.
Fast forward
You can fast forward the disc by holding
Press the power switch to turn on the power.
down the fast-forward button. While the but-
When the power is turned on, the last mode
Comfort controls 7-23
Error codes
ton is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.
Fast reverse
You can fast reverse the disc by holding down the fast-reverse button. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-reversed.
To listen to an iPod
Press the mode selector button and select iPod mode.
To select a desired track
To listen to a USB memory device
Press the mode selector button and select USB mode.
To select a desired file
NOTE
Track up button
7
With an MP3 CD, you can fast forward and fast reverse tracks in the same folder.
Press the button repeatedly until the desired File up button
track number appears on the display.
Press the button repeatedly until the desired
To select a desired track
You can select your desired track by using the track up button or the track down button.
NOTE
The track number continues to increase while the button is pressed.
Track down button
track number appears on the display.
NOTE
The track number continues to increase while the button is pressed.
NOTE
Pressing the track down button once during the song will cause the system to restart playing from the beginning of the song.
Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.
NOTE
The track number continues to decrease while the button is pressed.
File down button
Press the button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.
NOTE
The track number continues to decrease while the button is pressed.
Error codes
If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
N00736100777
7-24 Comfort controls
Handling of compact discs
Error display
Problem
Item
Repair
NO DISC No disc inserted
Disc is not in CD player.
Insert disc.
CHECK DISC Focus error
Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on Insert disc with label facing up.
disc.
Remove moisture from disc.
DISC ERROR Disc error
Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or exces- Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrations
sive vehicle vibration.
stop.
INTERNAL E Mechanism error
Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of posi- Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject, bring
tion.
your vehicle to a certified i-MiEV dealer.
HEAT ERROR
Inside of audio system is hot.
Internal protection against high temperatures.
Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.
7
ERROR DC DC offset output voltage Foreign material is inside of radio or amplifier. Bring your vehicle to a certified i-MiEV dealer.
ERROR
Communication or power supply error
Communication error between external device and equipment. Power supply error of external device.
Bring your vehicle to a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Handling of compact discs
N00734100340
Use only the type of compact discs that have the mark shown in the illustration below. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs may cause problems.)
The use of special shaped, damaged compact discs (like cracked discs) or lowquality compact discs (like warped discs or burrs on the discs) such as those shown will damage the CD player.
Comfort controls 7-25
Handling of compact discs
7
In the following circumstances, moisture can form on compact discs and inside the audio system, preventing normal operation. · When there is high humidity (for example, when it is raining). · When the temperature suddenly rises, such as right after the heater is turned on in cold weather. In this case, wait until the moisture has had time to dry out.
7-26 Comfort controls
When the CD player is subjected to violent vibrations, such as during off-road driving, the tracking may not work.
When storing compact discs, always store them in their separate cases. Never place compact discs in direct sunlight, or in any place where the temperature or humidity is high.
Never touch the flat surface of the disc where there isn't a label. This will damage the disc surface and could affect the sound quality. When handling a compact disc, always hold it by the outer edge and the center hole.
To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth. Wipe directly from the center hole toward the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Never use any chemicals such as benzine, paint thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static agent on the disc.
Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil, etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.
Do not put additional labels or stickers on compact discs. Also, do not use any compact disc on which a label or sticker has started to peel off or any compact disc that has stickiness or other contamination left by a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use such a compact disc, the CD player may stop working properly and you may not be able to eject the compact disc.
Notes on CD-Rs/RWs
N00751900112
You may have trouble playing back some CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders (CD-R/RW drives), either due to their recording characteristics or dirt, fingerprints, scratches, etc. on the disc surface.
CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high temperatures and high humidity than ordinary music CDs and can therefore be damaged and rendered unplayable if left inside your vehicle for a long time.
Depending on the combination of the writing software, the CD recorder (CDR/RW drive), and the disc used to create a CD-R/RW, the disc might not play successfully.
This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs if the session is not closed.
This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs which contain data other than CD-DA or MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).
Be sure to observe the handling instructions for the CD-R/RW disc.
WARNING
Operating the CD player in a manner other than specifically instructed herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not remove the cover and attempt to repair the CD player by yourself. There are no user serviceable parts inside. In case of malfunction, contact a certified iMiEV dealer.
To set the time
Antenna
Antenna To remove
N00734200471
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise.
To install
NOTE
Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the following cases: · When using an automatic car wash · When covering your vehicle with a car cover · When driving into a structure that has a low ceiling.
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base (B) until it is securely retained.
Clock (if so equipped)
N00755000124
The time is displayed when the electric motor switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.
7
A- Clock button B- SEEK (clock adjustment up) button C- SEEK (clock adjustment down) but-
ton
1. Press and hold the clock button and the clock display flashes.
2. Press the SEEK button to adjust the "hours" digit. If you keep pressing the button, fast-forward begins.
3. When the "hours" digit is adjusted, press the clock button to flash the "minutes" digit. Press the SEEK button to adjust the "minutes" digit. If you keep pressing the button, fast-forward begins.
Comfort controls 7-27
General information about your radio
4. When the time is set, press the clock button to stop the clock display from flashing.
NOTE
Reset the time after the 12V starter battery terminals are disconnected and reconnected.
Seconds do not appear in the clock display, but after adjusting the "minutes" setting, the
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party meeting the above conditions could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Signal transmission
Weak reception (fading)
Because of the limited range of FM signals and the way FM waves transmit, you may experience weak or fading FM reception. When the broadcast is blocked by mountains or similar obstructions, reception can be disturbed.
clock begins to operate from 0 seconds.
7
FM signals do not follow the earth surface nor are they reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot
Reflection
General information about your radio
N00733900439
Your vehicle's radio receives both AM and FM stations. The quality of your reception is affected by distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
be received over long distances. AM signals follow the earth's surface and are reflected by the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM broadcasts can be received over longer distances.
FM
AM
The reason why one can hear FM but not AM in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected by solid objects such as buildings, etc. Because FM signals are easily reflected by buildings, this can also cause reception disturbances. The direct signal from the broadcast station
This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is subject to the following conditions:
reaches the antenna slightly before the reflected signal. This time difference may cause some reception disturbance or flutter. This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
The device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference recieved, including interference that may cause undesirable operation.
25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius (25 to 40 miles) (100 miles)
7-28 Comfort controls
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality broadcast signal. This means that types of disturbances mentioned previously become more marked and the reception range is somewhat diminished during stereo reception.
Causes of disturbances
Cross modulation
If one listens to a weak station and is in the vicinity of another strong station, both stations might be received simultaneously.
FM reception is affected by the electrical systems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially those without an electronic noise suppression device. The disturbance is even greater if the station is weak or poorly tuned. FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensitive to electrical disturbances such as power lines, lightning and other types of similar electrical phenomena.
General information about your radio
7
Comfort controls 7-29
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2 Jump-starting ...................................................................................8-2 Tire repair kit ...................................................................................8-5 Towing ...........................................................................................8-11 Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-13
8
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down
N00836301243
If your vehicle breaks down on the road, move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the flashers flashing. If the ready indicator light goes out while driving, the brakes and steering will continue
8 to work, but without power assist, so more effort will be required for braking and steering. Stop the vehicle on the shoulder of the road and turn on the hazard warning flashers. If you need to push your vehicle, turn the electric motor switch to the "ON" position, and place the selector lever in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position.
Jump-starting
N00836400742
If the electric motor unit cannot be energized because the 12V starter battery is weak or dead, you can start it with the battery from another vehicle using jumper cables.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of igniting flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12V starter battery, carefully read this section before jump-starting the vehicle.
Do not try to start the electric motor unit by pushing or towing the vehicle. This can cause an accident resulting in serious injury or death and can damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not attempt jump starting the 12V starter battery while the main drive lithium-ion battery is being charged. Doing so could damage the vehicle or charging equipment.
NOTE
Do not use jumper cables if they have damage or corrosion.
1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an accidental electrical contact.
2. Position the vehicles close enough together so that the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other.
CAUTION
Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12V battery. If the other system is not 12V, both systems can be damaged.
3. Set the parking brake firmly on your vehicle and move the selector lever into the "P" (PARK) position.
4. Set the parking brake firmly on the other vehicle. Put the automatic transaxle in "P" (PARK) or the manual transaxle in "N" (Neutral).
5. Turn the ignition switch (the electric motor switch) on each vehicle to the "LOCK" position.
NOTE
Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical loads. This will help avoid sparks.
6. Remove the battery cover, and then make sure your 12V starter battery electrolyte is at the proper level. (Refer to "Checking 12V starter battery electrolyte level" on page 9-8.)
8-2 For emergencies
WARNING
If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP STARTING!! The battery might split open or explode if the temperature is below the freezing point or if it is not filled to the proper level.
7. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (A), and then connect the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery (B).
WARNING
Make sure that the jumper cables and your clothing are clear of the cooling fans and drive belts. Entanglement with the fans or belts can cause serious personal injury.
Jump-starting
NOTE
WARNING
Open the terminal cover before connecting the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the 12V starter battery. (Refer to "Disconnection and connection" on page 9-9.)
Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size. Otherwise heat damage to the cables could result.
When connecting the jumper cables, do not connect the positive (+) cable to the negative (-) terminal. Sparks can make the battery explode.
9. Start the engine in the vehicle providing the boost. Let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the electric motor unit by turning the electric motor switch to the ON position.
8. Connect one end of the other jumper cable 10. Check if the ready indicator illuminates.
to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery (B), and then connect the
other end to the designated ground location of the vehicle with the discharged battery (A) at the point farthest from the battery.
WARNING
Be sure to follow the proper order when connecting the batteries, of: .
Make sure that the connection is made to the correct designated location (as shown in the illustration) properly. If the connection is directly made to the negative (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable gases from inside the battery might catch fire and explode, causing personal injury.
[When the ready indicator illuminates]
8
Stop the engine of the other vehicle, and
disconnect the cables in the reverse order
and keep the electric motor switch in the
ON position to charge the 12V starter bat-
tery for more than 30 minutes.
After the 12V starter battery is charged,
continue the process from step 17.
[When the ready indicator does not illuminate] Both the 12V starter battery and the main drive lithium-ion battery have gone flat at the same time. Charge the 12V starter battery and the main drive lithium-ion battery by following steps from steps 11 to 15.
For emergencies 8-3
Jump-starting
11. Keep the jumper cables to each vehicle connected and turn the electric motor switch of your vehicle to the "LOCK" position.
NOTE
When the regular charge connector is connected to the charge port, the charging indicator will blink. When charging has started,
Charging the 12V starter battery by using an external battery charger
NOTE
The jumper cables need to be connected to the 12V starter battery when you start charg-
the charging indicator will illuminate.
14. Charge the main drive lithium-ion battery
WARNING
Always remove the 12V starter battery
ing the main drive lithium-ion battery
for more than 1 hour.
from your vehicle when the 12V starter
because the on board charger etc. operate uti- 15. Disconnect the charging cable.
batter is charged by an external battery
lizing power from the 12V starter battery.
(Refer to "Regular charging" on page 3-16.)
charger. Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away
8 12. Charge the main drive lithium-ion battery 16. Turn the electric motor switch to the
by regular charging. The 12V starter bat-
"START" position, make sure that the
tery will automatically charge while the
ready indicator on the instrument cluster
main drive lithium-ion battery is charging.
is illuminated.
(Refer to "Regular charging" on page
If the ready indicator does not illuminate,
3-16.)
perform the procedure again starting from
13. When the charging indicator on the instru-
step 5. If charging cannot be performed,
ment cluster is illuminated, stop the
consult a certified i-MiEV dealer.
engine of the other vehicle and disconnect 17. Refit the battery cover. ("Checking 12V
the jumper cables in the reverse order.
starter battery electrolyte level" on page
9-8.)
from the 12V starter battery because the battery may explode. Keep your work area well vented when charging or using the 12V starter battery in an enclosed space. Remove all the caps before charging the 12V starter battery. Electrolyte (battery acid) is corrosive diluted sulphuric acid. If electrolyte comes in contact with your hands, eyes, clothes, or the painted surface of your vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If electrolyte
gets in your eyes, flush them immediately
and thoroughly with water, and get
prompt medical attention.
Always wear protective clothing and gog-
gles when working near the battery.
Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
dren.
8-4 For emergencies
Tire repair kit
As your vehicle has anti-lock brakes
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery
WARNING
Use only the Mitsubishi genuine tire repair kit. Sealant in other repair kits may not sufficiently seal the tire puncture.
2- Tire repair set: Items #3-#8 shown above
3- Tire sealant bottle 4- Filler hose 5- Valve insert (spare)
charge, after the electric motor unit has been
started by using jumper cables, it can cause Tire repair kit storage
6- Valve remover 7- Speed restriction sticker
the anti-lock braking system warning light to
N00837701026
8- Instruction manual for tire repair
illuminate. This is only due to the low battery The tire repair kit is stowed under the rear
voltage. It is not a problem with the brake system. If this happens, fully charge the 12V starter battery and ensure the charging system is operating properly.
seat cushion.
To remove
N00837800033
1. Pull forward the seat stoppers (A) under
the rear seat cushion (B).
8
2. Lift up the seat cushion and pull it for-
Tire repair kit
ward to remove it.
N00836600366
This vehicle is equipped with a tire repair kit which can be used to repair a minor puncture in tread area caused by a nail, screw or similar object. A spare tire is not provided with this vehicle.
WARNING
The tire repair kit may not permanently seal a punctured tire.
Using the tire repair kit may damage the wheel and/or the tire inflation pressure sensor for the tire. The vehicle must promptly be inspected and repaired by a certified i-MiEV dealer after using the tire repair kit.
1- Tire compressor
3. Remove the screws (C) with a coin or the washer (D) at a position shown in the illustration, and remove the cover (E).
For emergencies 8-5
Tire repair kit
4. Remove the tire repair kit.
8
To store
N00837900018
1. Return the tire repair kit to its original place. Attach the cover and fasten the screws.
2. Insert two wire tabs at the rear edge of the seat cushion under the seat back.
3. Pass both rear seat belt buckles through slits at the rear edge of the seat cushion. Make sure that the seat belt buckles are not twisted.
4. While pushing the seat cushion as far back as possible, press down hooks (A) under the seat cushion into the right and left stopper installation holes (B) until a click is heard.
5. After installing the seat cushion, shake it lightly to confirm that it is properly fixed in position.
How to use the tire repair kit
N00800201049
WARNING
Never use the tire repair kit under in any of the situations listed below. The tire cannot be repaired by the tire repair kit. If any of these situations occurs, please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer. · More than one tire is punctured. · The puncture hole has a length or width of 1/7 inch (4 mm) or greater. · The tire is punctured in the side wall (A), not in the tread (B). · The vehicle has been driven with the tire almost completely flat. · The tire has completely slipped over the wheel rim and come off the wheel. · The wheel is damaged. · A bump, cut or crack is on the tire. · The tire sealant's expiration date has passed. (The expiration date is shown on the bottle label (C).) · Ambient temperature is below -22 °F (-30 °C) or above 140 °F (60 °C).
8-6 For emergencies
NOTE
Do not pull out an object, such as a nail or screw, that penetrates the punctured tire.
Move the vehicle so that the tire valve is positioned away from the point where the tire touches the ground. If the valve is near the point where the tire touches the ground, the sealant may not enter the tire easily.
Tire repair kit
6. Take the valve cap (D) off the tire valve (E), then press the valve remover (F) onto the valve as illustrated. Allow all of the air in the tire to escape.
WARNING
The tire sealant can cause health damage if swallowed. If you accidentally swallow it, drink as much water as possible and immediately seek medical attention.
If the tire sealant gets in your eyes or on your skin, rinse it away with lots of water. If you still sense an abnormality, seek medical attention.
Consult a doctor immediately if any allergic reactions occur.
Do not allow children to touch the tire sealant.
1. Park the vehicle on a safe, flat and level place.
2. Set the parking brake firmly. 3. Move the selector lever to the "P"
(PARK) position and turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position. 4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and set up a warning sign, such as a warning triangle or flashing signal lamp, at an adequate distance from the vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle. 5. Take out the tire repair kit.
8
7. Remove the valve insert (G) by turning it counterclockwise using the valve remover (F). Put the removed valve insert in a clean place so it does not get dirty.
CAUTION
If the vehicle body is contaminated by the tire sealant, wipe the tire sealant off immediately with a wet cloth.
Immediately wash clothes contaminated with tire sealant.
For emergencies 8-7
Tire repair kit
WARNING
If there is any air left in the tire when you remove the valve insert, the valve insert may fly out and injure you. Make sure the tire contains no air before removing the valve insert.
9. Take the cap (H) off the tire sealant bottle (I). Do not remove the seal (J). Screw the filler hose (K) onto the bottle (I). As you screw the filler hose onto the bottle, the seal will break, allowing the sealant to be used.
10. Press the hose onto the valve. Holding the sealant bottle upside-down, squeeze it again and again to inject all of the sealant into the tire.
NOTE
Turn the valve remover by hand. If you use a tool, the valve remover could be damaged.
8 8. Shake the tire sealant bottle well.
CAUTION
If you shake the bottle after screwing on the hose, sealant may spray out of the hose.
11. After injecting the sealant, pull the hose off the valve, remove any residual sealant from the valve, rim and/or tire. Fit the valve insert (G) into the valve (E), and screw the valve insert securely into place using the valve remover (F).
NOTE
In cold conditions (when the ambient temperature is 32 °F {0 °C} or lower), thickening of the tire sealant can make the tire sealant hard to squeeze out of the bottle. Warm the bottle between your hands inside the vehicle.
8-8 For emergencies
12. After injecting the sealant, securely fit the valve remover (F) into the end of the filler hose (K) to prevent sealant from leaking from the empty bottle.
13. Pull out the compressor hose (L) from the side of the tire compressor, and then securely attach the hose to the tire valve (E).
14. Place the compressor (M) with its air pressure gauge (N) on top. Pull out the compressor's power cord (O), insert the plug on the cord into the 12 V power outlet (P), and then turn the electric motor switch to the "ACC" position. (Refer to "12V power outlet" on page 5-76.) Turn ON the compressor switch (Q) and inflate the tire to the specified pressure. (Refer to "Tire inflation pressures" on page 9-13.) If there is a gap between the tire and wheel, push the tread area toward the center of the wheel to close the gap before running the compressor.
Tire repair kit
WARNING
Do not place your hand or fingers between the tire and wheel while inflating the tire. Your hand or fingers may become caught between the tire and wheel.
CAUTION
The supplied compressor is designed only for inflation of your vehicle tires.
The compressor is designed to run on a vehicle's 12 V power supply. Do not connect it to
8 any other power source.
The compressor is not waterproof. If you use it in rain, make sure water does not get on it.
Any sand or dust sucked into the compressor could make the compressor break down. Do not place the compressor directly on any sandy or dusty surface when using it.
Do not disassemble or modify the compressor. Also, do not subject the air pressure gauge to shock. It could malfunction.
15. Check and adjust the tire pressure with reference to the air pressure gauge on the compressor. If you overinflate the tire, release air by loosening the hose's end fitting.
For emergencies 8-9
Tire repair kit
If there is a gap between the tire and wheel because the tire has moved inward from the wheel rim, press the tire tread towards the wheel to close the gap before running the compressor. (With no gaps, the tire pressure will rise.)
NOTE
At this point the puncture hole is not sealed yet. Air will leak through the puncture hole until the emergency repair procedure is completed (through step 19 or step 20 of these instructions).
18. When you have inflated the tire to the specified pressure, stow the compressor, bottle, and other items in the vehicle and make sure that the seat cushion is properly secured. (Refer to "Tire repair kit storage" on page 8-5.) Promptly start driving the
vehicle so that the tire sealant can spread
CAUTION
The surface of the compressor will get hot while the compressor is running. Do not keep the compressor running continuously
17. Affix the speed restriction sticker (R) to the three-diamond mark on the steering wheel.
evenly in the tire. Drive with great care. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Observe local speed limits.
for more than 10 minutes. After using the
CAUTION
compressor, wait for the compressor to cool
8
before using it again.
If the compressor becomes sluggish or hot
while operating, it is overheating. Immedi-
ately place the switch in the OFF position
and let the compressor cool down for at least
30 minutes.
If you sense any abnormality while driving, stop the vehicle and contact a certified iMiEV dealer. Otherwise the tire pressure may drop before the emergency repair procedure is completed, rendering the vehicle unsafe to drive.
NOTE
If the tire pressure does not rise to the specified level within 10 minutes, the tire may be so severely damaged that the tire sealant cannot be used to effect the emergency repair. Do not drive the vehicle. Please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
16. Turn OFF the compressor switch, then pull the power cord plug out of the 12 V power outlet.
CAUTION
Do not affix the sticker anywhere except the specified position on the pad of the steering wheel. Affixing the sticker in an incorrect position could prevent the SRS airbag from deploying properly.
19. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), park the vehicle in safe place. Remove the air compressor from the stowed position. Check the tire pressure using the air pressure gauge on the compressor. If the tire pressure has apparently not dropped, the emergency repair procedure is complete. Continue the process from step 21. If the tire pressure is not sufficient, inflate the tire to the specified pressure again and drive the vehicle carefully without exceeding a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
8-10 For emergencies
Towing
Before driving, stow the compressor and make sure that the rear seat cushion is properly secured.
NOTE
In cold conditions (when the ambient temperature is 32 °F {0 °C} or lower), the time
Towing
N00837001931
CAUTION
If the tire pressure is lower than the minimum permitted pressure (18 psi {130 kPa}), the tire cannot successfully be repaired with the tire sealant. Do not drive the vehicle any further. Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
20. After driving for 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km) again, check the tire pressure using the air pressure gauge on the compressor. If the tire pressure has apparently not dropped, the emergency repair procedure
and driving distance necessary until completion of the repair can become longer than in warmer conditions, and the tire pressure may drop below the specified level even after you have inflated the tire the second time and subsequently driven the vehicle. If this happens, inflate the tire to the specified pressure once more, drive for about 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), then check the tire pressure again. If the tire pressure has again dropped below the specified level, stop driving the vehicle and contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a cer-
tified i-MiEV dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
Transport the vehicle on a flatbed truck or
tow the vehicle either with all wheels or the
rear wheels (drive wheels) off the ground.
8
Flat bed type
is complete. Before driving, make sure 21. Immediately drive with great care to a
that the compressor is stowed and the seat
certified i-MiEV dealer and have tire
cushion is properly secured. You must
repair/replacement performed.
still not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Observe local speed limits.
NOTE
NOTE
Please give the empty sealant bottle to a certified i-MiEV dealer or dispose of the sealant
Dolly type
If the tire pressure has dropped below the specified level when you check it at the end
bottle according to regulations for the disposal of chemical waste.
of the repair procedure, do not drive the
vehicle any further. Contact a certified iMiEV dealer.
Towing with rear wheels off the ground
For emergencies 8-11
Towing
WARNING
Never tow the vehicle with rear wheels (drive wheels) on the ground. This may cause damage to the electric motors. Also this may cause a fire, if wiring in the electric motor unit room becomes damaged.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Towing with all wheels on the ground
Towing the vehicle by a tow truck
WARNING
Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
8
Towing with front wheels off the ground
CAUTION
Never attempt to tow the vehicle using another vehicle with a rope.
Never tow another vehicle using your iMiEV
Towing with rear wheels off the ground
CAUTION
Never tow the vehicle using a sling type truck. Doing so will damage the bumper and/or body.
If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to tow the vehicle. Please contact a certified i-MiEV dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance. There may be local regulations concerning towing in your area. Obey the regulations in the area where you are driving your vehicle.
Place the selector lever in the "N" (NEUTRAL) position. Turn the electric motor switch to the "ACC" position and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or tie-down strap. Never place the electric motor switch in the "LOCK" or "ON" position when towing.
8-12 For emergencies
Operation under adverse driving conditions
CAUTION
If the transmission or the steering system has a problem or damage, transport the vehicle on a flatbed truck or tow the vehicle with the all wheels off the ground.
If the electric motor switch is in the "ON" position, the Active Stability Control (ASC) system may operate, resulting in an accident. Make sure the electric motor switch is in the "ACC" position before towing.
WARNING
When trying to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, make sure that there are no people nearby. The rocking motion can make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward or backward, and injure any bystanders.
On wet roads
Operation under adverse driving conditions
N00837200747
If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, mud or snow
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. Do not spin the wheels. Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can cause transmission failure. If your vehicle is still stuck after several rocking attempts, call for a commercial tow truck service.
CAUTION
Do not drive on a flooded road. If you drive on a flooded road, not only the electric motor unit stops but also a failure like electric leakage or short circuit may occur. If you inevitably had to run on a flooded road and the vehicle was exposed to water, be sure to have your vehicle inspected by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
When driving in rain, on water-covered roads, or through a car wash, water could get into the brake discs and make them fail temporarily. In such cases, lightly press the brake pedal to see if they are working properly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly several times while driving to dry the brake pads or linings, then check them again.
When driving in rain, a layer of water may form between the tires and the road surface (aquaplaning). This loosens your tires' grip on the road, making it difficult to steer or brake properly. When driving on a wet road:
· Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.
CAUTION
· Do not drive on worn tires. · Always keep the tires at the correct infla-
tion pressures.
On snowy or icy roads
When driving on a road covered with snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. There may be state or local regulations about using snow tires. Always check the regu-
8 lations in your local area before using
them. Refer to the section entitled "Snow tires" on page 9-15 and "Tire chains" on page 9-16. Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the brakes. Allow extra distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sudden braking. If a skid occurs when the accelerator pedal is depressed, take your foot off the pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the skid. Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), hold the brake pedal down firmly and keep it depressed. Do not pump the brake pedal which will result in reduced braking performance.
For emergencies 8-13
Operation under adverse driving conditions
After parking on snowy or icy road, it may be difficult to move your vehicle due to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the accelerator pedal little by little to move the vehicle after confirming safety of the vehicle.
CAUTION
· parked too closely against a curb or parking block, or by the side of a road with curbstones;
· driven on a steep slope.
CAUTION
Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly. The vehicle could start moving when it breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in an accident.
8
On a bumpy or rutted road
Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy or rutted roads or over potholes etc.
CAUTION
Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes can damage the tires and wheels. Wheels with low-profiles tires or underinflated tires are especially at risk for damage.
The vehicle's body, bumper, muffler and other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
· driven over a step (for example, at the entrance or exit of a parking lot);
8-14 For emergencies
Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2
Hood ................................................................................................9-3
View under the hood and electric motor unit room .........................9-4
Coolant/Hot water heater fluid ........................................................9-4
Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-7
Brake fluid .......................................................................................9-7
12V starter battery ...........................................................................9-7
Tires ...............................................................................................9-10
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-16 Parking brake lever stroke .............................................................9-16
9
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-16
General maintenance .....................................................................9-17
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-18
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-18
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-18
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-21
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-28
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-28
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-30
Service precautions
Service precautions
N00937301414
High voltage components and wiring cables are located as shown in the figure below.
Taking regular care of your vehicle helps preserve its value and appearance as long as possible. This vehicle is an electric vehicle and is equipped with many high-voltage components. Refer to "High-voltage components" on page 3-34. You can do some of the maintenance work described in this manual by yourself, but the rest must be performed only by a certified iMiEV dealer.
9 If you discover a malfunction or other problem, have it corrected by a certified i-MiEV dealer. Also follow the instructions and take note of the precautions for each procedure.
WARNING
Never touch, remove or disassemble the high- voltage components including highvoltage wires colored orange and their connectors. Doing so can result in a fire, property damage, electrocution and serious injury or death. These components are affixed with a label indicating precautions for handling. Follow the instructions on the label. Take your vehicle to a certified i-MiEV dealer for any necessary maintenance.
1- Regular charge port 2- MCU 3- Main drive lithium-ion battery 4- Heater 5- Air conditioner compressor 6- High voltage connector 7- Service plug 8- Electric motor (Electric motor unit) 9- On board charger/DC-DC converter 10- Quick charge port
WARNING
When servicing the vehicle, make sure that the electric motor switch is in the "LOCK" position and the charging cable is disconnected. Failure to do so could result in an electric shock.
WARNING
When checking or servicing under the hood or the coolant reserve tank, be sure the electric motor unit is stopped and it has had a chance to cool down.
If you need to work under the hood with the electric motor unit on, be careful that your clothing, hair, etc. does not get caught in the fan or other moving parts.
The fan can turn on automatically even if the electric motor unit is not running. Turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position to be safe while you are working under the hood.
Do not smoke or allow open flames around the 12V starter battery.
Be extremely careful when working around the 12V starter battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Handling your vehicle's parts and materials in the wrong way can injure you. Ask a certified i-MiEV dealer if you have questions.
CAUTION
The components inside the electric motor unit room may be very hot to the touch. Make sure all components have sufficiently cooled before beginning an inspection. These components are affixed with a label indicating precautions for handling. Follow the instructions on the label.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance
CAUTION
When replacing the 12V starter battery, remove the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals after turning the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position and waiting at least 2 minutes. If the 12V starter battery terminal is removed just after the electric motor switch is turned to the "LOCK" position, this may cause damage to electric components. If the electric motor unit warning light illuminates, do not replace the 12V starter battery. Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Hood To open
Hood Release the safety lever (A) and lift the hood.
N00937500549
Use the hood release lever (located under the instrument panel near the passenger's door) to unlock the hood.
Pull the lever toward you to release the hood latch.
NOTE
9 To prevent damage to the hood and wipers,
make sure the wipers are at resting position when you open the hood.
Support the hood by inserting the support prop (B) into its slot on the underside of the hood arm.
Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See a certified i-MiEV dealer for details.
WARNING
Never use the release lever to unlatch the hood while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the hood is locked.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3
View under the hood and electric motor unit room
CAUTION
Always insert the support prop into the hole specially made for it. Propping the hood at any other place could cause the prop to slip out and lead to an accident.
The hood prop can fall out if the hood is lifted by a strong wind.
To close
Make sure the hood is securely locked by softly lifting the centre of the hood.
9
CAUTION
Make sure the hood is firmly closed before driving. If you drive without the hood completely closed, it could open up while driving.
NOTE
If this does not close the hood properly, drop it again from a slightly higher position.
Do not push down strongly on the hood. Depending on how strongly or where you push down, you could create a dent in the hood.
View under the hood and electric motor unit room
N00937600700
Under the hood
Electric motor unit room
1- Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2- 12V starter battery 3- Hot water heater reservoir 4- Brake fluid reservoir 5- Coolant reservoir
Coolant/Hot water heater fluid
N00937800539
To check the coolant level
Slowly lower the hood about 12 inches (30 cm), then let it drop from its own weight.
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when closing the hood.
WARNING
Before checking the coolant level, make sure the electric motor switch is in the "Lock" position to avoid the risk of an electrical shock that can result in serious injury or death.
9-4 Vehicle care and maintenance
WARNING
The room under the hood and the electric motor unit room (located under the luggage room carpet) can be very hot after driving. Wait until they have cooled down.
Coolant
1. Open the liftgate.
NOTE
A heat insulating material is attached to the luggage room floor carpet. To remove the luggage floor carpet, grasp and lift up both the carpet fabric and the heat insulating material.
3. Turn the 4 screws on the front and rear of the electric motor unit room lid (C) counterclockwise to loosen and remove them, and then remove the electric motor unit room lid (C).
Coolant/Hot water heater fluid 4. Check the coolant level in the reservoir
(D). While the motor is cold, the coolant level must always be between the "F (FULL)" and the "L (LOW)" marks. If necessary, add coolant. Refer to "To add coolant" on page 9-6.
FULL
LOW
9
2. Peel off the Velcro fastener (A) to remove the luggage room floor carpet (B).
WARNING
Never touch components inside the electric motor unit room except the reservoir (D).
NOTE
When laying the electric motor unit room lid on the ground, leave the underside of the lid with the rubber surface facing up. If the underside is facing downward debris and other foreign material could get on the rubber surface and prevent proper reinstallation of the electric motor unit room lid.
5. Reinstall the electric motor unit room lid and the luggage room floor carpet by following the removal procedures in reverse.
Hot water heater fluid
The reservoir (A) is located under the hood.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-5
Coolant/Hot water heater fluid
The coolant level in this reservoir should be kept between the "F (FULL)" and the "L
If you need to add coolant often, the cooling system should be pressure-tested for leaks.
Reservoir cap
(LOW)" marks when measured while the Take your vehicle to a certified i-MiEV
N00955800010
electric motor is cold. If necessary, add coolant. Refer to "To add coolant" on page 9-6.
FULL
dealer for testing.
CAUTION
Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any coolants that contain them. Using the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
The reservoir cap (E) must be tightly sealed to prevent losing coolant which may result in electric motor or nearby parts of the room under the hood damage. Only use a Genuine Mitsubishi Parts reservoir cap, or an approved equivalent.
LOW
9
parts. The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-
fers depending on the expected ambient temperature. Above -31 °F (-35 °C): 50 % concentration of anti-freeze Below -31 °F (-35 °C): 60 % concentration
WARNING
Wait for the electric motor to cool down before opening the reservoir cap. Otherwise hot steam or boiling coolant could spray up from the reservoir and scald you.
of anti-freeze
You can check the concentration level with a gauge from an automotive supply store, or a
Points to remember
To add coolant
N00955900024
Use "Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium" or an equivalent*.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, nonnitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides excellent protection against corrosion and rust formation on all metals, including aluminum.
certified i-MiEV dealer or service station can check it for you. Do not use water to adjust the concentration of coolant. Do not top off the tank with plain water only. Water by itself boils at a lower temperature and does not stop rust or freezing. If the water freezes, it will damage your cooling system. Do not use tap water. It can cause corrosion and rust.
N00955700019
Do not overfill the reservoir. Your vehicle uses a special reservoir cap
that stays sealed and keeps the pressure in the reservoir below the allowable pres-
sure. If you need to change the cap, use the exact same kind. Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
ator with the proper gauge, and only when it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the contents of the reservoir must be protected
against freezing. Keep the front of the radiator and con-
denser clean.
9-6 Vehicle care and maintenance
Washer fluid
N00938600303
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is under the hood. Check the washer fluid level at regular intervals and add washer fluid to reservoir if necessary. Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid level.
Brake fluid
N00938700261
To check the fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the "MAX" and "MIN" marks on the reservoir.
Washer fluid If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Fluid type
Use the recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water out.
CAUTION
FULL
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
9 will damage the seals.
Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
1/2
damage painted surfaces.
Use only the listed brake fluid. Different
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
During cold weather
The brake fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality.
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid. Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
the brake fluid from evaporating.
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield antifreeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The brake fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when doing other work under the hood. The brake system should also be checked for leaks at the same time. If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a short length of time, it indicates a leak in the brake system.
12V starter battery
N00939100914
The condition of the 12V starter battery is very important to keep the vehicle's electrical system working properly. Check the 12V starter battery regularly.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-7
12V starter battery
Removing and installing the 12V starter battery upper cover
N00901300054
To remove
1. Turn the plastic nut (A) counterclockwise, and then remove the 12V starter battery upper cover (B).
9
NOTE
Be careful not to lose the removed plastic nut.
To install
1. Install the 12V starter battery upper cover (B) onto the 12V starter battery, and then push the plastic nut (A) in the direction shown by the arrows to secure the cover.
9-8 Vehicle care and maintenance
CAUTION
Be sure to install the 12V starter battery upper cover. Otherwise, the battery electrolyte may spill and cause a malfunction.
When installing the 12V starter battery upper cover and plastic nut do not touch the cooling fan or other moving parts under the hood. Be especially careful that the cables, your clothing or hair, etc., do not get caught in the cooling fan or other moving parts.
Checking 12V starter battery electrolyte level
N00901500069
Before checking the 12V starter battery electrolyte level, remove the 12V starter battery's upper cover. The electrolyte level must be between the limits shown on the outside of the 12V starter battery. Fill it with distilled water as needed. The inside of the 12V starter battery is divided into several compartments. Take the cap off of each compartment and fill to the mark. Do not fill above the top line because a spill during driving could cause damage.
NOTE
Be sure to install the plastic nut in the correct direction.
WARNING
If the 12V starter battery goes flat, be sure to check the 12V starter battery electrolyte level before connecting booster cables.
WARNING
After checking the 12V starter battery electrolyte level, make sure the caps are fitted securely.
If any of the caps cannot be re-secured to the 12V starter battery, replace the 12V starter battery.
Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corrosive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or discolor them. And if gets on your skin or in your eyes, it can cause burns or blindness. Please observe the following handling instructions: · If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of water and neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water. · If electrolyte gets on your hands or clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them with water immediately and get immediate medical attention.
During cold weather
N00901600057
The 12V starter battery is weaker in cold temperatures. This has to do with its chemical and physical properties and is why a very cold 12V starter battery, especially one with a
low charge, will have a hard time starting your vehicle. It is recommended that you have your 12V starter battery and charging system checked by a certified i-MiEV dealer before the start of cold weather. If necessary, have it charged. This will guarantee more reliable starting, and longer 12V starter battery life.
Disconnection and connection
N00901701114
To disconnect the 12V starter battery cable, stop the electric motor. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal first, then the positive (+) terminal. To reconnect the 12V starter battery, first connect the positive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, before starting the vehicle.
WARNING
Never disconnect the 12V starter battery while the electric motor unit is running, or you could damage the vehicle's electrical parts.
Never short-circuit the 12V starter battery. This could cause it to overheat and be damaged.
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from the 12V starter battery because the 12V starter battery could explode.
12V starter battery
WARNING
When installing the 12V starter battery, start connection with the positive (+) terminal. If connection is started from the negative (-) terminal, sparks will occur if the positive (+) terminal touches any other parts, and this may cause the 12V starter battery to explode.
NOTE
Remove the 12V starter battery upper cover before disconnecting the terminal of 12V starter battery. Refer to "Removing and
9 installing the 12V starter battery upper
cover" on page 9-8. Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
necting or connecting the positive (+) terminal of the 12V starter battery. Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the 12V starter battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-9
Tires
WARNING
Open doors and windows in any closed
space where you may be charging or
working with the 12V starter battery.
Always wear protective clothing and gog-
gles when working with the 12V starter
battery, or have a skilled automobile tech-
nician do it.
If you are quick-charging your 12V
starter battery, first disconnect the 12V
starter battery cables.
In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure
to disconnect the negative (-) terminal
first, and reconnect it last.
9
If the electrolyte level is very low, have the 12V starter battery checked at a certified
i-MiEV dealer.
12V starter battery terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION
When replacing the 12V starter battery, remove the connected positive (+) and negative (-) terminals after turning the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position and waiting at least 1 minute. If the 12V starter battery terminal is removed just after the electric motor switch is turned to the "LOCK" position, this may cause damage to components of the electric motor unit.
9-10 Vehicle care and maintenance
NOTE
Before cleaning the 12V starter battery, tighten all the filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.
Check each 12V starter battery terminal for corrosion. If necessary, clean the terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or tightening them.
Check to see that the 12V starter battery is securely installed and cannot be moved. Also check each terminal for tightness.
If you will not be driving your vehicle for a long period of time, remove the 12V starter battery and store it in a place where the 12V starter battery fluid will not freeze. Memory data for settings made by the user may be erased when the 12V starter battery is removed. If this happens, reset the settings again using the relevant procedures. The 12V starter battery only should be stored with a full charge.
Tires
N00939201619
WARNING
Driving with tires that are worn, damaged or improperly inflated is dangerous. These type tire conditions will adversely affect vehicle performance. These type tire conditions can also cause a tread separation or blowout which may result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
Tires degrade over time with age even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires over 6 years generally be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms:
Cold tire pressure: · The measured pressure after the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or · The measured pressure when the vehicle is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having been parked for three hours.
Maximum inflation pressure: the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
Recommended inflation pressure: the inflation pressure for optimum tire performance.
Tires
Intended outboard sidewall: · The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
Section width: the linear distance between Size Designation
the exteriors of the sidewalls of an
bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or · The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passen-
inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands. Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
cords and that is shaped to fit the rim. Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords. Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
tire. Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the tire
EXAMPLE:P215/65R15
P
Passenger car tire size based on U.S.A. design standards
215
Section width in millimeters (mm.)
Aspect ratio in percent (%) 65 Ratio of section height to
section width of tire.
ger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000
beads are seated. Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the
pounds or less.
bead seat.
Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by Groove: the space between two adjacent R
its manufacturer as primarily intended for
tread ribs.
Construction code
·"R" means radial construc- 9
tion. · "D" means diagonal or
use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
bias construction.
passenger vehicles. Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
Tire Markings
15 Rim diameter in inches (in)
contact with the road. Tread rib: a tread section running circum-
ferentially around a tire. Tread separation: pulling away of the
tread from the tire carcass. Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
bears the load. Sidewall: portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-11
Tires
NOTE
European/Japanese metric tire
sizing is based on European/Jap-
anese design standards. Tires
designed to these standards have
the tire size molded into the
sidewall beginning with the sec-
tion width. The letter "P" is
absent from this tire size desig-
nation. Example: 215/65R15
96H.
9
LT (Light Truck) -metric tire sizing is based on U.S.A. design
standards. The size designation
for LT-metric tires is the same as
for P-metric tires except for the
letters "LT" that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size
designation.
Example:
LT235/85R16.
Service Description
EXAMPLE: 95H
Load index
95
A numerical code associated with the maximum load
a tire can carry.
Speed symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions. H The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits)
Maximum Load
Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
WARNING
Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
Maximum Pressure
Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire but the date
9-12 Vehicle care and maintenance
Tires
code may only be on one side. Look
for the TIN on the outboard side of 04 tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the
TIN is not found on the outboard side
Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 1504
Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
Treadwear
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
DOT
Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
Sustained high temperature can cause the The treadwear grade is a comparative rating material of the tire to degenerate and reduce based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tire life, and excessive temperature can lead under controlled conditions on a specified to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
9 government test course. For example, a tire sponds to a level of performance which all
graded 150 would wear one and one-half passenger car tires must meet under the Fed(11/2) times as well on the government course eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. as a tire graded 100. The relative performance Grades B and A represent higher levels of of tires depends upon the actual conditions of performance on the laboratory test wheel than their use, however, and may depart signifi- the minimum required by law.
Code representing the tire cantly from the norm due to variations in
MA manufacturing location. (2 digits)
driving habits, service practices and differ- Tire inflation pressures
ences in road characteristics and climate. N00939300873
Code representing the tire L9 size. (2 digits) ABCD Code used by tire manufac-
turer. (1 to 4 digits)
Number representing the 15 week in which the tire was
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause problems in three major areas:
Safety
manufactured. (2 digits)
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-13
Tires
Too little pressure increases flexing in the
Tire size
Front
Rear
Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
tire and can cause tire failure. Too much
pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and
145/65R15 250 KPA,
72H
36 PSI
--
mended pressures. (See the tire and loading information placard attached to the sill of the driver's door.)
potholes could then cause tire damage that may result in tire failure.
175/60R15 81H
--
250 KPA, 36 PSI
Stay within the recommended load limits. Make sure that the weight of any load in
Economy
your vehicle is evenly distributed.
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven Tire pressures should be checked, and wear patterns in the tire tread. These adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
Drive at safe speeds. After filling your tires to the correct pres-
abnormal wear patterns will reduce the Pressures should be checked more often
sure, check them for damage and air
tread life, and the tire will have to be whenever weather temperatures change
leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
replaced sooner.
severely, because tire pressures change with
valve stems.
Too little pressure also makes it harder for outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed on
the tire to roll, and this uses up more the placard are always "cold inflation pres- Replacing tires and wheels
9 power. Ride comfort and vehicle stability
sure". Cold inflation pressure is measured after the
N00939600427
The superior riding experience built into vehicle has been parked for at least three
CAUTION
your vehicle partly depends on the correct hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an after having been parked for three hours.
Avoid using different size tires and wheels from the ones listed, and avoid the combined
uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little Cold inflation pressure must not go above the
use of different types of tires and wheels.
pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to maximum values molded into the tire side-
Using different size or type tires and wheels
respond.
wall. After driving several miles, your tire
may affect driving safety.
Unequal tire pressures can make steering inflation pressure may increase 14 to 41 KPA,
your vehicle uneven and unpredictable.
2 to 6 PSI from the cold inflation pressure.
Refer to "Tires and wheels" on page 11-6. Even if a wheel has the same rim size and
The correct tire pressure for your vehicle is listed on the placard attached to the sill of the driver's door. (Refer to "Tire and loading information plac-
Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the specified cold pressure, or your tire pressure will be too low. You should also take the following safety precautions:
offset as the specified type of wheel, its shape may prevent it from being fitted correctly. Consult a certified i-MiEV dealer before using wheels that you have.
ard" on page 11-3.)
The recommended inflation pressures should
be used for the tires listed below.
9-14 Vehicle care and maintenance
Tires
CAUTION
Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels should be used, because your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks and sensor damage, as it will not be possible to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
Tread wear indicators
Tire maintenance
N00939700170
N00939800214
Tire rotation
N00939900518
Because the front and rear tires and wheels are not the same size, do not rotate the front and rear tires.
WARNING
Rotating tires would compromise the stability and drivability of the vehicle and could lead to a serious accident.
The following maintenance steps are recom-
mended:
1- Location of the tread wear indicator
Snow tires
Check tire pressures regularly. Have regular maintenance done on the
2- Tread wear indicator
N00940000359
9
In some areas of the country, snow tires are
wheel balance and front and rear suspen- Tread wear indicators are built into the origi- required for winter driving. If snow tires are
sion alignment.
nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help required in your area, you must choose snow
you know when your tires should be replaced. tires of the same size and type as the original
Many states have laws requiring that you tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires
replace your tires at this point.
should also be installed on all four wheels.
These indicators are molded into the bottom Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
of the tread grooves and will appear when the can be reduced.
tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch Even where laws may permit it, snow tires
(1.6 mm).
should not be operated at sustained speeds
When the bands appear next to one another in over 75 mph (120 km/h).
two or more places, replace your tires.
NOTE
CAUTION
If flange nuts are used on your vehicle,
Tire wear indicators can have different marks and locations depending on the tire manufac-
change to tapered nuts when using snow tires with steel wheels.
turer.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-15
Brake pedal free play
CAUTION
Only Mitsubishi Motors genuine wheels should be used, because your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system. Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks and sensor damage, as it will not be possible to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
Tire chains
N00940100129
9
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle. The clearance between the chains and the
If the free play is not within these limits, take your vehicle to a certified i-MiEV dealer for adjustment.
WARNING
Continued operation of the vehicle with the parking brake lever out of adjustment may result in the vehicle moving when
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear- Parking brake lever stroke
unattended.
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
aged.
N00940400236
Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up Wiper blades
Brake pedal free play
N00940300310
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn off the electric motor unit and press the brake pedal several times with your foot. Then press the pedal down with your fingers until you first feel resistance.
slowly and count the number of clicks of the ratchet.
Parking brake lever stroke: 6 to 7 notches
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by the ratchet after pulling.
N00940701210
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean them regularly to remove deposits of salt and road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the blades and glass areas. Replace the blades if they continue to streak or smear.
Brake pedal free play: .1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
9-16 Vehicle care and maintenance
General maintenance
NOTE
Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long time. This wears out the rubber and can scratch the glass.
During cold weather
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or rear window, do not operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
General maintenance
N00941500289
The next pages list the maintenance service recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. In addition to the general maintenance that needs to be performed at the times listed, there are other parts which do not usually need regular maintenance. But, if any of these parts stops working properly, your vehicle performance could suffer. Have these items checked if you notice a problem with them.
Brake hoses
N00941700047
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked for:
Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is showing through any cracks or worn spots in the rubber hose cover, the hose should be replaced. The brakes can fail if the hose wears through.
Improper installation may cause twisting, or wheel, tire or chassis interference.
NOTE
When replacing front wiper blade assembly with a wiper blade for use in cold regions, it is necessary to adjust the washer nozzle (A) spray positions. Always contact a certified iMiEV dealer when replacing front wiper blade with a wiper blade for use in cold regions.
When removing snow and frost, be careful not to damage the washer nozzle which are attached to the wiper arm.
See a certified i-MiEV dealer for assistance,
if you have any questions.
Ball joint, steering linkage seals
9
Disc brake pads, rear drum brake linings and rear wheel cylinders
and drive shaft boots
N00941800077
Check the following parts for damage and grease leaks:
N00941600033
Good brakes are essential to safe driving. Check the brake pads and brake linings for wear and check the rear wheel cylinders for leaks. For good braking performance, replace the brake pads with the same type pads as the originals.
Ball joint boots of the front suspension and steering linkage
Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch
N00942500114
The hood lock release mechanism and hood safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and oiled when needed for easy movement and to
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-17
For cold and snowy weather
stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts
Additional equipment (For
of the hood latch and release lever. Work the regions where snow is encoun-
Fuses
N00942800885
grease into the hood lock mechanism until all tered)
the movable surfaces are covered.
Fuse block location
Also, put a light coat of the same grease on It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
N00901000107
the safety catch wherever moving parts touch. handled spade in the vehicle during the win- To prevent damage to the electrical system
ter so that you can clear away snow if you get from short-circuiting or overloading, each
For cold and snowy weather
N00942600131
stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for the windshield, side and rear window are also
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The fuse blocks are located in the passenger compartment and in under the hood.
Ventilation slots
useful.
NOTE
9 The ventilation slots in front of the wind- Fusible links shield should be brushed clear after a heavy
N00942700321
Spare fuses are not provided. Please purchase from a certified i-MiEV dealer.
snowfall so that the operation of the heating The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if
and ventilation systems will not be impaired. a large current attempts to flow through cer- Passenger compartment
tain electrical systems.
Weatherstripping
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, hood, etc., they should be treated with silicone grease.
In case of a melted fusible link, see a certified i-MiEV dealer for inspection and replacement. For the fusible links, please refer to "Fuse load capacities" on page 9-19.
The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located in front of the driver's seat at the position shown in the illustration. Press the tab (A) and remove the fuse cover (B).
WARNING
Fusible links must not be replaced by any other device. Failing to fit the correct fusible link may result in fire in the vehicle, property destruction and serious or fatal injuries at any time.
9-18 Vehicle care and maintenance
Fuse load capacities
N00954801313
This fuse list shows the names of the electrical systems and their fuse capacities. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same capacity as the original.
Passenger compartment fuse location table
Under the hood
Under the hood, the fuse block is located as shown in the illustration. Press the tab (A) and remove the cover.
Fuses
No.
Symbol
Electrical system
Capacity
1
Tail light (left)
7.5 A
2
Cigarette lighter/ 12 V power outlet
15 A
3 --
--
--
4
Starter
7.5 A
5
Audio amplifier
20 A
6--
--
--
7
Tail light (right)
7.5 A
8
Outside rearview mirrors
7.5 A
9
Control unit
9
(Electric motor
7.5 A
unit)
10
Control unit
7.5 A
11
Rear fog light
10 A
12
Door lock
15 A
13
Interior lights (Dome lights)
10 A
14
Rear window wiper 15 A
15
Gauges
7.5 A
16
Relay
7.5 A
17
Heated seat
20 A
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-19
Fuses
No.
Symbol
Electrical system
Capacity
Under the hood fuse location table
18
Option
10 A
19
Heated outside rearview mirrors
7.5 A
20
Windshield wiper 20 A
21
Back-up lights
7.5 A
22
Defogger
30 A
23
Heater
30 A
24
12V starter battery 30 A*
9 25
26
Radio
10 A
Electronic controlled unit
15 A
27
--
Electronic controlled unit
7.5 A
*: Fusible link
Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.
The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse.
No.
Symbol
Electrical system
Capacity
1--
--
--
2
12V starter battery 30 A*
3
Electric motor switch
40 A*
4
Radiator fan motor 40 A*
5
Power window control
40 A*
6
Brake electric vacuum pump
30 A*
7
Electric motor unit control
15 A
8
Stop lights (Brake lights)
15 A
No.
Symbol
Electrical system
Capacity
9
Front fog lights 15 A
Water pump
10
(Electric motor 15 A
unit)
11
Charge
10 A
12
Hazard warning flasher
10 A
13
Horn
10 A
14
Daytime running lights
10 A
Main drive lithium-
15
ion battery fan 15 A
motor
16
Water pump (Air conditioning)
10 A
17
Headlight (low beam) (right)
20 A
18
Headlight (low beam) (left)
20 A
19
Headlight (high beam) (right)
10 A
20
Headlight (high beam) (left)
10 A
*: Fusible link
9-20 Vehicle care and maintenance
Some fuses may not be installed on your vehicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.
The table above shows the main equipment corresponding to each fuse.
Replacement of light bulbs
Identification of fuse
N00901100078
Capacity
Color
7.5 A
Brown
10 A
Red
15 A
Blue
20 A
Yellow
30 A
Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible link type)
40 A
Green (fusible link type)
Fuse replacement
N00954900115
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the electrical item connected to the fuse and turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position.
2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the inside of the fuse cover in the passenger compartment.
3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse block.
B- Fuse is OK C- Blown fuse
9 5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity securely into the appropriate slot.
4. Use the fuse location diagrams and their corresponding tables, to check the fuse that is related to the problem. If the fuse is not blown, something else must be causing the problem. Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer to have the problem checked.
CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring to heat up and could cause a fire.
If the replacement fuse blows again after a short time, have the electrical system checked by a certified i-MiEV dealer to find and correct the cause.
Replacement of light bulbs
N00942900336
Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-21
Replacement of light bulbs
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy the bulb when it gets hot.
CAUTION
Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being turned off. When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool sufficiently before touching it. You could otherwise be burned.
Bulb capacity
N00943000099
The bulb should only be replaced with a new bulb with the same rating and type. The type and rating are listed on the base of the bulb.
Outside
Front
N00950301916
NOTE
If you are unsure of how to carry out the
9
work as required, it is recommended that these procedures be carried out by a certified
i-MiEV dealer.
Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a light and lens.
When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
phenomenon as when window glass mists up
on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-
tional problem.
When the light is switched on, the heat will
remove the fog. However, if water collects
inside the light, please have it checked by a
certified i-MiEV dealer.
Description
ANSI
Wattage
Trade No. or Bulb
type
1- Headlight, low beam
55 W
H11
2- Head light, high beam
60 W 9005 HB3
3- Front fog light 35 W
H8
Description
ANSI
Wattage
Trade No. or Bulb
type
4- Daytime running light
13 W
P13W
5- Front turn signal light
21 W
W21W
6- Parking light
5 W
W5W
7- Front sidemarker light
5 W
W5W
NOTE
Check with a certified i-MiEV dealer when the headlight and the parking light need to be repaired or replaced.
Rear
9-22 Vehicle care and maintenance
Description
ANSI
Wattage
Trade No. or Bulb
type
8- High-mounted stop light
5 W
W5W
9- Tail and stop light
--
--
10- Rear turn signal light
21 W WY21W
11- Back-up light 21 W W21W
12- License plate light
5 W
W5W
13- Rear sidemarker light
5 W
W5W
14- Regular charge port light
--
--
Inside
Description 1- Dome light (Rear) 2- Dome light
(Front)/Reading lights
N00950400617
Replacement of light bulbs
*
Wattage 8 W
8 W
*: Front of the vehicle
NOTE
9 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
driver to keep from scratching the lens.
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly together by turning it counterclockwise.
NOTE
The tail and stop lights along with the regular charge port light use LEDs rather than bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Adjustment of headlight aim
N00943200349
The alignment of the headlights should be checked by a certified i-MiEV dealer.
Front side-marker lights
N00915501184
1. Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the end of the light nearer the rear of the body and pry gently to remove the light.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-23
Replacement of light bulbs
Front turn signal lights/Front fog lights/Daytime running lights
N00943401407
1. To create enough work space, turn the steering wheel all the way in the same direction to the side you wish to replace.
2. Remove the clip (A) and bolts (B), then lift the cover (C).
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
9
NOTE
When installing the light assembly, push in
the end facing the front of the vehicle first.
*: Front of the vehicle
9-24 Vehicle care and maintenance
3. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it.
D- Front turn signal light E- Front fog light F- Daytime running light
4. Remove the bulb as follows. [Front turn signal light] Pull the bulb out of the socket. [Front fog light and daytime running light] While holding down the tab (G), pull out the bulb assembly (H).
Front turn signal light Front fog light Daytime running light
CAUTION
Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare hand, dirty glove, etc. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the fog lights are used. If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with alcohol and let it dry completely before installing the bulb.
Replacement of light bulbs
3. Move the light unit toward the rear of the vehicle and remove the pins (B) of the light unit from the vehicle.
9
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
CAUTION
Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
Rear combination lights
N00943700487
1. Open the liftgate. (Refer to "Liftgate" on page 5-11.)
2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light unit and remove the light unit.
4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-25
Replacement of light bulbs
C- Tail and stop light (LED) - cannot be replaced
D- Rear turn signal light
6. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
E- Back up light
9
Rear side-marker lights
NOTE
The tail and stop lights use LEDs rather than bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact a certified i-MiEV dealer.
N00935400108
1. Remove the clips (A), then lift the cover (B).
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
2. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to remove it.
High-mounted stop light
N00943900128
1. Remove the mounting screws (A) and remove the light unit.
9-26 Vehicle care and maintenance
Replacement of light bulbs
2. While holding down the tab (B), pull out the connector.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
9
3. Remove the screws (C) and then remove the bulb holder.
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
License plate lights
N00944001413
1. When removing the light unit (A), push it toward the left side of the vehicle body.
2. Use a flat blade screwdriver into the tab (B) and pry gently to remove the lens.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-27
Vehicle care precautions
NOTE
CAUTION
When installing the light, insert tab (C) first
Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some
then align and insert tab (D).
are poisonous. Others are highly flammable.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their
fumes in a closed space. When you use any-
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be
sure to follow the instructions. Always open
your vehicle doors or windows when you're
cleaning the inside. Never use the following
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
· Gasoline
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
· Carbon Tetrachloride · Benzine
· Kerosene
9
Vehicle care precautions
N00945100195
· Naphtha · Acetone
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, perform regular maintenance using the proper materials and procedures. Be sure to use only those materials and procedures that meet your
· Turpentine · Paint Thinner · Lacquer Thinner · Nail Polish Remover
local environmental pollution control regula-
tions. Choose the materials you will use care- These can all be dangerous, and they all can
fully, to be sure that they do not contain damage your vehicle.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal steps in reverse.
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact a certified i-MiEV dealer for help in choosing these materials.
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle
N00945200079
After washing the inside of your vehicle with any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well ventilated area.
9-28 Vehicle care and maintenance
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not use organic substances (solvents, benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions. These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or cracking of the surface. If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.
NOTE
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and flocked parts
N00945300214
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth soaked in a mild soap and water solution.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thoroughly.
NOTE
Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protectants containing silicones or wax. Such products, when applied to the instrument panels or other parts, may cause reflections on the windshield and obscure vision. Also, if such products get on the switches of the electrical accessories, it may lead to failure of these accessories.
Upholstery
N00945500144
1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle, maintain the upholstery carefully and keep the interior clean. Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leather should be cleaned with an appropriate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a mild soap and water solution.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner and remove any stains with carpet cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth and spot remover.
Genuine leather (if so equipped)
N00945600275
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a soft cloth soaked in a mild soap and water solution.
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, wring it out well, and wipe off all the soap.
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather protecting agent on the genuine leather surface.
NOTE
9 If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew may grow. The genuine leather surface can be damaged
if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber brush. Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, acid or alkaline solvents can discolor the genuine leather surface and should not be used. The genuine leather surface may harden and shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight for long hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it in the shade as much as possible.
NOTE
If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush over the surface in one direction.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-29
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
N00945700061
To protect your vehicle's finish, wash it often and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, wash the vehicle from top to bottom. Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a chamois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and flanges of the doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to remain.
Foreign material
N00945800046
Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other foreign matters can damage the finish on your
9 vehicle. Generally, the longer any foreign material stays on the finish, the worse the damage. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible whenever the finish gets soiled.
Washing
N00945900627
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up from air, rain, snow or road surfaces can damage the paint and body of your vehicle if left on. Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your vehicle from this damage. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of
WARNING
Do not wash the vehicle while charging the main drive lithium-ion battery. Doing so could cause a fire or an electric shock.
Before washing the vehicle, make sure that the charging lid and the inner lid are completely closed. If the lid is open, the charging unit is exposed to water, resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
Do not pour water inside the electric motor unit room. Doing so could cause a fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, turn the electric motor switch to the "LOCK" position.
Do not use a high pressure washing machine to clean the underneath of the vehicle. Doing so might cause the electric motor unit problem or malfunction.
CAUTION
When washing the underside of your vehicle or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical parts in under the hood. This may damage them. Be careful also when washing the underbody. Do not spray water up under the hood.
Avoid automatic car washers that use rotating brushes. These brushes may scratch the paint surface and make it dull. Scratches are more noticeable on darker colored vehicles.
Some hot water washing equipment uses high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. This heated water may damage your vehicle's resin parts. It can flood the interior of the vehicle. Therefore, be sure of the following:
· Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches (70 cm) away from the vehicle body.
· When washing around the door glass, hold the nozzle at a distance of more than 28 inches (70 cm) and at right angles to the glass surface.
Make sure to do the following when using an automatic car wash, with help from either this manual or the car wash operator, to avoid damaging your vehicle:
· Fold the outside mirrors.
· Remove the antenna.
· Tape the wiper arm assembly.
9-30 Vehicle care and maintenance
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
During cold weather
Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush on the painted surfaces. After the wax has the compound from the surface and apply a
Salt and other chemicals spread on winter roads in some geographical areas can have a detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody. You should flush the underbody with a high
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You should wax when the painted surfaces are cool.
coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
Damaged paint
N00946200089
pressure hose every time you wash the outside of your vehicle. Take special care to remove mud or other debris which could trap and hold salt and moisture. After washing your vehicle, wipe off all waterdrops from the rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
CAUTION
Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should not be used. These waxes remove rust and stain effectively from the paintwork, but are harmful to the finish on the paint and the plate, because they also remove clearcoat. They are also harmful to other glossy surfaces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.
Do not use gasoline, kerosene, benzine or
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should be touched up as soon as possible with touch-up paint to prevent corrosion. Check body areas facing the road or the tires carefully for damage to the paint caused by flying stones, etc. The paint code number for your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
9 information code plate. Refer to "Vehicle
information code plate" on page 11-2.
NOTE
When the door is frozen, opening it by force may tear off or crack the rubber gasket installed around the door. Pour warm water to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe off the water after opening the door. To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-
paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt from the vehicle surface. Do not put wax on the areas having black matte coating because it can cause uneven discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get wax on them, wipe the wax off right away with a soft cloth and warm water.
Cleaning plastic parts
N00946300211
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts. If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black rough surface of the bumper, molding or lights, the surface may appear white in color.
cant.
In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
Polishing
and a soft cloth or chamois.
Waxing
N00946000247
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or when water does not bead up on the paint.
N00946100059
If painted surfaces have been severely damaged and lost their original luster and color tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine polishing compound. Avoid limiting your polishing to the damaged surface only; polish a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing
CAUTION
Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough scrubber as these may damage the plastic surface.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-31
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not use wax containing compounds (polishing powder) which may damage the plastic surface.
Do not let the plastic parts get soiled with
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois leather or a soft cloth.
CAUTION
Do not use a brush or other hard implement
Replace the wiper blades when they no longer clean the windshield and rear window properly.
Under the hood
gasoline, oil, brake fluids, greases, paint
on the wheels.
N00947000127
thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery electrolyte). These fluids, etc., may crack, stain or discolor the plastic parts. If any of these get on the plastic parts, wipe them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse them immediately with water.
Doing so could scratch the wheels. Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could cause the coating on the wheels to peel or become discolored or stained. Do not directly apply hot water using a steam cleaner or by any other means.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical components under the hood, as this may cause damage. Do not allow any nearby parts (such as plastic parts) come into contact with sulphuric acid (12V starter battery electrolyte), which may
Contact with seawater or road salt used for crack, stain, or discolour them.
9 Chrome parts
N00946400065
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as possible.
If this occurs, wipe the parts with a soft cloth saturated with a mild detergent and water solution.
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome
Then immediately rinse the affected parts
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
Window glass
with plenty of water.
chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a
N00946600067
commercially available chrome polish.
The window glass can usually be cleaned
using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped)
can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
N00946500196
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. 2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-
not be removed easily with water. Rinse off the detergent after washing the wheel.
Wiper blades
N00946700097
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades.
9-32 Vehicle care and maintenance
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2 Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2 Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-3
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
N01047100171
This information is provided in compliance with the requirements of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers with information on reporting safety defects.
Uniform tire quality grading
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
10 ments in addition to these grades. The specific grade rating in each grade category is shown on the side wall of the tires on your vehicle.
Treadwear
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (11/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Reporting Safety Defects
N01047201515
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
NHTSA Headquarters 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE West Building Washington, DC 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Important facts to know in case of an accident
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
To contact Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 6400 Cypress, CA 90630-0064
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department P.O. Box 41009 4141 Dixie Road Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
For vehicles sold in Canada
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc. You may write to:
Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Important facts to know in
case of an accident
10
N01047300098
We hope you will never be involved in an accident, but there is always that potential danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and drive safely.
In the event of an accident
Remain calm. Check for injuries. Report all injuries to
the police, and, if necessary, call for an ambulance.
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident
Record all the details of the accident. This will provide you with accurate records of the accident for discussions with your insurance company and other persons who may be acting on your behalf.
Key information to discuss with your insurance company
Understand your repair estimate before
approving repairs. Choosing the repair shop and the brands
of parts that they use on your vehicle is
your decision. Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
10
Many times, to save money, your insurance company will recommend imitation
parts that do not meet the original specifi-
cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
or workmanship.
Mitsubishi Motors built-in protection
The strength and integrity built into your Mitsubishi vehicle is the result of a specific design referred to as "Energy Management". Individual body parts are designed to act as one unit in the event of an accident. Shock waves are absorbed by protective panels or are channeled around the passenger compart-
ment. This important feature is possible because high tensile steel is used in Mitsubishi panels and structural parts, something that cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturers of imitation parts. All Genuine Mitsubishi body panels and support brackets are designed and constructed as important protection features in the event of an accident. By replacing body parts with imitations, your vehicle may no longer meet original equipment specifications.
Consumer rights (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the country, State Insurance Commissioners have begun considering rules on the use of nonOEM parts. This could mean that repair shops will have to disclose to the consumer, when they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since regulations are not consistent on this point, remember you have a choice. So, if you want genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may have to specifically request them. Make certain your insurance company understands imitations are not to be used in the repair of your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built with the high quality and durability standards you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors replacements parts are your guarantee that your vehicle will have all the technological advantages and maintain the style and protection of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors. Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2 Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-4 Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4 Charging system specifications .....................................................11-5 Electric motor specifications .........................................................11-6 12V starter battery .........................................................................11-6 Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-6 Refill capacities .............................................................................11-7
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling
N01147400739
Keep a record of the chassis number and vehicle identification number. This information will assist the police if your vehicle is ever stolen.
2 - Vehicle identification num- 4 - Vehicle information code
ber plate
plate
11
1 - Vehicle emission control information label
The vehicle emission control information label is affixed in the location shown in the illustration.
The vehicle identification number is stamped in the location shown in the illustration. It is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield.
3 - Air conditioning label
The air conditioning label is affixed on the bulkhead as shown in the illustration.
The vehicle information code plate is located on the driver's door sill.
Chassis number
The chassis number is stamped behind the lid on the right side of the luggage room.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle labeling
Tire and loading information placard
N01148100599
The tire and loading information placard is located on the driver's door sill.
Certification label
N01148200239
The certification label is located on the driver's door sill.
Electric motor number
The electric motor number is stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration.
11
*- Front of the vehicle
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
Overall length Overall width Overall height Wheel base
Vehicle weights
Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) Front
Gross axle weight rating (GAWR) Rear
Vehicle capacity weight
11 Seating capacity
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle Seating capacity: the number of maximum occupants
144.7 in (3,675 mm) 62.4 in (1,585 mm) 63.6 in (1,615 mm) 100.4 in (2,550 mm)
3,329 lb (1,510 kg) 1,488 lb (675 kg) 1,962 lb (890 kg) 661 lb (300 kg)
4 persons
N01147501580 N01147601943
11-4 Specifications
Charging system specifications
Regular charging system
Rated input voltage Rated input frequency Rated current Maximum power consumption
Applicable standards
Quick charging system
Regular charging/ Quick charging system
Leakage current sensitivity in cable control box Applicable standards Maximum input current
Enclosure type
Charging system specifications
N01148501037
AC 240V (single phase)
AC 120V (single phase)
50 Hz/60 Hz
15 A (max)
8 A/12 A (max)*1
3.3 kVA*2
1.8 kVA*2
UL2594: Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment SAE J1772: (R) SAE Electric Vehicle and Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler CSA C22.2 No.107.1-01: General use power supplies
20 mA
CHAdeMO
125 A
Charge connector: Type 3s
11
Control box (CCID): Type 3
*1: When using a genuine charging cable with control box *2: When using a home or public charging device (EVSE: Electric Vehicles Supply Equipment)
Specifications 11-5
Electric motor specifications
Electric motor specifications
Electric motor model Maximum output Maximum torque
Y51 49 kW 196 N·m
12V starter battery
34B19L(S)
Battery is a 12 volt type.
Tires and wheels
11 Item
Tire
Size
Wheel
PCD
Offset
Front 145/65R15 72H
15x4J
3.93 in (100 mm) 1.37 in (35 mm)
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation holes)
NOTE
Contact a certified i-MiEV dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle. These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in this owner's manual.
Rear 175/60R15 81H
15x5J
11-6 Specifications
N01147301038 N01147801307 N01147900734
Refill capacities
No.
Item
1 Windshield washer fluid
2 Brake
3
Hot water heater fluid [Includes .42 qt (0.4 L) in reservoir]
4
Coolant [Includes 1.2 qt (1.1 L) in reservoir]
5 Transmission
6 Refrigerant (air conditioning)
Refill capacities
Capacity 2.0 qt (1.9 L) As required
Lubricants --
Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
N01148002143
2.0 qt (1.9 L) 5.4 qt (5.1 L)
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium or an equivalent*
.79 qt (0.75 L) Mitsubishi Motors Genuine ATF SPIII
Refer to the "Air conditioning label" on HFC-134a page 11-2
11 *: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
Specifications 11-7
Numerics
12V power outlet ................................ 5-76 12V starter battery ................................ 9-7
Specification .................................. 11-6
12V starter battery charging system warning light................................................. 5-45
A
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-7 Acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS) ....
5-23 Active stability control ........................ 5-28
ASC indicator................................. 5-30 ASC OFF indicator ......................... 5-30 ASC OFF switch ............................ 5-29 Skid control function....................... 5-29 Traction control function ................. 5-29 Air conditioning ................................... 7-4 Important air conditioning operating tips..
7-10 Air purifier ......................................... 7-11 Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-32 Antenna ............................................. 7-27 Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-25
Warning light ........................ 5-26, 5-27 ASC .................................................. 5-28 ASC indicator..................................... 5-30
ASC OFF indicator............................. 5-30
ASC OFF switch ................................ 5-29
Assist grip ......................................... 5-80
Audio AM/FM electronically tuned radio with CD player.................................... 7-11 Error codes .................................... 7-24 Handling of compact discs .............. 7-25 Steering wheel audio remote control switch 7-22
B
Back up lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Replacement .................................. 9-25
Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive shaft boots ....................................... 9-17
Battery 12V starter battery charging system warning light....................................... 5-45 Disconnection and connection ........... 9-9 During cold weather ......................... 9-9 Main drive lithium-ion battery ........... 3-3
Bluetooth® 2.0 interface ..................... 5-53
Brake Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-25 Braking ........................................... 6-5 Fluid ....................................... 9-7, 11-7 Hose ............................................. 9-17 Parking brake................................. 5-16
Alphabetical index
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-16 Pedal ............................................. 5-24 Pedal free play................................ 9-16 Power brakes.................................. 5-24 Service brake.................................. 5-24 Warning light ................................. 5-44
Brake assist system ............................. 5-25
Break-in recommendations .................... 5-2
Bulb capacity...................................... 9-22
C
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ..................................... 3-8
Capacities .......................................... 11-7
Card holder ............................... 5-76, 5-79
Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Certification label ............................... 11-3
Charging
12
Quick charging ............................... 3-27
Regular charging ................... 3-16, 3-26
Charging indicator .............................. 5-44
Charging Timer .................................. 3-40
Charging troubleshooting guide............ 3-31
Chassis number................................... 11-2
Child restraint..................................... 4-13
Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-10
Cleaning
12-1
Alphabetical index
Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-28 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-30 Clock................................................. 7-27 Cold Cautions and actions to deal with intense
cold............................................. 3-10 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ..
5-46 Consumer information ........................ 10-2 Coolant....................................... 9-4, 11-7 Cruising range ...................................... 3-4 Cruising range indicator ............. 5-37, 5-40 Cup holder ......................................... 5-80
D
Dash lights brightness indicator .. 5-37, 5-40
12 Daytime running lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Replacement .................................. 9-24 Defogger (rear window) ...................... 5-52 Dimensions ........................................ 11-4 Dimmer (high/low beam change) ......... 5-48 Dinghy towing ................................... 6-10 Disc brake pads .................................. 9-17 Dome light (Front)/Reading lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-23 Switch ........................................... 5-76
Dome light (Rear) Bulb capacity.................................. 9-23 Switch............................................ 5-78
Door-ajar warning light and buzzer ....... 5-45 Doors
Lock ............................................... 5-8 Power door locks ............................. 5-9 Driver's seat belt reminder/warning light...... 4-10 Driving during cold weather.................. 6-4 Driving, alcohol and drugs .................... 6-2
E
Economical driving .............................. 6-2 Electric motor
Number.......................................... 11-3 Specifications ................................. 11-6 Electric motor switch........................... 5-18 Electric motor unit warning light .......... 5-45 Electric power steering system (EPS) .... 5-27 Electric rear window defogger switch.... 5-52 Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ............................................. 5-2 Energy level gauge .............................. 5-41 Energy usage indicator......................... 5-37 EV charging cable ............................... 3-23
F
Floor mat ............................................. 6-2
Fluid Brake fluid.............................. 9-7, 11-7 Coolant................................... 9-4, 11-7 Hot water heater fluid .............. 9-4, 11-7 Washer fluid ........................... 9-7, 11-7
Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-7
Front fog lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Indicator ........................................ 5-44 Replacement .................................. 9-24 Switch ........................................... 5-49
Front seats............................................ 4-3
Front side-marker lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Replacement .................................. 9-23
Front turn signal lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Replacement .................................. 9-24
Fuses ................................................. 9-18 Fusible links....................................... 9-18
G
Gauges .............................................. 5-36 General maintenance........................... 9-17 General vehicle data............................ 11-4
12-2
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-8 Glove compartment............................. 5-79
H
Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 5-49 Hazard warning lights ......................... 5-44 Head restraints...................................... 4-6
Headlights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Dimmer ......................................... 5-48 Headlight flasher ............................ 5-48 Reminder buzzer............................. 5-48 Switch ........................................... 5-46
Heat Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat ............................................... 3-8
High beam indicator............................ 5-44 High-mounted stop light
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Replacement .................................. 9-26 High-Voltage components ................... 3-34 Hood ................................................... 9-3
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch................................................ 9-17
Horn switch........................................ 5-53 Hot water heater fluid................... 9-4, 11-7
I
If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2 i-MiEV................................................ 3-2
Cruising range.................................. 3-4 Main drive lithium-ion battery ........... 3-3 Main features ................................... 3-2 Important facts to know in case of an accident 10-3 Indicator and warning light package ..... 5-43 Indicators .......................................... 5-44 Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-16 Instrument cluster............................... 5-36 Intense cold Cautions and actions....................... 3-10 Intense heat Cautions and actions......................... 3-8 Interior lights ..................................... 5-76
J
Jump-starting ....................................... 8-2
K
Key reminder buzzer..................... 5-9, 5-20 Keyless entry system ............................ 5-5 Keys ................................................... 5-2
Alphabetical index
L
Labeling............................................. 11-2 License plate lights
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Replacement................................... 9-27 Liftgate .............................................. 5-11 Link System ....................................... 5-53 Loading information.............................. 6-6 Lubricants .......................................... 11-7
M
Main drive lithium-ion battery................ 3-3 Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery Level
Indicator .......................................... 3-49 MiEV Remote System......................... 3-36
12 Mirror Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-16 Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-17 Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ..
3-6
O
Odometer .................................. 5-37, 5-38 Oil
Transmission oil ............................. 11-7
12-3
Alphabetical index Operation under adverse driving conditions...
8-13 Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-17 Outside temperature display........ 5-37, 5-41
P
Parking ................................................ 6-6 Parking brake ................................. 5-16 Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-16
Parking lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22
Polishing............................................ 9-31 Power brakes...................................... 5-24 Power door locks .................................. 5-9 Power down warning light ................... 5-45 Power outlet ....................................... 5-76
12 Power windows .................................. 5-14 Precautions during Charging the Main Drive Lithium-ion Battery .......................... 3-15
Q
Quick charging ................................... 3-27
R
Radio General information about your radio 7-28
Ready indicator .................................. 5-44
12-4
Rear combination lights Bulb capacity.................................. 9-22 Replacement................................... 9-25
Rear side-marker lights Bulb capacity.................................. 9-22 Replacement................................... 9-26
Rear turn signal lights Bulb capacity.................................. 9-22 Replacement................................... 9-25
Rear window defogger switch .............. 5-52 Rear-view camera ............................... 5-34 Rearview mirror
Inside............................................. 5-16 Outside .......................................... 5-17 Refill capacities .................................. 11-7 Regenerative brake system indicator ..... 5-44 Regenerative braking............................ 3-3 Regular charging........................ 3-16, 3-26 Remote Climate Control .... 3-36, 3-46, 7-11 Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-21 Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-14 Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2 Reservoir cap....................................... 9-6
S
Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4 Seat .................................................... 4-2
Front seats ....................................... 4-3 Heated seat ...................................... 4-4 Rear seats ........................................ 4-5 Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2
Seat belt............................................... 4-8 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-11 Child restraint ................................ 4-13 Driver's seat belt reminder/warning light .. 4-10 Force limiter .................................. 4-13 Front passenger seat belt warning light ..... 4-11 Maintenance and inspection............. 4-20 Pre-tensioner .................................. 4-12 Seat belt extender ........................... 4-12 Seat belt instructions ......................... 4-9 Seat belt use during pregnancy......... 4-12
Selector lever ..................................... 5-21 Selector lever operation................... 5-21 Selector lever position indicator ....... 5-21 Selector lever positions ................... 5-22
Service brake...................................... 5-24
Service precautions ............................... 9-2
Service reminder........................ 5-37, 5-38
Skid control function........................... 5-29
Snow tires .......................................... 9-15
Speedometer ...................................... 5-36
Steering Wheel lock..................................... 5-20
Stop lights
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Replacement .................................. 9-25
Storage spaces .................................... 5-79
Sun visors .......................................... 5-75
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-20 How the Supplement Restraint System works .......................................... 4-23 Servicing ....................................... 4-34 Warning light ................................. 4-26
T
Tail lights Bulb capacity ................................. 9-22 Replacement .................................. 9-25
Theft-alarm system ............................. 5-12
Tire Quality grading............................... 10-2
Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-30
Tire repair kit ....................................... 8-5
Tires .................................................. 9-10 Inflation pressure ............................ 9-13 Maintenance................................... 9-15 Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-14 Rotation ......................................... 9-15 Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-6 Snow tires ...................................... 9-15 Tire and loading information placard . 6-7, 11-3 Tire chains ..................................... 9-16
Tread wear indicators ..................... 9-15 Towing.............................................. 8-11 Traction control function..................... 5-29 Trailer towing .................................... 6-10 Trip odometer ............................ 5-37, 5-38 Turn signal lights
Indicators ...................................... 5-44 Lever ............................................ 5-48
U
USB input terminal............................. 5-73 How to connect a USB memory device .... 5-73 How to connect an iPod .................. 5-74
V
Vanity mirror ..................................... 5-75 Vehicle care precautions ..................... 9-28 Vehicle dimensions ............................ 11-4 Vehicle labeling ................................. 11-2 Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-3 Vehicle weights.................................. 11-4 Vents .................................................. 7-2
W
Warning lights ................................... 5-44 Washer
Alphabetical index Fluid....................................... 9-7, 11-7 Rear window washer ....................... 5-51 Switch ........................................... 5-51 Windshield washer.......................... 5-51 Waxing .............................................. 9-31 Weights ............................................. 11-4 Wheel Specification .................................. 11-6 Wiper Rear window wiper ......................... 5-51 Windshield..................................... 5-50 Wiper blades .................................. 9-16
12
12-5
Acrobat Distiller 10.1.12 (Windows)